Fabric care article and method for conserving energy

ABSTRACT

Articles of manufacture and methods for providing energy conserving means to control and/or remove wrinkles from fabric. The article includes an aqueous wrinkle control composition in a package and a set of instructions associated with the package, the set of instructions includes instructions for controlling and/or removing wrinkles in an energy and/or environment conserving manner by applying the composition to wrinkled fabrics, manipulating the fabrics to remove wrinkles and allowing the fabrics to dry without the use of an iron or tumble dryer. Alternatively, the set of instructions can be provided through the electronic or print media or some combination thereof. The instructions can further include an instruction concerning the energy that is conserved through the use of the composition as a substitute for laundering and/or ironing. The instructions can further include a recommendation or endorsement from a government agency, non-profit organization, utility service provider, or some combination thereof.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

This application is a continuation in part application of U.S. Ser. No.09/805,099, Frankenbach, et al., filed Mar. 13, 2001 and that claimedthe benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/230,859, filed onSep. 7, 2000.

A portion of the disclosure of this patent document contains materialwhich is subject to copyright protection. The copyright owner has noobjection to the facsimile reproduction by an one of the patentdisclosure, as it appears in the Patent and Trademark Office patentfiles or records, but otherwise reserves all copyright rightswhatsoever.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present invention relates to methods for improving the performanceof compositions comprising water and optional ingredients for removingwrinkles from fabrics, the compositions being packaged with a dispenseras an article intended for distributing said compositions. Said methodsaccomplish several purposes including the teaching of information thatis critical to improving product performance and its acceptance. Themethods are also related to the extension of the useful life of clothingitems when treated with such compositions. The methods also encompasstechniques to mass market compositions in ways that heighten theawareness of such products both with traditional and non-traditionalconsumers via traditional and non-traditional marketing approaches andby distributing products through non-traditional channels to make themreadily available to all consumers.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The wrinkle control compositions that can benefit from the methods ofthe present invention are those compositions that enable the consumer toremove or control wrinkles in their fabrics without the application ofheat to cure or otherwise activate the composition. Several such wrinklecontrol products are currently available in the market.

In general, these products are niche or specialty products that are usedby consumers primarily when traveling. For instance, the Wrinkle Freeproduct available from Very Impressive Products, Inc. is a good exampleof this principal. It is highly priced with limited marketing anddistribution. It is stocked at American Automobile Association (AAA)Travel Agency Stores and is given only limited retail shelving. Otherwrinkle control products, such as Wrinkle Out™, are also difficult tolocate even in traditional distribution channels. These products havenot moved beyond the status of niche products and clearly do not enjoythe status of a product that is kept close at hand and is used ineveryday life in the manner of a body deodorant, laundry detergent,fabric softener, or toilet paper.

Other wrinkle control products have also failed to establish successfullarge markets. Amongst these are the ATO Care spray (manufactured byLion, Japan), Wrinkle Out™, manufactured by Emson®, Wrinkle Free®,manufactured by Very Incredible Products, Inc.© and Faultless®WrinkleManufactured by Bon Ami Co. Likewise, these products are also viewed asniche products by the consumer.

Most consumers are familiar with using a heated iron, ironing aids,steamers and various processes that require the application of heat toremove and control wrinkles from their fabrics. However, the typicalconsumer lacks even a general understanding of how to use a wrinklecontrol composition that does not require the application of heat, andthus, they do not have confidence in the ability of such a compositionto effectively remove or control wrinkles.

Existing wrinkle control products typically have enaged in minimaladvertising with no in depth advertising dedicated to educating theconsumer. To be successful, the consumer needs to be educated regardingthe proper use of the product, the product's effectiveness, theappearance of the fabric in the finished state, how the product might beincorporated into the consumer's everyday habits and lifestyles, theadditional non-wrinkle benefits that may be achieved with the productand how the product may be effectively and safely used by most membersof the consumer's household.

Therefore, there is a need for various methods for improving theperformance of a wrinkle control product by exposing consumers tonon-traditional advertisement programs that are geared towards teachingthe consumer proper use of the product, how to incorporate the productinto their daily lives, the variety of product uses and benefits, and toset appropriate expectations for the product's performance. Without thedissemination of such information, the consumer will never experiencethe full potential of these compositions.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides methods for improving the performance ofa consumer wrinkle control composition by making the compositionavailable to the consumer and providing information to the consumerconcerning the use of the composition to control wrinkles in fabricswithout the application of heat. The compositions useful in the presentinvention are essentially water together with optional ingredients suchas perfume, starch and others. The compositions are preferably stable,well dispersed, more preferably translucent, and even more preferablyclear. Information may be provided by teaching educational elements anddisseminating educational elements to consumers in an efficient,effective, and affordable manner as well as techniques for heighteningconsumer awareness of the product. The information that is provided tothe consumer concerns the use of the composition to remove or controlwrinkles in fabrics without the application of heat. In addition, theinformation can include instructions for the proper use of the product,the product's effectiveness, the appearance of the fabric in thefinished state after treatment, instructions on how the product can beincorporated into the consumer's everyday habits and lifestyles, theadditional non-wrinkle benefits that may be achieved with the productand how the composition can be effectively and safely used by mostmembers of the consumer's household.

The present invention also relates to methods for improving theperformance of wrinkle control compositions that are incorporated intocontainers having a spray dispenser to create an article of manufacturethat can facilitate treatment of fabrics and/or fabric surfaces withsaid compositions containing wrinkle control agent and other optionalingredients at a level that is effective, yet is not discernible whendried on the surfaces. The spray dispenser comprises a manuallyactivated as well as non-manual or power operated spray dispenser and acontainer for the wrinkle controlling composition.

The present invention further provides methods for improving theconsumer's acceptance of a spray wrinkle control composition for use incontroling wrinkles without the application of heat. The methodcomprises the steps of providing a wrinkle control composition to theconsumer and providing information to the consumer concerning the use ofthe composition to control wrinkles in fabric without the application ofheat to the fabric. The information to be provided in conjunction withthe composition concerns the proper use of the product, the product'seffectiveness, the appearance of the fabric in the finished state aftertreatment, instructions on how the product can be incorporated into theconsumer's everyday habits and lifestyles, additional non-wrinklebenefits that may be achieved with through the use of the compositionand how the composition can be effectively and safely used by mostmembers of the consumer's household.

In yet another process aspect of the present invention, methods areprovided for prolonging or extending the useful life of fabric itemsthat require frequent and repeated laundering processes that are proneto cause incremental damage to fabric fibers. These methods prolong theuseful life of such fabric items by enabling the item to be revitalizedor renewed for rewear without laundering, thus reducing the number oflaunderings and the resulting damage to fabric fibers over a givenperiod of time. These methods comprise the steps of providing thecomposition and providing information to the consumer regarding theproper use of the composition independent and apart from a launderingprocess.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

Each of the methods of the present invention comprise the steps ofproviding a consumer fabric wrinkle control composition that can providewrinkle control in fabrics without the application of heat to cure orotherwise activate the wrinkle controlling effect and by providinginformation concerning the use of such a composition to controlwrinkles. As described hereinafter, a variety of wrinkle controlcompositions may be used to advantage in the methods of the presentinvention. Likewise, a variety of information may be provided inconjunction with such compositions to improve the performance of thosecompositions, to improve the consumer acceptance of those compositionsand to prolong the useful life of a fabric article on which thecompositions can be used.

I. Providing a Wrinkle Control Composition

A variety of wrinkle control compositions may be used to advantage inthe methods of the present invention. Wrinkle control compositions musthowever, be capable of removing wrinkles from fabrics without theapplication of heat to cure or otherwise acitvate the wrinklecontrolling effect of the composition. Such compositions are describedin more detail in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,674,688, 4,661,268, 4,806,254,5,062,971, 5,100,566, 5,532,023, 5,573,695, 5,798,107, 5,965,517,5,968,404, and 5,997,759. Likewise, such compositions are the subject ofand are described in additional detail in U.S. Ser. No. 09/067,385,filed Apr. 27, 1998, Trinh et al.; U.S. Ser. No. 09/067,241, filed Apr.27, 1998, Trinh et al.; U.S. Ser. No. 09/208,215, filed Dec. 9, 1998,Trinh et al.; U.S. Ser. No. 09/457,847, filed Dec. 9, 1999, Trinh etal.; U.S. Ser. No. 09/503,525, filed Feb. 13, 2000, Frankenbach et al.;and U.S. Ser. No. 60/182,381, filed Aug. 9, 2000, Frankenbach et al.entitled “Polymer Compositions having specified pH for improveddispensing stability of wrinkle reducing composition and methods ofuse.”

Specifically, wrinkle control compositions useful in the methods of thepresent invention include:

-   -   (A). A composition comprising fluid carrier, preferably water.        Water provides a surprising degree of wrinkle prevention. The        compositions useful in the present invention typically contains        at least about 30% and less than 100% by weight of the        composition of water. Water suitable for the present composition        can come from many sources. It is preferable, but not essential        for the water to be distilled and/or deionized.    -   (B). Optionally, an effective amount of wrinkle control agent        selected from the group of silicones, fiber-fabric lubricants,        shape retention polymers, lithium salts, perfumes, fabric care        polysaccharides, and mixtures thereof. When wrinkle control        agent is included it is typically included at levels of at least        about 0.001% and typically less than about 10%.    -   (C). Optionally, to reduce surface tension, improve spreading,        penetration, and formulatability, an effective amount of        surfactant.    -   (D). Optionally, to plasticize fibers and shape-retention        polymer plus provide additional benefits such as increasing        antimicrobial efficacy, reducing surface tension of, and aiding        in perfume formulation and delivery, an effective amount the        composition of hydrophilic plasticizer and/or solvent.    -   (E). Optionally, an effective amount to absorb malodor of an        odor control agent.    -   (F). Optionally, but preferably, an effective amount to provide        olfactory effects of perfume.    -   (G). Optionally, an effective amount, to kill, or reduce the        growth of microbes, of antimicrobial active.    -   (H). Optionally, a effective level of propellant.    -   (I). Optionally, other ingredients including water-soluble        polyionic, anti-static agents, insect and/or moth repelling        agent, colorants, anti-clogging agents, and, viscosity control        agents.    -   (J). Optionally, mixtures of optional ingredients (B) through        (I).

The present invention also relates to concentrated compositions, whichare diluted to form compositions with the usage concentrations, as givenhereinabove, for use in the “usage conditions”.

A. Fluid Carrier

Wrinkle control compositions disclosed herein comprise a fluid carrierand the preferred fluid carrier is water. Surprisingly, water alone iscapable of plasticizing fibers such that a sufficient degree of wrinkleremoval and/or reduction can be attained by spraying water onto asurface and gently pulling or smoothing the garment to release wrinkles.Water is also inexpensive, environmentally sound, non-flammable andeasily disposed.

Although water alone is sufficient to remove wrinkles, the compositionspreferably comprise optional ingredients such as perfume, surfactant,water-miscible solvents, shape retention polymers, anti-microbial, andodor control agents, as well as other optional ingredients. The optionalingredients aid in improving the efficacy of water, increasing wrinklecontrol performance of the product, delivering aesthetics, andcontributing other desirable attributes as disclosed herein below.

Water with or without dissolved minerals and impurities is suitable forthe present invention, e.g. de-ionized, distilled, or tap water, butpurified water is preferred. The present invention typically contains atleast about 30% and less than about 100% by weight of the composition ofwater.

Optional Ingredients

Optionally, the present wrinkle controlling composition can also containthe following:

B. Wrinkle Control Agents

Optionally, but preferably, the composition contains an effective amountof fiber-fabric wrinkle control agent to enhance the wrinkle controlperformance of the composition. The wrinkle control agent is preferablyselected from the group consisting of: fiber lubricant, shape retentionpolymer, lithium salt, perfumes, fabric care polysaccharide, andmixtures thereof. When wrinkle control agent is included it is typicallyincluded at levels of at least about 0.001% and less than about 10% ofthe usage composition.

1. Fiber Lubricants

The present invention can use fiber-fabric lubricants to impart alubricating property, or increased gliding ability, to fibers in fabric,particularly clothing. Not to be bound by theory, it is believed thatwater and other alcoholic solvents break, or weaken, the hydrogen bondsthat hold the wrinkles in fabric, and fabric lubricants facilitate themovement of fibers with respect to one another (glide) to furtherrelease the fibers from the wrinkle condition in wet or damp fabrics.After the fabric is dried, the residual fiber lubricant, especiallysilicone, can provide lubricity to reduce the tendency of fabric tore-wrinkle.

a) Silicone

Silicone is a preferred fiber lubricant, for the present invention, toimpart a lubricating property, or increased gliding ability, to fibersin fabric, particularly clothing. Nonlimiting examples of usefulsilicones in the composition of the present invention include noncurablesilicones such as silicone polyethers (also known as dimethiconecopolyols), polydimethylsilicone and volatile silicones, and curablesilicones such as aminosilicones, phenylsilicones and hydroxysilicones.The word “silicone” as used herein preferably refers to soluble, selfemulsifying, or emulsified silicones, including those that arecommercially available as single components or as mixture, e.g.compositions formulated by the supplier to achieve solubilization and/oremulsification of the silicone, unless otherwise described. Preferably,the silicones comprise hydrophobic moieties; are neither irritating,toxic, nor otherwise harmful when applied to fabric or when they come incontact with human skin; are chemically stable under normal use andstorage conditions; and are capable of being deposited on fabric.

When the composition of this invention is to be dispensed from a spraydispenser in a consumer household setting, the noncurable silicones suchas silicone polyether and polydimethylsilicone are preferred. Curableand/or reactive silicones such as amino-functional silicones andsilicones with reactive groups such as Si—OH, Si—H, silanes, and thelike, are not preferred in this situation, because the portion of thecomposition that is sprayed but misses the garment, and falls instead onflooring surfaces, such as rug, carpet, concrete floor, tiled floor,linoleum floor, bathtub floor, can leave a silicone layer that is curedand/or bonded to the flooring surfaces. Such silicones that are bondedto surfaces are difficult to remove from the flooring surfaces. Flooringsurfaces thus become slippery and can present a safety hazard to thehousehold members. The curable and reactive silicones can be used incompositions specifically designed for use in enclosed areas such as ina dewrinkling cabinet. Many types of aminofunctional silicones alsocause fabric yellowing. Thus, the silicones that cause fabricdiscoloration are also not preferred.

A highly preferred, but nonlimiting class of silicones surfactantsuseful for the present invention is the class of silicone polyethersalternately know as dimethicone copolyols and polyalkylene oxidepolysiloxanes. Typically the polyalkylene oxide polysiloxanes have adimethyl polysiloxane hydrophobic moiety and one or more hydrophilicpolyalkylene chains. The hydrophilic polyakylene chains can beincorporated as side chains (pendant moieties) or as block copolymermoieties with the polysiloxane hydrophobic moiety. Silicone polyethersare described by the following general formulas:R¹—(CH₃)₂SiO—[(CH₃)₂SiO]_(a)—[(CH₃)(R¹)SiO]_(b)—Si(CH₃)₂—R¹wherein a+b are from about 1 to about 50, preferably from about 1 toabout 30, more preferably from about 1 to about 25, and each R¹ is thesame or different and is selected from the group consisting of methyland a poly(ethyleneoxide/propyleneoxide) copolymer group having thegeneral formula:—(CH₂)_(n)O(C₂H₄O)_(c)(C₃H₆O)_(d)R²with at least one R¹ being a poly(ethyleneoxy/propyleneoxy) copolymergroup, and wherein n is 3 or 4, preferably 3; total c (for allpolyalkyleneoxy side groups) has a value of from 1 to about 100,preferably from about 6 to about 100; total c+d has a value of fromabout 5 to about 150, preferably from about 7 to about 100 and each R²is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting ofhydrogen, an alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and an acetyl group,preferably hydrogen and/or methyl group. Each polyalkylene oxidepolysiloxane has at least one R¹ group being apoly(ethyleneoxide/propyleneoxide) copolymer group.

Nonlimiting examples of these silicone polyethers are the Silwet®materials which are available from CK-Witco. Representative Silwet®silicone polyethers which contain only ethyleneoxy (C₂H₄O) groups are asfollows. Name Average MW Average a + b Average total c L-7608 600 1 8L-7607 1,000 2 17 L-77 600 1 9 L-7605 6,000 20 99 L-7604 4,000 21 53L-7600 4,000 11 68 L-7657 5,000 20 76 L-7602 3,000 20 29 L-7622 10,00088 75 L-8600 2,100 L-8610 1,700 L-8620 2,000

Nonlimiting examples of Silwet® silicone polyethers which contain bothethyleneoxy (C₂H₄O) and propyleneoxy (C₃H₆O) groups are as follows: NameAverage MW EO/PO ratio L-720 12,000 50/50 L-7001 20,000 40/60 L-70028,000 50/50 L-7210 13,000 20/80 L-7200 19,000 75/25 L-7220 17,000 20/80

Nonlimiting examples of Silwet® silicone polyethers which contain onlypropyleneoxy (C₃H₆O) groups are as follows: Name Average MW L7500 3,000L7510 13,000 L7550 300 L8500 2,800

The molecular weight of the polyalkyleneoxy group (R¹) is less than orequal to about 10,000. The preferred molecular weight of the siliconepolyether is dependent on the exact functionality is a givencomposition. If propyleneoxy groups are present in the polyalkylenoxychain, they can be distributed randomly in the chain or exist as blocks.Preferred Silwets® provide lubricity to aid in wrinkle removal and canalso provide softness which is especially preferred when the polymerleaves a rough feeling on the surface of the fabric. Nonlimitingexamples of preferred Silwets® include L77, L7001, L7200, and L7087.Some nonlimiting preferred Dow Corning® silicone polyethers include DowCorning® 190 Dow Corning® Q2-5211. Other nonlimiting examples ofsilicone polyethers useful in the present invention include include thefollowing compounds available from Dow Corning® 193, FF-400 Fluid,Q2-5220, Q4-3667, as well as compounds available from Toray Dow CorningSilicone Co., Ltd. know as SH3771C, SH3772C, SH3773C, SH3746, SH3748,SH3749, SH8400, SF8410, and SH8700, KF351 (A), KF352 (A), KF354 (A), andKF615 (A) of Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., TSF4440, TSF4445, TSF4446,TSF4452 of Toshiba Silicone Co.

When optional cyclodextrin is used, it is preferred to use siliconepolyethers with higher molecular weights, at least about 5,000,preferably at least about 10,000 to prevent significant interaction withthe cyclodextrin. When the silicone polyether will be used to emulsifysilicone oils, provide maximal penetration, reduce viscosity of thecomposition, and/or enhance spray characteristics it is preferably touse a silicone polyether with a molecular weight of typically less thanabout 10,000, preferably less than about 8,000, and more preferably lessthan about 5,000.

Besides surface activity, silicone polyethers can also provide otherbenefits, such as antistatic benefits, lubricity, softness to fabrics,and improvements in fabric appearance.

The preparation of silicone polyethers is well known in the art.Silicone polyethers of the present invention can be prepared accordingto the procedure set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 3,299,112, incorporatedherein by reference. Typically, silicone polyethers of the presentinvention are readily prepared by an addition reaction between ahydrosiloxane (i.e., a siloxane containing silicon-bonded hydrogen) andan alkenyl ether (e.g., a vinyl, allyl, or methallyl ether) of an alkoxyor hydroxy end-blocked polyalkylene oxide). The reaction conditionsemployed in addition reactions of this type are well known in the artand in general involve heating the reactants (e.g., at a temperature offrom about 85° C. to 110° C.) in the presence of a platinum catalyst(e.g., chloroplatinic acid) and a solvent (e.g., toluene).

Other nonlimiting silicone compounds and emulsions including useful tothe present invention includes non-curable silicones (such as but notlimited to volatile silicones, silicone oils, and polydimethylsilicones) and curable silicones (such as, but not limited toaminosilicones, phenylsilicones, and hydroxylsilicones. Also useful inthe present compositions are silicone emulsions that comprise siliconeoils such as 346 Emulsion, 347 Emulsion, and HV-490 available from DowCorning. Specifically, the preferred silicone oil is dimethylsiloxanesilicone, more preferably volatile dimethylsiloxane. The volatilesilicones provide surprisingly good fiber lubrication without the riskof unacceptable build-up on the fabric and/or surrounding surfaces dueto their volatile nature. The volatile silicones also provide adesirable control over the formation of wrinkles in fabrics while thefabrics are being dried.

Preferred silicones are neither irritating, toxic, nor otherwise harmfulwhen applied to fabric or when they come in contact with human skin, andare chemically stable under normal use and storage conditions, and arecapable of being deposited on fabric.

When the composition of this invention is to be dispensed from a spraydispenser in a consumer household setting, the noncurable silicones suchas polydimethylsilicone, and especially the volatile silicones, arepreferred. Curable and/or reactive silicones such as amino-functionalsilicones and silicones with reactive groups such as Si—OH, Si—H,silanes, and the like, are not preferred in this situation, because theportion of the composition that is sprayed but misses the garment, andfalls instead on flooring surfaces, such as rug, carpet, concrete floor,tiled floor, linoleum floor, bathtub floor, can leave a silicone layerthat is cured and/or bonded to the flooring surfaces. Such siliconesthat are bonded to surfaces are difficult to remove from the flooringsurfaces. The flooring surfaces thus become slippery and can present asafety hazard to the household members. The curable and reactivesilicones can be used in compositions specifically designed for use inenclosed areas such as in a dewrinkling enclosure, e.g., cabinet. Manytypes of aminofunctional silicones also cause fabric yellowing. Thus,the silicones that cause fabric discoloration are also not preferred.Indeed, the present compositions are preferably essentially free of anymaterial that would soil or stain fabrics or are essentially free ofmaterial at a level that would soil or stain fabrics.

Another preferred silicone is volatile silicone fluid which can becyclic silicone fluid of the formula [(CH₃)₂SiO]_(n) where n rangesbetween about 3 to about 7, preferably about 5, or a linear siliconepolymer fluid having the formula (CH₃)₃SiO[(CH₃)₂SiO]_(m)Si(CH₃)₃ wherem can be 0 or greater and has an average value such that the viscosityat 25° C. of the silicone fluid is preferably about 5 centistokes orless.

The non-volatile silicones that are useful in the composition of thepresent invention are polyalkyl and/or phenylsilicones silicone fluidsand gums with the following structure:A-Si(R²)—O—[Si(R²)—O—]_(q)—Si(R₂)-AThe alkyl groups substituted on the siloxane chain (R) or at the ends ofthe siloxane chains (A) can have any structure as long as the resultingsilicones remain fluid at room temperature.

Each R group preferably can be alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, or hydroxyalkylgroup, and mixtures thereof, more preferably, each R is methyl, ethyl,propyl or phenyl group, most preferably R is methyl. Each A group whichblocks the ends of the silicone chain can be hydrogen, methyl, methoxy,ethoxy, hydroxy, propoxy, and aryloxy group, preferably methyl. SuitableA groups include hydrogen, methyl, methoxy, ethoxy, hydroxy, andpropoxy. q is preferably an integer from about 7 to about 8,000. Thepreferred silicones are polydimethyl siloxanes; more preferred siliconesare polydimethyl siloxanes having a viscosity of from about 50 to about1000,000 centistokes at 25° C. Mixtures of volatile silicones andnon-volatile polydimethyl siloxanes are also preferred. Suitableexamples include silicones offered by Dow Corning Corporation under thetrade names 200 Fluid and 245 Fluid, and the General Electric Companyunder the trade names SF1173, SF1202, SF1204, SF96, and Viscasil®.

Other useful silicone materials, but less preferred thanpolydimethylsiloxanes, include materials of the formula:HO—[Si(CH₃)₂—O]_(x)—{Si(OH)[(CH₂)₃—NH—(CH₂)₂—NH₂]O}_(y)—Hwherein x and y are integers which depend on the molecular weight of thesilicone, preferably having a viscosity of from about 10,000 cst toabout 500,000 cst at 25° C. This material is also known as“amodimethicone”. Although silicones with a high number, e.g., greaterthan about 0.5 millimolar equivalent of amine groups can be used, theyare not preferred because they can cause fabric yellowing.

Similarly, silicone materials which can be used correspond to theformulas:(R¹)_(a)G_(3-a)—Si—(—OSiG₂)_(n)—(OSiG_(b)(R¹)_(2-b))_(m)—O—SiG_(3-a)(R¹)_(a)wherein G is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, phenyl, OH,and/or C₁-C₈ alkyl; a denotes 0 or an integer from 1 to 3; b denotes 0or 1; the sum of n+m is a number from 1 to about 2,000; R¹ is amonovalent radical of formula C_(p)H_(2p)L in which p is an integer from2 to 8 and L is selected from the group consisting of:

-   -   —N(R²)CH₂—CH₂—N(R²)₂;    -   —N(R²)₂;    -   —N⁺(R²)₃A⁻; and    -   —N⁺(R²)CH₂—CH₂N⁺H₂A⁻        wherein each R² is chosen from the group consisting of hydrogen,        phenyl, benzyl, saturated hydrocarbon radical, and each A⁻        denotes compatible anion, e.g., a halide ion; and    -   R³—N⁺(CH₃)₂-Z-[Si(CH₃)₂O]_(f)—Si(CH₃)₂-Z-N⁺(CH₃)₂—R³.2CH₃COO⁻        wherein    -   Z=—CH₂—CH(OH)—CH₂—CH₂)₃—    -   R³ denotes a long chain alkyl group; and    -   f denotes an integer of at least about 2.

In the formulas herein, each definition is applied individually andaverages are included.

Another silicone material which can be used, but is less preferred thanpolydimethyl siloxanes, has the formula:(CH₃)₃Si—[O—Si(CH₃)₂]_(n)—{OSi(CH₃)[(CH₂)₃—NH—(CH₂)₂—NH₂]}_(m)—OSi(CH₃)₃wherein n and m are the same as before. The preferred silicones of thistype are those which do not cause fabric discoloration.

Mixtures of silicone are also preferred to achieve a range of propertieswithin one composition. And in some aspects of the invention, mixturesof silicones are highly useful. For instance, when silicone oils areused, these can be very difficult to emulsify. Surprisingly, it is foundthat silicone polyethers provide an extremely effective means ofsolubilizing silicone oils.

b) Synthetic Solid Particles

Solid polymeric particles of average particle size smaller than about 10microns, preferably smaller than 5 microns, more preferably smaller thanabout 1 micron, e.g., Velustrol® P-40 oxidized polyethylene emulsionavailable from Clariant, can be used as a lubricant, also Tospearl™ 105,120, 130, 145, 240 polydimethyl siloxane polymers available from GESilicones, since they can provide a “roller-bearing” action. When solidpolymeric particles are present, they are present at an effective amountto provide lubrication of the fibers, typically from about 0.01% toabout 3%, preferably from about 0.05% to about 1%, more preferably fromabout 0.1% to about 0.5%, by weight of the usage composition.

c) Quaternary Ammonium Compounds

Although many quaternary ammonium compounds with alkyl substituents aresuitable for this composition, quaternary ammonium compounds thatcontain hydrocarbon groups, including substituted groups an groups thatare part of, e.g., acyl groups, which are unsaturated or branched areparticularly suited for this composition. In some cases, amineprecursors of the quaternary ammonium compounds can themselves be usefulin this composition.

Suitable quaternary ammonium compounds for use in the wrinklecomposition have been previously disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,759,990,issued Jun. 2, 1998 in the names of E. H. Wahl, H. B. Tordil, T. Trinh,E. R. Carr, R. O. Keys, and L. M. Meyer, for Concentrated FabricSoftening Composition with Good Freeze/Thaw Recovery and HighlyUnsaturated Fabric Softener Compound Therefor, and in U.S. Pat. No.5,747,443, issued May 5, 1998 in the names of Wahl, Trinh, Gosselink,Letton, and Sivik for Fabric Softening Compound/Composition. Anindicator of the suitability of quaternary ammonium actives for use inthe compositions of the present invention is the phase transitiontemperature. Preferably, the phase transition temperature of thequaternary ammonium active or mixture of actives, containing less thanabout 5% organic solvent or water, is less than about 50° C., morepreferably less than about 35° C., even more preferably less than about20° C., and yet even more preferably less than about 10° C., or isamorphous and has no significant endothermic phase transition in theregion from about −50° C. to about 100° C.

The phase transition temperature can be measured with a Mettler TA 3000differential scanning calorimeter with Mettler TC 10A Processor.

Typical suitable quaternary ammonium compounds or amine precursors aredefined hereinafter.

Preferred Diester Quaternary Ammonium Active Compound (DEQA)

(1) The first type of DEQA preferably comprises, as the principalactive, [DEQA (1)] compounds of the formula{R_(4-m)—N⁺—[(CH₂)_(n)—Y—R¹]_(m)}X⁻wherein each R substituent is either hydrogen, a short chain C₁-C₆,preferably C₁-C₃ alkyl or hydroxyalkyl group, e.g., methyl (mostpreferred), ethyl, propyl, hydroxyethyl, and the like, poly (C₂₋₃alkoxy), preferably polyethoxy, group, benzyl, or mixtures thereof; eachm is 2 or 3; each n is from 1 to about 4, preferably 2; each Y is—O—(O)C—, —C(O)—O—, —NR—C(O)—, or —C(O)—NR—; the sum of carbons in eachR¹, plus one when Y is —O—(O)C— or —NR—C(O)—, is C₁₂-C₂₂, preferablyC₁₄-C₂₀, with each R¹ being a hydrocarbyl, or substituted hydrocarbylgroup, and X⁻ -can be any quaternary ammonium-compatible anion,preferably, chloride, bromide, methylsulfate, ethylsulfate, sulfate, andnitrate, more preferably chloride or methyl sulfate (As used herein, the“percent of quaternary ammonium active” containing a given R¹ group isbased upon taking a percentage of the total active based upon thepercentage that the given R¹ group is, of the total R¹ groups present.);

(2) A second type of DEQA active [DEQA (2)] has the formula:[R₃N⁺CH₂CH(YR¹)(CH₂YR¹¹)]X⁻wherein each Y, R, R¹, and X⁻ have the same meanings as before. Suchcompounds include those having the formula:[CH₃]₃N⁽⁺⁾[CH₂CH(CH₂O(O)CR¹)O(O)CR¹]Cl⁽⁻⁾wherein each R is a methyl or ethyl group and preferably each R¹ is inthe range of C₁₅ to C₁₉. As used herein, when the diester is specified,it can include the monoester that is present. The amount of monoesterthat can be present is the same as in DEQA (1).

These types of agents and general methods of making them are disclosedin U.S. Pat. No. 4,137,180, Naik et al., issued Jan. 30, 1979, which isincorporated herein by reference. An example of preferred DEQA (2) isthe “propyl” ester quaternary ammonium active having the formula1,2-di(acyloxy)-3-trimethylammoniopropane chloride, where the acyl isthe same as that of FA¹ disclosed hereinafter.

Some preferred wrinkle compositions of the present invention contain asan essential component from about 0.025% to about 10%, preferably fromabout 0.05% to about 5%, more preferably from about 0.1% to about 3%,and even more preferably from about 0.2% to about 2% by weight of thecomposition, of quaternary ammonium active having the formula:[R¹C(O)OC₂H₄]_(m)N⁺(R)_(4-m)X⁻wherein each R¹ in a compound is a C₆-C₂₂ hydrocarbyl group, preferablyhaving an IV from about 70 to about 140 based upon the IV of theequivalent fatty acid with the cis/trans ratio preferably being asdescribed hereinafter, m is a number from 1 to 3 on the weight averagein any mixture of compounds, each R in a compound is a C₁₋₃ alkyl orhydroxy alkyl group, the total of m and the number of R groups that arehydroxyethyl groups equaling 3, and X is a quaternary ammoniumcompatible anion, preferably methyl sulfate. Preferably the cis:transisomer ratio of the fatty acid (of the C18:1 component) is at leastabout 1:1, preferably about 2:1, more preferably about 3:1, and evenmore preferably about 4:1, or higher.

These preferred compounds, or mixtures of compounds, have (a) either aHunter “L” transmission of at least about 85, typically from about 85 toabout 95, preferably from about 90 to about 95, more preferably aboveabout 95, if possible, (b) only low, relatively non-detectable levels,at the conditions of use, of odorous compounds selected from the groupconsisting of: isopropyl acetate; 2,2′-ethylidenebis(oxy)bis-propane;1,3,5-trioxane; and/or short chain fatty acid (4-12, especially 6-10,carbon atoms) esters, especially methyl esters; or (c) preferably, both.

The Hunter L transmission is measured by (1) mixing the quaternaryammonium active with solvent at a level of about 10% of active, toassure clarity, the preferred solvent being ethoxylated (one mole EO)2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentanediol and (2) measuring the L color valueagainst distilled water with a Hunter Color QUEST® colorimeter made byHunter Associates Laboratory, Reston, Va.

The level of odorant is defined by measuring the level of odorant in aheadspace over a sample of the quaternary ammonium active (about 92%active). Chromatograms are generated using about 200 mL of head spacesample over about 2.0 grams of sample. The head space sample is trappedon to a solid absorbent and thermally desorbed onto a column directlyvia cryofocussing at about −100° C. The identifications of materials isbased on the peaks in the chromatograms. Some impurities identified arerelated to the solvent used in the quaternization process, (e.g.,ethanol and isopropanol). The ethoxy and methoxy ethers are typicallysweet in odor. There are C₆-C₈ methyl esters found in a typical currentcommercial sample, but not in the typical quaternary ammonium actives ofthis invention. These esters contribute to the perceived poorer odor ofthe current commercial samples. The level of each odorant in ng/L foundin the head space over a preferred active is as follows: Isopropylacetate—<1; 1,3,5-trioxane—<5; 2,2′-ethylidenebis(oxy)-bispropane—<1; C₆methyl ester—<1; C₈ Methyl ester—<1; and C₁₀ Methyl ester—<1.

The acceptable level of each odorant is as follows: isopropyl acetateshould be less than about 5, preferably less than about 3, and morepreferably less than about 2, nanograms per liter (ηg/L.);2,2′-ethylidenebis(oxy)bis-propane should be less than about 200,preferably less than about 100, more preferably less than about 10, andeven more preferably less than about 5, nanograms per liter (ηg/L.);1,3,5-trioxane should be less than about 50, preferably less than about20, more preferably less than about 10, and even more preferably lessthan about 7, nanograms per liter (ηg/L.); and/or each short chain fattyacid (4-12, especially 6-10, carbon atoms) ester, especially methylesters should be less than about 4, preferably less than about 3, andmore preferably less than about 2, nanograms per liter (ηg/L.).

The elimination of color and odor materials can either be accomplishedafter formation of the compound, or, preferably, by selection of thereactants and the reaction conditions. Preferably, the reactants areselected to have good odor and color. For example, it is possible toobtain fatty acids, or their esters, for sources of the long fatty acylgroup, that have good color and odor and which have extremely low levelsof short chain (C₄₋₁₂, especially C₆₋₁₀) fatty acyl groups. Also, thereactants can be cleaned up prior to use. For example, the fatty acidreactant can be double or triple distilled to remove color and odorcausing bodies and remove short chain fatty acids. Additionally, thecolor of a triethanolamine reactant, if used, needs to be controlled toa low color level (e.g., a color reading of about 20 or less on the APHAscale). The degree of clean up required is dependent on the level ofuse, clarity of the product, and the presence of other ingredients. Forexample, adding a dye or starting with an opaque product can cover upsome colors. However, for clear and/or light colored products, the colormust be almost non-detectable. This is especially true as the level ofthe quaternary ammonium compound used in the product goes up. The degreeof clean up would be especially important in products sold asconcentrates that are intended for dilution by the consumer. Similarly,the odor can be covered up by higher levels of perfume, but as perfumelevel increases, cost associated with this approach increases too, alsomany consumers prefer a product with a lighter scent which precludes theapproach of using higher perfume levels. Odor quality can be furtherimproved by use of, e.g., ethanol as the quaternization reactionsolvent.

Preferred biodegradable quaternary ammonium compounds comprisequaternary ammonium salt, the quaternary ammonium salt being aquaternized product of the condensation reaction between:

-   a)—a fraction of saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched fatty    acids, or of derivatives of said acids, said fatty acids or    derivatives each possessing a hydrocarbon chain in which the number    of atoms is between 5 and 21, and-   b)—triethanolamine,    characterized in that said condensation product has an acid value,    measured by titration of the condensation product with a standard    KOH solution against a phenolphthalein indicator, of less than about    6.5.

The acid value is preferably less than or equal to about 5, morepreferably less than about 3.

The acid value is determined by titration of the condensation productwith a standard KOH solution against a phenolphthalein indicatoraccording to ISO#53402. The Acid Value (AV) is expressed as mg KOH/g ofthe condensation product.

These quaternary ammonium compounds for use herein are typicallymixtures of materials. The weight percentages of compounds wherein one(monoester), two (diester), or three (triester) of the triethanolaminehydroxy groups is esterified with a fatty acyl group are as follows:Monoester—from about 12% to about 22%; diester—from about 43% to about57%; and triester—from about 13% to about 28%. These compounds, asformed and used in the formulation of wrinkle compositions, typicallycontain from about 6% to about 20% by weight of solvent, e.g., fromabout 3% to about 10% of a lower molecular alcohol like ethanol and fromabout 3% to about 10% of solvent that is more hydrophobic, like hexyleneglycol.

Preferred cationic, preferably biodegradable, quaternary, ammoniumcompounds can contain the group —(O)CR¹ which is derived from animalfats, unsaturated, and polyunsaturated, fatty acids, e.g., oleic acid,and/or partially hydrogenated fatty acids, derived from vegetable oilsand/or partially hydrogenated vegetable oils, such as, canola oil,safflower oil, peanut oil, sunflower oil, corn oil, soybean oil, talloil, rice bran oil, etc. Non-limiting examples of fatty acids (FA) arelisted in U.S. Pat. No. 5,759,990 at column 4, lines 45-66.

Mixtures of fatty acids, and mixtures of FAs that are derived fromdifferent fatty acids can be used, and are preferred. Nonlimitingexamples of FA's that can be blended, to form FA's of this invention areas follows: Fatty Acyl Group FA¹ FA² FA³ C₁₄ 0 0 1 C₁₆ 3 11 25 C₁₈ 3 420 C14:1 0 0 0 C16:1 1 1 0 C18:1 79 27 45 C18:2 13 50 6 C18:3 1 7 0Unknowns 0 0 3 Total 100 100 100 IV 99 125-138 56 cis/trans (C18:1) 5-6Not Available 7 TPU 14 57 6FA¹ is a partially hydrogenated fatty acid prepared from canola oil,FA² is a fatty acid prepared from soy bean oil, andFA³ is a slightly hydrogenated tallow fatty acid.

Preferred quaternary ammonium actives contain an effective amount ofmolecules containing two ester linked hydrophobic groups [R¹C(CO)O—],said actives being referred to herein as “DEQA's”, are those that areprepared as a single DEQA from blends of all the different fatty acidsthat are represented (total fatty acid blend), rather than from blendsof mixtures of separate finished DEQA's that are prepared from differentportions of the total fatty acid blend.

It is preferred that at least a majority of the fatty acyl groups areunsaturated, e.g., from about 50% to 100%, preferably from about 55% toabout 99%, more preferably from about 60% to about 98%, and that thetotal level of active containing polyunsaturated fatty acyl groups (TPU)be preferably from 0% to about 30%. The cis/trans ratio for theunsaturated fatty acyl groups is usually important, with the cis/transratio being from about 1:1 to about 50:1, the minimum being about 1:1,preferably at least about 3:1, and more preferably from about 4:1 toabout 20:1. (As used herein, the “percent of quaternary ammonium active”containing a given R¹ group is the same as the percentage of that sameR¹ group is to the total R¹ groups used to form all of the quaternaryammonium actives.)

The unsaturated, including the preferred polyunsaturated, fatty acyland/or alkylene groups, discussed hereinbefore and hereinafter,surprisingly provide good dewrinkling and effective softening, but alsoprovide better rewetting characteristics, good antistaticcharacteristics, and especially, superior recovery after freezing andthawing.

These unsaturated actives are also easier to process at lowertemperatures. These highly unsaturated materials (total level of activecontaining polyunsaturated fatty acyl groups (TPU) being typically fromabout 3% to about 30%, with only the low amount of solvent that normallyis associated with such materials, i.e., from about 5% to about 20%,preferably from about 8% to about 25%, more preferably from about 10 toabout 20%, weight of the total quaternary ammonium/solvent mixture areeasier to formulate into the product and remain in stable solutions,emulsions, and or dispersions longer. This ability to process theactives at low temperatures is especially important for thepolyunsaturated groups, since it minimizes degradation. Additionalprotection against degradation can be provided when the compounds andwrinkle compositions contain effective antioxidants, chelants, and/orreducing agents, as disclosed hereinafter.

It will be understood that substituents R and R¹ can optionally besubstituted with various groups such as alkoxy or hydroxyl groups, andcan be straight, or branched so long as the groups maintain theirbasically hydrophobic character.

A preferred long chain DEQA is the DEQA prepared from sources containinghigh levels of polyunsaturation, i.e.,N,N-di(acyl-oxyethyl)-N,N-methylhydroxyethylammonium methyl sulfate,where the acyl is derived from fatty acids containing sufficientpolyunsaturation, e.g., mixtures of tallow fatty acids and soybean fattyacids. Another preferred long chain DEQA is the dioleyl (nominally)DEQA, i.e., DEQA in whichN,N-di(oleoyl-oxyethyl)-N,N-methylhydroxyethylammonium methyl sulfate isthe major ingredient. Preferred sources of fatty acids for such DEQAsare vegetable oils, and/or partially hydrogenated vegetable oils, withhigh contents of unsaturated, e.g., oleoyl groups.

As used herein, when the DEQA diester (m=2) is specified, it can includethe monoester (m=1) and/or triester (m=3) that are present. Preferably,at least about 30% of the DEQA is in the diester form, and from 0% toabout 30% can be DEQA monoester, e.g., there are three R groups and oneR¹ group.

The above compounds can be prepared using standard reaction chemistry.In one synthesis of a di-ester variation of DTDMAC, triethanolamine ofthe formula N(CH₂CH₂OH)₃ is esterified, preferably at two hydroxylgroups, with an acid chloride of the formula R¹C(O)Cl, to form an aminewhich can be made cationic by acidification (one R is H) to be one typeof active, or then quaternized with an alkyl halide, RX, to yield thedesired reaction product (wherein R and R¹ are as defined hereinbefore).However, it will be appreciated by those skilled in the chemical artsthat this reaction sequence allows a broad selection of agents to beprepared.

In preferred DEQA (1) and DEQA (2) quaternary ammonium actives, each R¹is a hydrocarbyl, or substituted hydrocarbyl, group, preferably, alkyl,monounsaturated alkenyl, and polyunsaturated alkenyl groups, with thequaternary ammonium active containing polyunsaturated alkenyl groupsbeing preferably at least about 3%, more preferably at least about 5%,more preferably at least about 10%, and even more preferably at leastabout 15%, by weight of the total quaternary ammonium active present;the actives preferably containing mixtures of R¹ groups, especiallywithin the individual molecules.

The DEQAs herein can also contain a low level of fatty acid, which canbe from unreacted starting material used to form the DEQA and/or as aby-product of any partial degradation (hydrolysis) of the quaternaryammonium active in the finished composition. It is preferred that thelevel of free fatty acid be low, preferably below about 15%, morepreferably below about 10%, and even more preferably below about 5%, byweight of the quaternary ammonium active.

The quaternary ammonium actives herein are preferably prepared by aprocess wherein a chelant, preferably a diethylenetriaminepentaacetate(DTPA) and/or an ethylene diamine-N,N′-disuccinate (EDDS) is added tothe process. Another acceptable chelant istetrakis-(2-hydroxylpropyl)ethylenediamine (TPED). Also, preferably,antioxidants are added to the fatty acid immediately after distillationand/or fractionation and/or during the esterification reactions and/orpost-added to the finished quaternary ammonium active. The resultingactive has reduced discoloration and malodor associated therewith.

The total amount of added chelating agent is preferably within the rangeof from about 10 ppm to about 5,000 ppm, more preferably within therange of from about 100 ppm to about 2500 ppm by weight of the formedquaternary ammonium active. The source of triglyceride is preferablyselected from the group consisting of animal fats, vegetable oils,partially hydrogenated vegetable oils, and mixtures thereof. Morepreferably, the vegetable oil or partially hydrogenated vegetable oil isselected from the group consisting of canola oil, partially hydrogenatedcanola oil, safflower oil, partially hydrogenated safflower oil, peanutoil, partially hydrogenated peanut oil, sunflower oil, partiallyhydrogenated sunflower oil, corn oil, partially hydrogenated corn oil,soybean oil, partially hydrogenated soybean oil, tall oil, partiallyhydrogenated tall oil, rice bran oil, partially hydrogenated rice branoil, and mixtures thereof. Most preferably, the source of triglycerideis canola oil, partially hydrogenated canola oil, and mixtures thereof.The process can also include the step of adding from about 0.01% toabout 2% by weight of the composition of an antioxidant compound to anyor all of the steps in the processing of the triglyceride up to, andincluding, the formation of the quaternary ammonium active.

The above processes produce a quaternary ammonium active with reducedcoloration and malodor.

Other Quaternary Ammonium Actives

Other less preferred quaternary ammonium actives include, but are notlimited to, those disclosed hereinafter. When quaternary ammoniumcompounds are include in the wrinkle composition, these less preferredquaternary ammonium actives can be present in minor amounts, eitheralone, or as part of the total amount of quaternary ammonium in the saidcomposition, said other fabric quaternary ammonium active being selectedfrom:

(1) quaternary ammonium having the formula:[R_(4-m)—N⁽⁺⁾—R¹ _(m)]A⁻wherein each m is 2 or 3, each R¹ is a C₆-C₂₂, preferably C₁₄-C₂₀, butno more than one being less than about C₁₂ and then the other is atleast about 16, hydrocarbyl, or substituted hydrocarbyl substituent,preferably C₁₀-C₂₀ alkyl or alkenyl (unsaturated alkyl, includingpolyunsaturated alkyl, also referred to sometimes as “alkylene”), mostpreferably C₁₂-C₁₈ alkyl or alkenyl, and where the Iodine Value(hereinafter referred to as “IV”) of a fatty acid containing this R¹group is from about 70 to about 140, more preferably from about 80 toabout 130; and most preferably from about 90 to about 115 (as usedherein, the term “Iodine Value” means the Iodine Value of a “parent”fatty acid, or “corresponding” fatty acid, which is used to define alevel of unsaturation for an R¹ group that is the same as the level ofunsaturation that would be present in a fatty acid containing the sameR¹ group) with, preferably, a cis/trans ratio of from about 1:1 to about50:1, the minimum being 1:1, preferably from about 2:1 to about 40:1,more preferably from about 3:1 to about 30:1, and even more preferablyfrom about 4:1 to about 20:1; each R¹ can also preferably be a branchedchain C₁₄-C₂₂ alkyl group, preferably a branched chain C₁₆-C₁₈ group;each R is H or a short chain C₁-C₆, preferably C₁-C₃ alkyl orhydroxyalkyl group, e.g., methyl (most preferred), ethyl, propyl,hydroxyethyl, and the like, benzyl, or (R²O)₂₋₄H where each R² is a C₁₋₆alkylene group; and A⁻ is a quaternary ammonium compatible anion,preferably, chloride, bromide, methylsulfate, ethylsulfate, sulfate, andnitrate, more preferably chloride and methyl sulfate;

(2) quaternary ammonium having the formula:

wherein each R, R¹, and A⁻ have the definitions given above; each R² isa C₁₋₆ alkylene group, preferably an ethylene group; and G is an oxygenatom or an —NR— group;

(3) active having the formula:

wherein R¹, R² and G are defined as above;

(4) reaction products of substantially unsaturated and/or branched chainhigher fatty acids with dialkylenetriamines in, e.g., a molecular ratioof about 2:1, said reaction products containing compounds of theformula:R¹—C(O)—NH—R²—NH—R³—NH—C(O)—R¹wherein R¹, R² are defined as above, and each R³ is a C₁₋₆ alkylenegroup, preferably an ethylene group;

(5) quaternary ammonium having the formula:[R¹—C(O)—NR—R²—N(R)₂—R³—NR—C(O)—R¹]⁺A⁻wherein R, R¹, R², R³ and A⁻ are defined as above;

(6) the reaction product of substantially unsaturated and/or branchedchain higher fatty acid with hydroxyalkylalkylenediamines in a molecularratio of about 2:1, said reaction products containing compounds of theformula:

R¹—C(O)—NH—R²—N(R³OH)—C(O)—R¹

wherein R¹, R² and R³ are defined as above;

(7) quaternary ammonium having the formula:

wherein R, R¹, R², and A⁻ are defined as above; and

Other optional but highly desirable cationic compounds which can be usedin combination with the above quaternary ammonium actives are compoundscontaining one long chain acyclic C₈-C₂₂ hydrocarbon group, selectedfrom the group consisting of:

(8) acyclic quaternary ammonium salts having the formula:[R¹—N(R⁵)₂—R⁶]⁺A⁻wherein R⁵ and R⁶ are C₁-C₄ alkyl or hydroxyalkyl groups, and R¹ and A⁻are defined as herein above;

(9) substituted imidazolinium salts having the formula:

wherein R⁷ is hydrogen or a C₁-C₄ saturated alkyl or hydroxyalkyl group,and R¹ and A⁻ are defined as hereinabove;

(10) substituted imidazolinium salts having the formula:

wherein R⁵ is a C₁-C₄ alkyl or hydroxyalkyl group, and R¹, R², and A⁻are as defined above;

(11) alkylpyridinium salts having the formula:

wherein R⁴ is an acyclic aliphatic C₈-C₂₂ hydrocarbon group and A⁻ is ananion; and

(12) alkanamide alkylene pyridinium salts having the formula:

wherein R¹, R² and A⁻ are defined as herein above; and mixtures thereof.

Examples of Compound (8) are the monoalkenyltrimethylammonium salts suchas monooleyltrimethylammonium chloride, monocanolatrimethylammoniumchloride, and soyatrimethylammonium chloride. Monooleyltrimethylammoniumchloride and monocanolatrimethylammonium chloride are preferred. Otherexamples of Compound (8) are soyatrimethylammonium chloride availablefrom Witco Corporation under the trade name Adogen® 415,erucyltrimethylammonium chloride wherein R¹ is a C₂₋₂ hydrocarbon groupderived from a natural source; soyadimethylethylammonium ethylsulfatewherein R¹ is a C₁₆-C₁₈ hydrocarbon group, R⁵ is a methyl group, R⁶ isan ethyl group, and A⁻ is an ethylsulfate anion; and methylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)oleylammonium chloride wherein R¹ is a C₁₈hydrocarbon group, R⁵ is a 2-hydroxyethyl group and R⁶ is a methylgroup.

Additional actives that can be used herein are disclosed, at leastgenerically for the basic structures, in U.S. Pat. No. 3,861,870,Edwards and Diehl; U.S. Pat. No. 4,308,151, Cambre; U.S. Pat. No.3,886,075, Bernardino; U.S. Pat. No. 4,233,164, Davis; U.S. Pat. No.4,401,578, Verbruggen; U.S. Pat. No. 3,974,076, Wiersema and Rieke; andU.S. Pat. No. 4,237,016, Rudkin, Clint, and Young, all of said patentsbeing incorporated herein by reference. The additional actives hereinare preferably those that are highly unsaturated versions of thetraditional quaternary ammonium actives, i.e., di-long chain alkylnitrogen derivatives, normally cationic materials, such asdioleyldimethylammonium chloride and imidazolinium compounds asdescribed hereinafter. Examples of more biodegradable fabric quaternaryammonium actives can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 3,408,361, Mannheimer,issued Oct. 29, 1968; U.S. Pat. No. 4,709,045, Kubo et al., issued Nov.24, 1987; U.S. Pat. No. 4,233,451, Pracht et al., issued Nov. 11, 1980;U.S. Pat. No. 4,127,489, Pracht et al., issued Nov. 28, 1979; U.S. Pat.No. 3,689,424, Berg et al., issued Sep. 5, 1972; U.S. Pat. No.4,128,485, Baumann et al., issued Dec. 5, 1978; U.S. Pat. No. 4,161,604,Elster et al., issued Jul. 17, 1979; U.S. Pat. No. 4,189,593, Wechsleret al., issued Feb. 19, 1980; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,339,391, Hoffman etal., issued Jul. 13, 1982, said patents being incorporated herein byreference.

Examples of Compound (1) are dialkylenedimethylammonium salts such asdicanoladimethylammonium chloride, dicanoladimethylammoniummethylsulfate, di(partially hydrogenated soybean, cis/trans ratio ofabout 4:1)dimethylammonium chloride, dioleyldimethylammonium chloride.Dioleyldimethylammonium chloride and di(canola)dimethylammonium chlorideare preferred. An example of commercially availabledialkylenedimethylammonium salts usable in the present invention isdioleyldimethylammonium chloride available from Witco Corporation underthe trade name Adogen® 472.

An example of Compound (2) is1-methyl-1-oleylamidoethyl-2-oleylimidazolinium methylsulfate wherein R¹is an acyclic aliphatic Cl₅—C₁₋₇ hydrocarbon group, R² is an ethylenegroup, G is a NH group, R⁵ is a methyl group and A⁻ is a methyl sulfateanion, available commercially from the Witco Corporation under the tradename Varisoft® 3690.

An example of Compound (3) is 1-oleylamidoethyl-2-oleylimidazolinewherein R¹ is an acyclic aliphatic C₁₅-C₁₇ hydrocarbon group, R² is anethylene group, and G is a NH group.

An example of Compound (4) is reaction products of oleic acids withdiethylenetriamine in a molecular ratio of about 2:1, said reactionproduct mixture containing N,N″-dioleoyldiethylenetriamine with theformula:R¹—C(O)—NH—CH₂CH₂—NH—CH₂CH₂—NH—C(O)—R¹wherein R¹—C(O) is oleoyl group of a commercially available oleic acidderived from a vegetable or animal source, such as Emersol® 223LL orEmersol® 7021, available from Henkel Corporation, and R² and R³ aredivalent ethylene groups.

An example of Compound (5) is a difatty amidoamine based active havingthe formula:[R¹—C(O)—NH—CH₂CH₂—N(CH₃)(CH₂CH₂OH)—CH₂CH₂—NH—C(O)—R¹]⁺CH₃SO₄—wherein R¹—C(O) is oleoyl group, available commercially from the WitcoCorporation under the trade name Varisoft® 222LT.

An example of Compound (6) is reaction products of commercial “oleic”acids with N-2-hydroxyethylethylenediamine in a molecular ratio of about2:1, said reaction product mixture containing a compound of the formula:R¹—C(O)—NH—CH₂CH₂—N(CH₂CH₂OH)—C(O)—R¹wherein R¹—C(O) is oleoyl group of a commercially available oleic acidderived from a vegetable or animal source, such as Emersol® 223LL orEmersol® 7021, available from Henkel Corporation.

An example of Compound (7) is the diquaternary compound having theformula:

wherein R¹ is derived from oleic acid, and the compound is availablefrom Witco Company.

An example of Compound (11) is1-ethyl-1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-isoheptadecylimidazolinium ethylsulfatewherein R¹ is a C₁₋₇ hydrocarbon group, R² is an ethylene group, R⁵ isan ethyl group, and A⁻ is an ethylsulfate anion.

Anion A

In the cationic nitrogenous salts herein, the anion A⁻, which is anyquaternary ammonium compatible anion, provides electrical neutrality.Most often, the anion used to provide electrical neutrality in thesesalts is from a strong acid, especially a halide, such as chloride,bromide, or iodide. However, other anions can be used, such asmethylsulfate, ethylsulfate, acetate, formate, sulfate, carbonate, andthe like. Chloride and methylsulfate are preferred herein as anion A.The anion can also, but less preferably, carry a double charge in whichcase A⁻ represents half a group.

Polyquaternary amine compounds also act as suitable quaternary compoundsto increase fabric (fiber) lubricity and these are diclosed for useherein by reference to prior art including:

-   -   European Patent Application EP 0,803,498, A1, Robert O. Keys and        Floyd E. Friedli, filed Apr. 25, 1997;    -   British Pat. 808,265, issued Jan. 28, 1956 to Arnold Hoffman &        Co., Incorporated;    -   British Pat. 1,161,552, Koebner and Potts, issued Aug. 13, 1969;    -   DE 4,203,489 A1, Henkel, published Aug. 12, 1993;    -   EP 0,221,855, Topfl, Heinz, and Jorg, issued Nov. 3, 1986;    -   EP 0,503,155, Rewo, issued Dec. 20, 1991;    -   EP 0,507,003, Rewo, issued Dec. 20, 1991    -   EPA 0,803,498, published Oct. 29, 1997;    -   French Pat. 2,523,606, Marie-Helene Fraikin, Alan Dillarstone,        and Marc Couterau, filed Mar. 22, 1983;    -   Japanese Pat. 84-273918, Terumi Kawai and Hiroshi Kitamura,        1986;    -   Japanese Pat. 2-011,545, issued to Kao Corp., Jan. 16, 1990;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 3,079,436, Hwa, issued Feb. 26, 1963;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 4,418,054, Green et al., issued Nov. 29, 1983;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 4,721,512, Topfl, Abel, and Binz, issued Jan. 26,        1988;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 4,728,337, Abel, Topfl, and Riehen, issued Mar. 1,        1988;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 4,906,413, Topfl and Binz, issued Mar. 6, 1990;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 5,194,667, Oxenrider et al., issued Mar. 16, 1993;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 5,235,082, Hill and Snow, issued Aug. 10, 1993;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 5,670,472, Keys, issued Sep. 23, 1997;    -   Weirong Miao, Wei Hou, Lie Chen, and Zongshi Li, Studies on        Multifunctional Finishing Agents, Riyong Huaxue Gonye, No. 2,        pp. 8-10, 1992;    -   Yokagaku, Vol 41, No. 4 (1992); and    -   Disinfection, Sterilization, and Preservation, 4th Edition,        published 1991 by Lea & Febiger, Chapter 13, pp. 226-30. All of        these references are incorporated herein, in their entirety, by        reference.

It will be understood that suitable wrinkle compositions can includecombinations of quaternary ammonium actives disclosed herein.

In addition to lubricating fibers, quaternary ammonium compounddisclosed herein can offer addition benefits including improvedsoftening and handfeel as well as protection and/or restoration offibers and fabric appearance.

2. Shape Retention Polymers

These polymers can be natural, or synthetic, and can act by forming afilm, and/or by providing adhesive properties. E.g., the presentinvention can optionally use film-forming and/or adhesive polymer toimpart shape retention to fabric, particularly clothing. By “adhesive”it is meant that when applied as a solution or a dispersion to a fibersurface and dried, the polymer can attach to the surface. The polymercan form a film on the surface, or when residing between two fibers andin contact with the two fibers, it can bond the two fibers together.Other polymers such as starches can form a film and/or bond the fiberstogether when the treated fabric is pressed by a hot iron. Such a filmwill have adhesive strength, cohesive breaking strength, and cohesivebreaking strain.

Nonlimiting examples for natural polymers are starches and theirderivatives, and chitins and their derivatives.

The synthetic polymers useful in the present invention are comprised ofmonomers. Some nonlimiting examples of monomers which can be used toform the synthetic polymers of the present invention include: lowmolecular weight C₁-C₆ unsaturated organic mono-carboxylic andpolycarboxylic acids, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonicacid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid, and mixturesthereof; esters of said acids with C₁-C₁₂ alcohols, such as methanol,ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 2-methyl-1-propanol,1-pentanol, 2-pentanol, 3-pentanol, 2-methyl-1-butanol,1-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, 1-methyl-1-pentanol,2-methyl-1-pentanol, 3-methyl-1-pentanol, t-butanol, cyclohexanol,2-ethyl-1-butanol, neodecanol, 3-heptanol, benzyl alcohol, 2-octanol,6-methyl-1-heptanol, 2-ethyl-1-hexanol, 3,5-dimethyl-1-hexanol,3,5,5-trimethyl-1-hexanol, 1-decanol, 1-dodecanol, and the like, andmixtures thereof. Nonlimiting examples of said esters are methylacrylate, ethyl acrylate, t-butyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate,hydroxyethyl methacrylate, methoxy ethyl methacrylate, and mixturesthereof, amides and imides of said acids, such asN,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, maleimides; low molecularweight unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl alcohol (produced by thehydrolysis of vinyl acetate after polymerization), allyl alcohol; estersof said alcohols with low molecular weight carboxylic acids, such as,vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate; ethers of said alcohols such as methylvinyl ether; aromatic vinyl such as styrene, alpha-methylstyrene,t-butylstyrene, vinyl toluene, polystyrene macromer, and the like; polarvinyl heterocyclics, such as vinyl pyrrolidone, vinyl caprolactam, vinylpyridine, vinyl imidazole, and mixtures thereof, other unsaturatedamines and amides, such as vinyl amine, diethylene triamine,dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, ethenyl formamide; vinyl sulfonate;salts of acids and amines listed above; low molecular weight unsaturatedhydrocarbons and derivatives such as ethylene, propylene, butadiene,cyclohexadiene, vinyl chloride; vinylidene chloride; and mixturesthereof and alkyl quaternized derivatives thereof, and mixtures thereof.Preferably, said monomers are selected from the group consisting ofvinyl alcohol; acrylic acid; methacrylic acid; methyl acrylate; ethylacrylate; methyl methacrylate; t-butyl acrylate; t-butyl methacrylate;n-butyl acrylate; n-butyl methacrylate; isobutyl methacrylate;2-ethylhexyl methacrylate; dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate; N,N-dimethylacrylamide; N,N-dimethyl methacrylamide; N-t-butyl acrylamide;vinylpyrrolidone; vinyl pyridine; adipic acid; diethylenetriamine; saltsthereof and alkyl quaternized derivatives thereof, and mixtures thereof.

Preferably, said monomers form homopolymers and/or copolymers (i.e., thefilm-forming and/or adhesive polymer) having a glass transitiontemperature (Tg) of from about −20° C. to about 150° C., preferably fromabout −10° C. to about 150° C., more preferably from about 0° C. toabout 100° C., most preferably, the adhesive polymer hereof, when driedto form a film will have a Tg of at least about 25° C., so that they arenot unduly sticky, or “tacky” to the touch. Preferably said polymer issoluble and/or dispersible in water and/or alcohol. Said polymertypically has a molecular weight of at least about 500, preferably fromabout 1,000 to about 2,000,000, more preferably from about 5,000 toabout 1,000,000, and even more preferably from about 30,000 to about300,000 for some polymers.

Some non-limiting examples of homopolymers and copolymers which can beused as film-forming and/or adhesive polymers of the present inventionare: adipic acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl diethylenetriaminecopolymer; adipic acid/epoxypropyl diethylenetriamine copolymer;poly(vinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate); polyvinylalcohol; polyvinylpyridine n-oxide; methacryloyl ethylbetaine/methacrylates copolymer; ethyl acrylate/methylmethacrylate/methacrylic acid/acrylic acid copolymer; polyamine resins;and polyquaternary amine resins; poly(ethenylformamide);poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride; poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6% vinylamine);poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6%vinylamine hydrochloride); and poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylaminehydrochloride). Suitable copolymer and/or homopolymers are selected fromthe group consisting of adipic acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyldiethylenetriamine copolymer; poly(vinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethylmethacrylate); polyvinyl alcohol; ethyl acrylate/methylmethacrylate/methacrylic acid/acrylic acid copolymer; methacryloyl ethylbetaine/methacrylates copolymer; polyquaternary amine resins;poly(ethenylformamide); poly(vinylamine)hydrochloride; poly(vinylalcohol-co-6% vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine);poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6% vinylamine hydrochloride); and poly(vinylalcohol-co-12% vinylamine hydrochloride).

Nonlimiting examples of the suitable polymer that are commerciallyavailable are: polyvinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl methacrylatecopolymer, such as Copolymer 958®, molecular weight of about 100,000 andCopolymer 937, molecular weight of about 1,000,000, available from GAFChemicals Corporation; adipic acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyldiethylenetriamine copolymer, such as Cartaretin F-4® and F-23,available from Sandoz Chemicals Corporation; methacryloyl ethylbetaine/methacrylates copolymer, such as Diaformer Z-SM®, available fromMitsubishi Chemicals Corporation; polyvinyl alcohol copolymer resin,such as Vinex 2019®, available from Air Products and Chemicals orMoweol®, available from Clariant; adipic acid/epoxypropyldiethylenetriamine copolymer, such as Delsette 101®, available fromHercules Incorporated; polyamine resins, such as Cypro 515®, availablefrom Cytec Industries; polyquaternary amine resins, such as Kymene557H®, available from Hercules Incorporated; andpolyvinylpyrrolidone/acrylic acid, such as Sokalan EG 310®, availablefrom BASF.

Preferred polymers useful in the present invention are selected from thegroup consisting of copolymers of hydrophilic monomers and hydrophobicmonomers. The polymer can be linear random or block copolymers, andmixtures thereof. Such hydrophobic/hydrophilic copolymers typically havea hydrophobic monomer/hydrophilic monomer ratio of from about 95:5 toabout 20:80, preferably from about 90:10 to about 40:60, more preferablyfrom about 80:20 to about 50:50 by weight of the copolymer. Thehydrophobic monomer can comprise a single hydrophobic monomer or amixture of hydrophobic monomers, and the hydrophilic monomer cancomprise a single hydrophilic monomer or a mixture of hydrophilicmonomers. The term “hydrophobic” is used herein consistent with itsstandard meaning of lacking affinity for water, whereas “hydrophilic” isused herein consistent with its standard meaning of having affinity forwater. As used herein in relation to monomer units and polymericmaterials, including the copolymers, “hydrophobic” means substantiallywater insoluble; “hydrophilic” means substantially water soluble. Inthis regard, “substantially water insoluble” shall refer to a materialthat is not soluble in distilled (or equivalent) water, at 25° C., at aconcentration of about 0.2% by weight, and preferably not soluble atabout 0.1% by weight (calculated on a water plus monomer or polymerweight basis). “Substantially water soluble” shall refer to a materialthat is soluble in distilled (or equivalent) water, at 25° C., at aconcentration of about 0.2% by weight, and are preferably soluble atabout 1% by weight. The terms “soluble”, “solubility” and the like, forpurposes hereof, corresponds to the maximum concentration of monomer orpolymer, as applicable, that can dissolve in water or other solvents toform a homogeneous solution, as is well understood to those skilled inthe art.

Nonlimiting examples of useful hydrophobic monomers are acrylic acidC₁-C₁₈ alkyl esters, such as methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, t-butylacrylate; methacrylic C₁-C₁₈ alkyl esters, such as methyl methacrylate,2-ethyl hexyl methacrylate, methoxy ethyl methacrylate; vinyl alcoholesters of carboxylic acids, such as, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate,vinyl neodecanoate; aromatic vinyls, such as styrene, t-butyl styrene,vinyl toluene; vinyl ethers, such as methyl vinyl ether; vinyl chloride;vinylidene chloride; ethylene, propylene and other unsaturatedhydrocarbons; and the like; and mixtures thereof. Some preferredhydrophobic monomers are methyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, t-butylacrylate, t-butyl methacrylate, n-butyl acrylate, n-butyl methacrylate,and mixtures thereof.

Nonlimiting examples of useful hydrophilic monomers are unsaturatedorganic mono-carboxylic and polycarboxylic acids, such as acrylic acid,methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters,itaconic acid; unsaturated alcohols, such as vinyl alcohol, allylalcohol; polar vinyl heterocyclics, such as vinyl pyrrolidone, vinylcaprolactam, vinyl pyridine, vinyl imidazole; vinyl amine; vinylsulfonate; unsaturated amides, such as acrylamides, e.g.,N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide; hydroxyethyl methacrylate;dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate; salts of acids and amines listed above;and the like; and mixtures thereof. Some preferred hydrophilic monomersare acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, N,N-dimethyl acrylamide,N,N-dimethyl methacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, dimethylamino ethylmethacrylate, vinyl pyrrolidone, salts thereof and alkyl quaternizedderivatives thereof, and mixtures thereof.

Non limiting examples of polymers for use in the present inventioninclude the following, where the composition of the copolymer is givenas approximate weight percentage of each monomer used in thepolymerization reaction used to prepare the polymer: vinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymers (at ratios of up to about 30% byweight of vinyl pyrrolidone); dimethyl acrylamide/t-butyl acrylate/ethylhexyl methacrylate copolymer (Oct. 45, 1945); vinyl pyrrolidone/vinylacetate/butyl acrylate copolymer (10/78/12 and 10/70/20); vinylpyrrolidone/vinyl propionate copolymer (5/95); vinyl caprolactam/vinylacetate copolymer (5/95); acrylic acid/t-butyl acrylate (25/75) andstyling resins sold under the trade names Ultrahold CA 8® by Ciba Geigy(ethyl acrylate/acrylic acid/N-t-butyl acrylamide copolymer); Resyn28-1310® by National Starch and Luviset CA 66® by BASF (vinylacetate/crotonic acid copolymer 90/10); Luviset CAP® by BASF (vinylacetate/vinyl propionate/crotonic acid 50/40/10); Resyn 28-2930® byNational Starch (vinyl acetate/vinyl neodecanoate/crotonic acidcopolymer), Amerhold DR-25® by Union Carbide (ethyl acrylate/methacrylicacid/methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer), and Poligen A® by BASF(polyacrylate dispersion) and acrylates copolymers such asLuviflex™Soft, Luvimer® 100P, Luvimer® 30E, Luvimer® 36D.

Preferably, the shape retention polymers contain an effective amount ofmonomers having carboxylic groups to control amine odor. Highlypreferred shape retention copolymers contain hydrophobic monomers andhydrophilic monomers which comprise unsaturated organic mono-carboxylicand polycarboxylic acid monomers, such as acrylic acid, methacrylicacid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid, andsalts thereof, and mixtures thereof, and optionally other hydrophilicmonomers. These preferred polymers of the current invention surprisinglyprovide control of certain amine type malodors in fabrics, in additionto providing the fabric wrinkle control benefit. Examples of thehydrophilic unsaturated organic mono-carboxylic and polycarboxylic acidmonomers are acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acidand its half esters, itaconic acid, and mixtures thereof. Nonlimitingexamples of the hydrophobic monomers are esters of the unsaturatedorganic mono-carboxylic and polycarboxylic acids cited hereinabove withC₁-C₁₂ alcohols, such as methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol,1-butanol, 2-methyl-1-propanol, 1-pentanol, 2-pentanol, 3-pentanol,2-methyl-1-butanol, 1-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol,1-methyl-1-pentanol, 2-methyl-1-pentanol, 3-methyl-1-pentanol,t-butanol, cyclohexanol, 2-ethyl-1-butanol, and mixtures thereof,preferably methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol,2-methyl-1-propanol, t-butanol, and mixtures thereof. One highlypreferred copolymer contains acrylic acid and t-butyl acrylate monomericunits, preferably with acrylic acid/t-butyl acrylate ratios of fromabout 90:10 to about 10:90, preferably from about 70:30 to about 15:85,more preferably from about 40:60 to about 20:80. Nonlimiting examples ofacrylic acid/tert-butyl acrylate copolymers useful in the presentinvention are those typically with a molecular weight of from about1,000 to about 2,000,000, preferably from about 5,000 to about1,000,000, and more preferably from about 30,000 to about 300,000, andwith an approximate acrylic acid/tert-butyl acrylate weight ratio ofabout 25:75 and an average molecular weight of from about 70,000 toabout 100,000, and those with an approximate acrylic acid/tert-butylacrylate weight ratio of about 35:65 and an average molecular weight offrom about 60,000 to about 90,000. Compositions containing thesepolymers also can additionally comprise perfume, antibacterial active,odor control agent, static control agent, and mixtures thereof.

The film-forming and/or adhesive polymer of the present invention ispresent at least an effective amount to provide shape retention,typically from about 0.05% to about 10%, preferably from about 0.1% toabout 5%, more preferably from about 0.2% to about 3%, even morepreferably from about 0.3% to about 1.5%, by weight of the usagecomposition.

The adhesive polymer is present in the composition in a sufficientamount to result in an amount of from about 0.001% to about 1%,preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.5%, more preferably from about0.02% to about 0.4% by weight of polymer per weight of dry fabrics.

It is not intended to exclude the use of higher or lower levels of thepolymers, as long as an effective amount is used to provide adhesive andfilm-forming properties to the composition and the composition can beformulated and effectively applied for its intended purpose.

Silicones and film-forming polymers can be combined to produce preferredwrinkle reducing actives. Typically the weight ratio of silicone tofilm-forming polymer is from about 10:1 to about 1:10, preferably fromabout 5:1 to about 1:5, and more preferably from about 3:1 to about 1:3and even more preferably from about 2:1 to about 1:2. Typically, thepreferred wrinkle reducing active of silicone plus polymer is present ata level of from about 0.1% to about 8%, preferably from about 0.3% toabout 5%, more preferably from about 0.5% to about 3%, by weight of thecomposition.

Preferred adhesive and/or film forming polymers that are useful in thecomposition of the present invention actually contain silicone moietiesin the polymers themselves. These preferred polymers include graft andblock copolymers of silicone with moieties containing hydrophilic and/orhydrophobic monomers described hereinbefore. The silicone-containingcopolymers in the spray composition of the present invention provideshape retention, body, and/or good, soft fabric feel. Preferredsilicone-containing copolymers contain hydrophobic monomers andhydrophilic monomers which comprise unsaturated organic mono-carboxylicand/or polycarboxylic acid monomers, such as acrylic acid, methacrylicacid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid, andsalts thereof, and mixtures thereof; and optionally other hydrophilicmonomers. These preferred polymers of the current invention providecontrol of certain amine type malodors in fabrics, in addition toproviding the fabric wrinkle control benefit.

Both silicone-containing graft and block copolymers useful in thepresent invention have the following properties:

-   -   (1) the silicone portion is covalently attached to the        non-silicone portion;    -   (2) the molecular weight of the silicone portion is from about        1,000 to about 50,000; and    -   (3) the non-silicone portion must render the entire copolymer        soluble or dispersible in the wrinkle control composition        vehicle and permit the copolymer to deposit on/adhere to the        treated fabrics.        Suitable silicone copolymers include the following:

a) Silicone Graft Copolymers

Preferred silicone-containing polymers are the silicone graft copolymerscomprising acrylate groups described, along with methods of making them,in U.S. Pat. No. 5,658,557, Bolich et al., issued Aug. 19, 1997, U.S.Pat. No. 4,693,935, Mazurek, issued Sep. 15, 1987, and U.S. Pat. No.4,728,571, Clemens et al., issued Mar. 1, 1988. Additionalsilicone-containing polymers are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,480,634,Hayama et al, issued Oct. 2, 1996, U.S. Pat. No. 5,166,276, Hayama etal., issued Nov. 24, 1992, U.S. Pat. No. 5,061,481, issued Oct. 29,1991, Suzuki et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,106,609, Bolich et al., issued Apr.21, 1992, U.S. Pat. No. 5,100,658, Bolich et al., issued Mar. 31, 1992,U.S. Pat. No. 5,100,657, Ansher-Jackson, et al., issued Mar. 31, 1992,U.S. Pat. No. 5,104,646, Bolich et al., issued Apr. 14, 1992, all ofwhich are incorporated herein by reference.

These polymers preferably include copolymers having a vinyl polymericbackbone having grafted onto it monovalent siloxane polymeric moieties,and components consisting of non-silicone hydrophilic and hydrophobicmonomers.

The silicone-containing monomers are exemplified by the general formula:X(Y)_(n)Si(R)_(3-m)Z_(m)wherein X is a polymerizable group, such as a vinyl group, which is partof the backbone of the polymer; Y is a divalent linking group; R is ahydrogen, hydroxyl, lower alkyl (e.g. C₁-C₄), aryl, alkaryl, alkoxy, oralkylamino; Z is a monovalent polymeric siloxane moiety having anaverage molecular weight of at least about 500, is essentiallyunreactive under copolymerization conditions, and is pendant from thevinyl polymeric backbone described above; n is 0 or 1; and m is aninteger from 1 to 3.

The preferred silicone-containing monomer has a weight average molecularweight of from about 1,000 to about 50,000, preferably from about 3,000to about 40,000, most preferably from about 5,000 to about 20,000.

Nonlimiting examples of preferred silicone-containing monomers have thefollowing formulas:

In these structures m is an integer from 1 to 3, preferably 1; p is 0 or1; q is an integer from 2 to 6; n is an integer from 0 to 4, preferably0 or 1, more preferably 0; R¹ is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkoxy,hydroxyl, aryl, alkylamino, preferably R¹ is alkyl; R″ is alkyl orhydrogen; X is CH(R³)══C(R⁴)—; R³ is hydrogen or —COOH, preferablyhydrogen; R⁴ is hydrogen, methyl or —CH₂COOH, preferably methyl; Z isR⁵—[Si(R⁶)(R⁷)—O—]_(r)wherein R⁵, R⁶, and R⁷, independently are lower alkyl, alkoxy,alkylamino, hydrogen or hydroxyl, preferably alkyl; and r is an integerof from about 5 to about 700, preferably from about 60 to about 400,more preferably from about 100 to about 300. Most preferably, R⁵, R⁶,and R⁷ are methyl, p=0, and q=³.

Silicone-containing adhesive and/or film-forming copolymers useful inthe present invention comprise from 0% to about 90%, preferably fromabout 10% to about 80%, more preferably from about 40% to about 75% ofhydrophobic monomer, from about 0% to about 90%, preferably from about5% to about 80% of hydrophilic monomer, and from about 5% to about 50%,preferably from about 10% to about 40%, more preferably from about 15%to about 25% of silicone-containing monomer.

The composition of any particular copolymer will help determine itsformulation properties. In fact, by appropriate selection andcombination of particular hydrophobic, hydrophilic andsilicone-containing components, the copolymer can be optimized forinclusion in specific vehicles. For example, polymers which are solublein an aqueous formulation preferably contain from 0% to about 70%,preferably from about 5% to about 70% of hydrophobic monomer, and fromabout 30% to about 98%, preferably from about 30% to about 80%, ofhydrophilic monomer, and from about 1% to about 40% ofsilicone-containing monomer. Polymers which are dispersible preferablycontain from 0% to about 70%, more preferably from about 5% to about70%, of hydrophobic monomer, and from about 20% to about 80%, morepreferably from about 20% to about 60%, of hydrophilic monomer, and fromabout 1% to about 40% of silicone-containing monomer.

The silicone-containing copolymers preferably have a weight averagemolecular weight of from about 10,000 to about 1,000,000, preferablyfrom about 30,000 to about 300,000.

The preferred polymers comprise a vinyl polymeric backbone, preferablyhaving a Tg or a Tm as defined above of about −20° C. and, grafted tothe backbone, a polydimethylsiloxane macromer having a weight averagemolecular weight of from about 1,000 to about 50,000, preferably fromabout 5,000 to about 40,000, most preferably from about 7,000 to about20,000. The polymer is such that when it is formulated into the finishedcomposition, and then dried, the polymer phase separates into adiscontinuous phase which includes the polydimethylsiloxane macromer anda continuous phase which includes the backbone. Exemplary siliconegrafted polymers for use in the present invention include the following,where the composition of the copolymer is given with the approximateweight percentage of each monomer used in the polymerization reaction toprepare the copolymer: N,N-dimethylacrylamide/isobutylmethacrylate/(PDMS macromer—20,000 approximate molecular weight)(20/60/20 w/w/w), copolymer of average molecular weight of about400,000; N,N-dimethylacrylamide/(PDMS macromer—20,000 approximatemolecular weight) (80/20 w/w), copolymer of average molecular weight ofabout 300,000; t-butylacrylate/N,N-dimethylacrylamide/(PDMSmacromer—10,000 approximate molecular weight) (70/10/20), copolymer ofaverage molecular weight of about 400,000; and(N,N,N-trimethylammonioethylmethacrylatechloride)/N,N-dimethylacrylamide/(PDMS macromer—15,000 approximatemolecular weight) (40/40/20), copolymer of average molecular weight ofabout 150,000.

Highly preferred shape retention copolymers of this type containhydrophobic monomers, silicone-containing monomers and hydrophilicmonomers which comprise unsaturated organic mono- and polycarboxylicacid monomers, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid,maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid, and salts thereof, andmixtures thereof. These preferred polymers surprisingly provide controlof certain amine type malodors in fabrics, in addition to providing thefabric wrinkle control benefit. A nonlimiting example of such copolymeris n-butylmethacrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer,20,000 approximate molecular weight) copolymer of average molecularweight of about 100,000, and with an approximate monomer weight ratio ofabout 70/10/20. A highly preferred copolymer is composed of acrylicacid, t-butyl acrylate and silicone-containing monomeric units,preferably with from about 20% to about 90%, preferably from about 30%to about 80%, more preferably from about 50% to about 75% t-butylacrylate; from about 5% to about 60%, preferably from about 8% to about45%, more preferably from about 10% to about 30% of acrylic acid; andfrom about 5% to about 50%, preferably from about 10% to about 40%, morepreferably from about 15% to about 30% of polydimethylsiloxane of anaverage molecular weight of from about 1,000 to about 50,000, preferablyfrom about 5,000 to about 40,000, most preferably from about 7,000 toabout 20,000. Nonlimiting examples of acrylic acid/tert-butylacrylate/polydimethyl siloxane macromer copolymers useful in the presentinvention, with approximate monomer weight ratio, are:t-butylacrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer, 10,000approximate molecular weight) (70/10/20 w/w/w), copolymer of averagemolecular weight of about 300,000; t-butylacrylate/acrylicacid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer, 10,000 approximate molecularweight) (65/25/10 w/w/w), copolymer of average molecular weight of about200,000; t-butyl acrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer,10,000 approximate molecular weight) (63/20/17), copolymer of averagemolecular weight of from about 120,000 to about 150,000; andn-butylmethacrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer—20,000approximate molecular weight) (70/10/20 w/w/w), copolymer of averagemolecular weight of about 100,000. A useful and commercially availablecopolymer of this type is Diahold® ME from Mitsubishi Chemical Corp.,which is a t-butyl acrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer,12,000 approximate molecular weight) (60/20/20), copolymer of averagemolecular weight of about 128,000.

b) Silicone Block Copolymers

Also useful herein are silicone block copolymers comprising repeatingblock units of polysiloxanes.

Examples of silicone-containing block copolymers are found in U.S. Pat.No. 5,523,365, to Geck et al., issued Jun. 4, 1996; U.S. Pat. No.4,689,289, to Crivello, issued Aug. 25, 1987; U.S. Pat. No. 4,584,356,to Crivello, issued Apr. 22, 1986; Macromolecular Design, Concept &Practice, Ed: M. K. Mishra, Polymer Frontiers International, Inc.,Hopewell Jct., NY (1994), and Block Copolymers, A. Noshay and J. E.McGrath, Academic Press, NY (1977), which are all incorporated byreference herein in their entirety. Other silicone block copolymerssuitable for use herein are those described, along with methods ofmaking them, in the above referenced and incorporated U.S. Pat. No.5,658,577.

The silicone-containing block copolymers useful in the present inventioncan be described by the formulas A-B, A-B-A, and -(A-B)_(n)— wherein nis an integer of 2 or greater. A-B represents a diblock structure, A-B-Arepresents a triblock structure, and -(A-B)_(n)— represents a multiblockstructure. The block copolymers can comprise mixtures of diblocks,triblocks, and higher multiblock combinations as well as small amountsof homopolymers.

The silicone block portion, B, can be represented by the followingpolymeric structure—(SiR²O)_(m)—,wherein each R is independently selected from the group consisting ofhydrogen, hydroxyl, C₁-C₆ alkyl, C₁-C₆ alkoxy, C₂-C₆ alkylamino, styryl,phenyl, C₁-C₆ alkyl or alkoxy-substituted phenyl, preferably methyl; andm is an integer of about 10 or greater, preferably of about 40 orgreater, more preferably of about 60 or greater, and most preferably ofabout 100 or greater.

The non-silicone block, A, comprises monomers selected from the monomersas described hereinabove in reference to the non-silicone hydrophilicand hydrophobic monomers for the silicone grafted copolymers. Vinylblocks are preferred co-monomers. The block copolymers preferablycontain one or more non-silicone blocks, and up to about 50%, preferablyfrom about 10% to about 20%, by weight of one or more polydimethylsiloxane blocks.

c) Sulfur-Linked Silicone-Containing Copolymers

Also useful herein are sulfur-linked silicone containing copolymers,including block copolymers. As used herein in reference to siliconecontaining copolymers, the term “sulfur-linked” means that the copolymercontains a sulfur linkage (i.e., —S—), a disulfide linkage (i.e.,—S—S—), or a sulfhydryl group (i.e., —SH).

These sulfur-linked silicone-containing copolymers are represented bythe following general formula:

wherein each G₅ and G₆ is independently selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, alkoxy, alkylamino, fluoroalkyl,hydrogen, and -ZSA, wherein A represents a vinyl polymeric segmentconsisting essentially of polymerized free radically polymerizablemonomer, and Z is a divalent linking group (Useful divalent linkinggroups Z include but are not limited to the following: C₁ to C₁₀alkylene, alkarylene, arylene, and alkoxyalkylene. Preferably, Z isselected from the group consisting of methylene and propylene forreasons of commercial availability.);

-   each G₂ comprises A;-   each G₄ comprises A;-   each R₁ is a monovalent moiety selected from the group consisting of    alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, alkoxy, alkylamino, fluoroalkyl, hydrogen, and    hydroxyl (Preferably, R₁ represents monovalent moieties which can    independently be the same or different selected from the group    consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl and hydroxyl for reasons of commercial    availability. Most preferably, R₁ is methyl.);-   each R₂ is a divalent linking group (Suitable divalent linking    groups include but are not limited to the following: C₁ to C₁₀    alkylene, arylene, alkarylene, and alkoxyalkylene. Preferably, R₂ is    selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₃ alkylene and C₇-C₁₀    alkarylene due to ease of synthesis of the compound. Most    preferably, R₂ is selected from the group consisting of —CH₂—,    1,3-propylene, and-   each R₃ represents monovalent moieties which can independently be    the same or different and are selected from the group consisting of    alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, alkoxy, alkylamino, fluoroalkyl, hydrogen, and    hydroxyl (Preferably, R₃ represents monovalent moieties which can    independently be the same or different selected from the group    consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl and hydroxyl for reasons of commercial    availability. Most preferably, R₃ is methyl.);-   each R₄ is a divalent linking group (Suitable divalent linking    groups include but are not limited to the following: C₁ to C₁₀    alkylene, arylene, alkarylene, and alkoxyalkylene. Preferably, R₄ is    selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₃ alkylene and C₇-C₁₀    alkarylene for ease of synthesis. Most preferably, R₄ is selected    from the group consisting of H₂—, 1,3-propylene, and-   x is an integer of 0-3; y is an integer of 5 or greater (preferably    y is an integer ranging from about 14 to about 700, preferably from    about 20 to about 200); and q is an integer of 0-3; wherein at least    one of the following is true:    -   q is an integer of at least 1;    -   x is an integer of at least 1;    -   G₅ comprises at least one -ZSA moiety; or    -   G₆ comprises at least one -ZSA moiety.        As noted above, A is a vinyl polymeric segment formed from        polymerized free radically polymerizable monomers. The selection        of A is typically based upon the intended uses of the        composition, and the properties the copolymer must possess in        order to accomplish its intended purpose. If A comprises a block        in the case of block copolymers, a polymer having AB and/or ABA        architecture will be obtained depending upon whether a mercapto        functional group —SH is attached to one or both terminal silicon        atoms of the mercapto functional silicone compounds,        respectively. The weight ratio of vinyl polymer block or        segment, to silicone segment of the copolymer can vary. The        preferred copolymers are those wherein the weight ratio of vinyl        polymer segment to silicone segment ranges from about 98:2 to        50:50, in order that the copolymer possesses properties inherent        to each of the different polymeric segments while retaining the        overall polymer's solubility.

Sulfur linked silicone copolymers are described in more detail in U.S.Pat. No. 5,468,477, to Kumar et al., issued Nov. 21, 1995, and PCTApplication No. WO 95/03776, assigned to 3M, published Feb. 9, 1995,which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

Other useful silicone-containing polymers are those containinghydrophilic portions, such as polyvinylpyrrolidone/quaternaries,polyacrylates, polyacrylamides, polysulfonates, and mixtures thereof,and are disclosed, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 5,120,812, incorporated hereinby reference.

The film-forming and/or adhesive silicone-containing copolymer of thepresent invention is present at least an effective amount to provideshape retention, typically from about 0.05% to about 10%, preferablyfrom about 0.1% to about 5%, more preferably from about 0.2% to about3%, even more preferably from about 0.3% to about 1.5%, by weight of theusage composition.

The silicone-containing copolymer is present in the composition in asufficient amount to result in an amount of from about 0.001% to about1%, preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.5%, more preferably fromabout 0.02% to about 0.4% by weight of polymer per weight of dryfabrics.

When the optional cyclodextrin is present in the composition, thepolymer useful in providing shape retention in the composition of thepresent invention should be cyclodextrin-compatible, that is it shouldnot substantially form complexes with cyclodextrin so as to diminishperformance of the cyclodextrin and/or the polymer. Complex formationaffects both the ability of the cyclodextrin to absorb odors and theability of the polymer to impart shape retention to fabric. In thiscase, the monomers having pendant groups that can complex withcyclodextrin are not preferred because they can form complexes withcyclodextrin. Examples of such monomers are acrylic or methacrylic acidesters of C₇-C₁₈ alcohols, such as neodecanol, 3-heptanol, benzylalcohol, 2-octanol, 6-methyl-1-heptanol, 2-ethyl-1-hexanol,3,5-dimethyl-1-hexanol, 3,5,5-trimethyl-1-hexanol, and 1-decanol;aromatic vinyls, such as styrene; t-butylstyrene; vinyl toluene; and thelike.

d) Starch

For some aspects of the composition, e.g. when it is desirable for thefabric to have substantial movement (often referred to as drape orflow), starch is not normally preferred, since it makes the fabricscratchy and resistant to deformation. However, starch does provideincreased “body” which is desirable and preferred for some aspects ofthe present invention. Starch is particularly preferred in compositionsof this invention to be used on fabrics that require body and incompositions to be used with ironing. When used, starch is solubilizedor dispersed in the composition. Any type of starch, e.g. those derivedfrom corn, wheat, rice, grain sorghum, waxy grain sorghum, waxy maize ortapioca, or mixtures thereof and water soluble or dispersiblemodifications or derivatives thereof, can be used in the composition ofthe present invention. Modified starches that can be used includenatural starches that have been degraded to obtain a lower viscosity byacidic, oxidative or enzymatic depolymerization. Additionally, lowviscosity commercially available propoxylated and/or ethoxylatedstarches are useable in the present composition and are preferred sincetheir low viscosity at relatively high solids concentrations make themvery adaptable to spraying processes. Suitable alkoxylated, lowviscosity starches are submicron sized particles of hydrophobic starchthat are readily dispersed in water and are prepared by alkoxylation ofgranular starch with a monofunctional alkoxylating agent which providesthe starch with ether linked hydrophilic groups. A suitable method fortheir preparation is taught in U.S. Pat. No. 3,462,283. In accordancewith the invention, the propoxylated or ethoxylated starch derivativesare dispersed in the aqueous medium in an amount of from about 0.1% toabout 10%, preferably from about 0.5% to about 6%, more preferably fromabout 1% to about 4% by weight of the usage composition.

3. Lithium Salts

Lithium salts are disclosed as solubilizing aids, e.g., lithium bromidein the production of silk fibroin, (U.S. Pat. No. 4,233,212, issued Nov.11, 1980 to Otoi et al.), and lithium thiocyanate, (U.S. Pat. No.5,252,285, issued Oct. 12, 1993 to Robert L. Lock). U.S. Pat. No.5,296,269, issued Mar. 22, 1994 to Yang et al. discloses a process toproduce crease-resistant silk using lithium bromide and lithiumchloride. U.S. Pat. No. 5,199,954, issued Apr. 6, 1993 to Schultz et al.discloses a hair dye composition containing lithium bromide. U.S. Pat.No. 5,609,859, issued Mar. 11, 1997 to D. R. Cowsar discloses methodsfor preparing hair relaxer creams containing a lithium salt. Lithiumsalts are disclosed as static control agents in a liquid softenercomposition in U.S. Pat. No. 4,069,159, issued Jan. 17, 1978 to MasonHayek. All of these patents are incorporated herein by reference.

It is now found that aqueous compositions comprising lithium saltsprovide improved fabric wrinkle control. Nonlimiting examples of lithiumsalts that are useful in the present invention are lithium bromide,lithium chloride, lithium lactate, lithium benzoate, lithium acetate,lithium sulfate, lithium tartrate, and/or lithium bitartrate, preferablylithium bromide and/or lithium lactate. Some water soluble salts suchas, lithium benzoate are not preferred when the optional cyclodextrin ispresent because they can form complexes with cyclodextrin. Useful levelsof lithium salts are from about 0.1% to about 10%, preferably from about0.5% to about 7%, more preferably from about 1% to about 5%, by weightof the usage composition.

4. Fabric Care Polysacchrides

a) Primary Fabric Care Polysaccharide

Suitable fabric care polysaccharides for use in the fabric carecomposition of the present invention are those which have a globularconformation in dilute aqueous solution, via a random coiling structure.Said polysaccharides include homo- and/or hetero-polysaccharides withsimple helical structure with or without branching, e.g., with1,4-α-linked backbone structure (e.g., 1,4-α-glucan, 1,4-α-xylan) withor without branching, 1,3-β-linked backbone with or without branching(e.g., galactan), and all 1,6-linked backbones with or without branching(e.g., dextran, pullulan, pustulan), and with a weight-average molecularweight of from about 5,000 to about 500,000, preferably from about 8,000to about 250,000, more preferably from about 10,000 to about 150,000,typically with sizes ranging from about 2 nm to about 300 nm, preferablyfrom about 3 nm to about 100 nm, more preferably from about 4 nm toabout 30 nm. The size is defined as the gyration length occupied by themolecule in dilute aqueous solutions.

Preferably the fabric care polysaccharide is selected from the groupconsisting of arabinogalactan, pachyman, curdlan, callose, paramylon,sceleroglucan, lentinan, lichenan, laminarin, szhizophyllan, grifolan,sclerotinia sclerotiorum glucan (SSG), Ompharia lapidescence glucan(OL-2), pustulan, dextran, pullulan, substituted versions thereof,derivatised versions thereof, and mixtures thereof. More preferably thefabric care polysaccharide is selected from the group consisting ofarabinogalactan, dextran, curdlan, substituted versions thereof,derivatised versions thereof, and mixtures thereof, and even morepreferably the fabric care polysaccharide comprises arabinogalactan,substituted versions thereof, derivatised versions thereof, and mixturesthereof. Substituted and/or derivatised materials of the fabric carepolysaccharides listed hereinabove are also preferred in the presentinvention. Nonlimiting examples of these materials include: carboxyl andhydroxymethyl substitutions (e.g., some uronic acid instead of neutralsugar units); amino polysaccharides (amine substitution); cationicquaternized polysaccharides; C₁-C₁₈ alkylated polysaccharides;acetylated polysaccharide ethers; polysaccharides having amino acidresidues attached (small fragments of glycoprotein); polysaccharidescontaining silicone moieties, and the like. Some hydrophobic derivativesof the polysaccharides help the polysaccharides maintaining the globularconformation.

A preferred class of fabric care polysaccharides suitable for use in thepresent invention include those that have the backbone comprising atleast some, but preferably almost entirely of 1,3-β-glycosidic linkages,preferably branched, preferably with either side chains attached with1,6-linkages or derivatised for better water solubility and/or tomaintain the globular structure. The 1,6-linked branched polysaccharideswith 1,3-β-linked backbone have higher water solubility and/ordispersibility than the non-branched polysaccharides, so that branchedpolysaccharides can be used at higher molecular weight ranges. Insertingother types of linkages, such as some 1,4-b linkages in the 1,3-β-linkedbackbone also improves the solubility of the polysaccharides.Nonlimiting examples of useful fabric care polysaccharides with1,3-β-linked backbone include arabinogalactan, pachyman, curdlan,callose, paramylon, sceleroglucan, lentinan, lichenan, laminarin,szhizophyllan, grifolan, sclerotinia sclerotiorum glucan (SSG), Ompharialapidescence glucan (OL-2), and mixtures thereof. Low molecular weightmaterials are preferred for polysaccharides with less or no branching,such as curdlan, while higher molecular weight materials for highlybranched polysaccharides, such as arabinogalactan, can be used. Highermolecular weight polysaccharides with mixed 1,3-b and 1,4-b linkages,such as lichenan, can also be used.

A preferred fabric care branched polysaccharide with 1,3-β-linkedbackbone is arabinogalactan (also named as galactoarabinan orepsilon-galactan). Arabinogalactans are long, densely branchedhigh-molecular weight polysaccharides. Arabinogalactan that is useful inthe composition of the present invention has a molecular weight range offrom about 5,000 to about 500,000, preferably from about 6,000 to about250,000, more preferably from about 10,000 to about 150,000. Thesepolysaccharides are highly branched, consisting of a galactan backbonewith side-chains of galactose and arabinose units (consisting ofb-galactopyranose, b-arabinofuranose, and b-arabinopyranose). The majorsource of arabinogalactan is the larch tree. The genus Larix (larches)is common throughout the world. Two main sources of larch trees arewestern larch (Larix occidentalis) in Western North America andMongolian larch (Larix dahurica). Examples of other larches are easternlarch (Larix laricina) in eastern North America, European larch (Larixdicidua), Japanese larch (Larix leptolepis), and Siberian larch (Larixsiberica). Most commercial arabinogalactan is produced from westernlarch, through a counter-current extraction process. Larcharabinogalactan is water soluble and is composed of arabinose andgalactose units in about a 1:6 ratio, with a trace of uronic acid.Glycosyl linkage analysis of larch arabinogalactan is consistent with ahighly branched structure comprising a backbone of 1,3-β-linkedgalactopyranose connected by 1,3-β-glycosidic linkages, comprised of3,4,6-, 3,6-, and 3,4- as well as 3-linked residues. The molecularweights of the preferred fractions of larch arabinogalactan include onefraction in the range of from about 14,000 to about 22,000, mainly fromabout 16,000 to about 21,000, and the other in the range of from about60,000 to about 500,000, mainly from about 80,000 to about 120,000. Thefraction that has the average molecular weight of from about 16,000 toabout 20,000 is highly preferred for use in direct applications tofabric, such as in spray-on products. The high molecular weight fraction(of about 100,000 molecular weight), as well as the low molecular weightfraction are suitable for use in processes that involve subsequent watertreatments, such as, pre-soak, wash-added and/or rinse-added laundryprocesses and products. High grade larch arabinogalactan is composed ofgreater than about 98% arabinogalactan. Larch arabinogalactan and someof its derivatives, such as cationic derivatives are commerciallyavailable from Larex, Inc., St Paul, Minn.

Arabinogalactans are also present as minor, water-soluble components ofsoftwoods such as hemlock, black spruce, parana pine, mugo pine, Douglasfir, incense cedar, juniper, and the sapwood of sugar maple. Many edibleand inedible plants are also rich sources of arabinogalactans, mostly inglycoprotein form, bound to a protein spine of either threonine,proline, or serine (“arabinogalactan-protein”). These plants includeleek seeds, carrots, radish, black gram beans, pear, maize, wheat, redwine, Italian ryegrass, tomatoes, ragweed, sorghum, bamboo grass, andcoconut meat and milk. Many herbs with well established immune-enhancingproperties, such as Echinacea purpurea, Baptisia tintoria, Thujaoccidentalis, Angelica acutiloba, and Curcuma longa contain significantamounts of arabinogalactans. Small quantities of arabinogalactans alsooccur in other plants, such as, green coffee bean (sugar ratio about2:5), centrosema seeds (sugar ratio about 1:13), and wheat flour (sugarratio about 7:3). About 70% of the water solubles from soybean flour isan arabinogalactan with a sugar ratio of about 1:2.

Examples of other fabric care polysaccharides that have 1,3-β-linkage asa part of the backbone include: 1,3-β-xylan (from, e.g., Pencillusdumetosus), curdlen, a 1,3-β-glucan (from e.g., Alcaligenes faecalis),paramylon B, a 1,3-βglucan (from, e.g., Euglena gracilis), lichenin, a(1,3),(1,4)-β-glucan (from various sources including Cetrariaislandica), sceleroglucan, a (1,3),(1,6)-β-glucan (from, e.g.,Sclerotium rolfii), and lentinen, a (1,3),(1,6)-β-glucan (from, e.g.,Lentinus edodes). More details about these and other polysaccharideswith 1,3-α-linked backbone are given in “Chemistry and Biology of(1→3)-β-Glucans”, B. A. Stone and A. E. Clarke, La Trobe UniversityPress, Victoria, Australia, 1992, pp. 68-71, and 82-83, incorporatedherein by reference.

Substituted and/or derivatised materials of arabinogalactans are alsopreferred in the present invention. Nonlimiting examples of thesematerials include: carboxyl and hydroxymethyl substitutions (e.g., someuronic acid instead of neutral sugar units); amino polysaccharides(amine substitution); cationic quaternized polysaccharides; C₁-C₁₈alkylated polysaccharides; acetylated polysaccharide ethers;polysaccharides having amino acid residues attached (small fragments ofglycoprotein); polysaccharides containing silicone moieties. Thesesubstituted and/or derivatised polysaccharides can provide additionalbenefits, such as: amine substitution can bind and/or condense withoxidatively damaged regions of the fiber to rejuvenate aged fabrics;acetylated sugar ethers can serve as bleach activators in subsequentprocesses where hydrogen peroxide is present; polysaccharides havingamino acid residues can improve delivery of fabric care benefits forfabrics containing proteinaceous fibers, e.g., wool and silk; andsilicone-derivatised polysaccharides can provide additional fabricsoftness and lubricity. Examples of derivatised arabinogalactan includethe 3-chloro-2-hydroxypropyltrimethyl ammonium chloride derivative,available from Larex, Inc and the arabinogalactan-proteins givenhereinabove.

The 1,3-β-linked backbone of the fabric care polysaccharides of thepresent invention (as in 1,3-β-galactans, 1,3-βD-mannans, 1,3-β-xylansand 1,3-β-D-glucans) has a pseudohelical conformation. As such, thesepolysaccharides have a backbone chain that is flexible and in aqueoussolution, has a tendency to coil into a globular structure tosubstantially reduce their apparent dimension (gyration volume), asopposed to the backbone chain of 1,4-β-glucan which has an extendeddimension. The polysaccharides with 1,3-β-linked backbone and extensivebranching via 1,6-linkages, or polysaccharides with helical confirmationor polysaccharides with 1,6-linked backbone have added flexibility dueto the “coiling” nature of the 1,6-linkages. In water thesepolysaccharides with 1,3-β-linked backbone and 1,6-branching, e.g.,arabinogalactans, have a globular conformation with high flexibility tocoil into compact, flexible and deformable microscopic particles. Forexample, an arabinogalactan having a nominal molecular weight of about18,000 has a size (gyration length) of only from 5 nm to about 10 nm indilute aqueous solutions. This structural feature of the globularpolysaccharides with helical conformation and random coiling natureimproves physical properties such as water-solubility, low viscosity andemulsification. Not to be bound by theory is believed that the globular,compact and flexible structural property and low viscosity of the fabriccare polysaccharides with 1,3-β-linked backbone of the presentinvention, such as arabinogalactans, is important for providing thefabric care benefits, either via efficient deposition of thepolysaccharide globules on the rough fabric surface or via appropriatefitting/filling of these globules in the openings and/or defectivespaces on the fabric fiber surface, where they can orient itself toconform to the space available. Furthermore, it is believed that at lowlevels, these low molecular weight (about 10,000 to about 150,000)polysaccharide globules of the present invention can very effectivelybond fibers and/or microfibrils together by “spot bonding”. This way,the fabric care polysaccharide globules can provide many desiredbenefits such as: fabric strengthening, fabric wear resistance and/orreduction, wrinkle removal and/or reduction, fabric pilling preventionand/or reduction, fabric color maintenance and/or fading reduction,color restoration, fabric soiling reduction, fabric shape retention,fabric shrinkage reduction, and/or improving fabric feel/smoothness,scratchiness reduction, for different types of fabrics such ascellulosic (cotton, rayon, etc.), wool, silk, and the like.

Polysaccharides with helical conformation, but not within the range ofthe molecular weight range specified above have different physicalproperties such as low solubility and gelling characteristics (e.g.,starch, a high molecular weight 1,4-α-D-glucan).

The fabric care polysaccharides with globular structure of the presentinvention can provide at least some fabric care benefits to all types offabrics, including fabrics made of natural fibers, synthetic fibers, andmixtures thereof. Nonlimiting examples of fabric types that can betreated with the fabric care compositions of the present invention, toobtain fabric care benefits include fabrics made of (1) cellulosicfibers such as cotton, rayon, linen, Tencel, (2) proteinaceous fiberssuch as silk, wool and related mammalian fibers, (3) synthetic fiberssuch as polyester, acrylic, nylon, and the like, (4) long vegetablefibers from jute, flax, ramie, coir, kapok, sisal, henequen, abaca, hempand sunn, and (5) mixtures thereof. Other unanimated substrates and/orsurfaces made with natural fibers and/or synthetic fibers, and/ormaterials, such as non-woven fabrics, paddings, carpets, paper,disposable products, films, foams, can also be treated with the fabriccare polysaccharides with 1,3-β-linked backbone to improve theirproperties.

For specific applications, the composition can contain from about 0.001%to about 10% of fabric care polysaccharide with globular structure,preferably from about 0.01% to about 10%, more preferably from about0.1% to about 5%, by weight of the usage composition. The presentinvention also relates to concentrated liquid or solid compositions,which are diluted to form compositions with the usage concentrations,for use in the “usage conditions”. Concentrated compositions comprise ahigher level of fabric care polysaccharide, typically from about 1% toabout 99%, preferably from about 2% to about 65%, more preferably fromabout 3% to about 40%, by weight of the concentrated fabric carecomposition. Depending on the target fabric care benefit to be provided,the concentrated compositions should also comprise proportionally higherlevels of the desired optional ingredients.

Typical composition to be dispensed from a sprayer contains a level offabric care polysaccharide with globular structure of from about 0.01%to about 5%, preferably from about 0.05% to about 2%, more preferablyfrom about 0.1% to about 1%, by weight of the usage composition.

Dryer-added compositions typically contain a level of fabric carepolysaccharide with globular structure of from about 0.01% to about 10%by weight of the dryer-added compositions.

b) Adjunct Fabric Care Oligosaccharides

An optional but preferred adjunct fabric care agent in the presentinvention is selected from the group consisting of oligosaccharides,especially mixtures of oligosaccharides, especially,isomaltooligosaccharides (IMO) (including mixtures), the individualcomponents of said mixtures, substituted versions thereof, derivatisedversions thereof, and mixtures thereof. The adjunct fabric fabric careoligosaccharides help to provide some fabric benefits, such as wrinkleremoval and/or reduction, anti-pilling, anti-wear, fabric colormaintenance, and overall appearance benefits, especially to cellulosicfibers/fabrics, such as cotton, rayon, ramie, jute, flax, linen,polynosic-fibers, Lyocell (Tencel®), polyester/cotton blends, othercotton blends, and the like, especially cotton, rayon, linen,polyester/cotton blends, and mixtures thereof.

Suitable adjunct fabric care oligosaccharides that are useful in thepresent invention include oligosaccharides with a degree ofpolymerization (DP) of from about 1 to about 15, preferably from about 2to about 10, and wherein each monomer is selected from the groupconsisting of reducing saccharide containing 5 and/or 6 carbon atoms,including isomaltose, isomaltotriose, isomaltotetraose,isomaltooligosaccharide, fructooligosaccharide, levooligosaccharides,galactooligosaccharide, xylooligosaccharide, gentiooligosaccharides,disaccharides, glucose, fructose, galactose, xylose, mannose, arabinose,rhamnose, maltose, sucrose, lactose, maltulose, ribose, lyxose, allose,altrose, gulose, idose, talose, trehalose, nigerose, kojibiose,lactulose, oligosaccharides, maltooligosaccharides, trisaccharides,tetrasaccharides, pentasaccharides, hexasaccharides, oligosaccharidesfrom partial hydrolysates of natural polysaccharide sources, and thelike, and mixtures thereof, preferably mixtures ofisomaltooligosaccharides, especially mixtures includingisomaltooligosaccharides, comprising from about 3 to about 7 units ofglucose, respectively, and which are linked by 1,2-α, 1,3-α, 1,4-α- and1,6-α-linkages, and mixtures of these linkages. Oligosaccharidescontaining b-linkages are also preferred. Preferred oligosaccharides areacyclic and have at least one linkage that is not an α-1,4-glycosidicbond. A preferred oligosaccharide is a mixture containing IMO: from 0 toabout 20% by weight of glucose, from about 10 to about 65% ofisomaltose, from about 1% to about 45% of each of isomaltotriose,isomaltetraose and isomaltopentaose, from 0 to about 3% of each ofisomaltohexaose, isomaltoheptaose, isomaltooctaose and isomaltononaose,from about 0.2% to about 15% of each of isomaltohexaose andisomaltoheptaose, and from 0 to about 50% by weight of said mixturebeing isomaltooligosaccharides of 2 to 7 glucose units and from 0 toabout 10% by weight of said mixture being isomaltooligosaccharides ofabout 7 to about 10 glucose units. Other nonlimiting examples ofpreferred acyclic oligosaccharides, with approximate content by weightpercent, are: Isomaltooligosaccharide Mixture I Trisaccharides(maltotriose, panose, isomaltotriose) 40-65% Disaccharides (maltose,isomaltose)  5-15% Monosaccharide (glucose)  0-20% Higher branchedsugars (4 < DP < 10) 10-30% Isomaltooligosaccharide Mixture IITrisaccharides (maltotriose, panose, isomaltotriose) 10-25%Disaccharides (maltose, isomaltose) 10-55% Monosaccharide (glucose)10-20% Higher branched sugars (4 < DP < 10)  5-10%Isomaltooligosaccharide Mixture III Tetrasaccharides (stachyose) 10-40%Trisaccharides (raffinose)  0-10% Disaccharides (sucrose, trehalose)10-50% Monosaccharide (glucose, fructose)  0-10% Other higher branchedsugars (4 < DP < 10)  0-5%

Oligosaccharide mixtures are either prepared by enzymatic reactions orseparated as natural products from plant materials. The enzymaticsynthesis of oligosaccharides involves either adding monosaccharides,one at a time, to a di- or higher saccharide to produce branchedoligosaccharides, or it can involve the degradation of polysaccharidesfollowed by transfer of saccharides to branching positions. Forinstance, Oligosaccharide Mixtures I and II are prepared by enzymatichydrolysis of starch to maltooligosaccharides, which are then convertedto isomaltooligosaccharides by a transglucosidase reaction.Oligosaccharide Mixture III, for example, is a mixture ofoligosaccharides isolated from soybean. Soybean oligosaccharides such asMixture III, are of pure natural origin.

Cyclic oligosaccharides can also be useful in the fabric carecomposition of the present invention. Preferred cyclic oligosaccharidesinclude α-cyclodextrin, b-cyclodextrin, γ-cyclodextrin, their branchedderivatives such as glucosyl-α-cyclodextrin-α-diglucosyl-α-cyclodextrin,maltosyl-α-cyclodextrin, glucosyl-β-cyclodextrin,diglucosyl-β-cyclodextrin, and mixtures thereof. The cyclodextrins alsoprovide an optional but very important benefit of odor control, and aredisclosed more fully hereinbelow.

Substituted and/or derivatised materials of the oligosaccharides listedhereinabove are also preferred in the present invention. Nonlimitingexamples of these materials include: carboxyl and hydroxymethylsubstitutions (e.g., glucuronic acid instead of glucose); aminooligosaccharides (amine substitution, e.g., glucosamine instead ofglucose); cationic quaternized oligosaccharides; C₁-C₆ alkylatedoligosaccharides; acetylated oligosaccharide ethers; oligosaccharideshaving amino acid residues attached (small fragments of glycoprotein);oligosaccharides containing silicone moieties. These substituted and/orderivatised oligosaccharides can provide additional benefits, such as:carboxyl and hydroxymethyl substitutions can introduce readilyoxidizable materials on and in the fiber, thus reducing the probabilityof the fiber itself being oxidized by oxidants, such as bleaches; aminesubstitution can bind and/or condense with oxidatively damaged regionsof the fiber to rejuvenate aged fabrics; acetylated sugar ethers canserve as bleach activators in subsequent processes where hydrogenperoxide is present; oligosaccharides having amino acid residues canimprove delivery of fabric care benefits for fabrics containingproteinaceous fibers, e.g., wool and silk; and silicone-derivatisedoligosaccharides can provide additional fabric softness and lubricity.C₆ alkyl oligosaccharide is disclosed (along with other higher, viz.,C₆-C₃₀, alkyl polysaccharides) in U.S. Pat. No. 4,565,647, issued Jan.21, 1986 to Llenado, for use as foaming agent in foaming compositionssuch as laundry detergents, personal and hair cleaning compositions, andfire fighting compositions. The C₆ alkyl oligosaccharide is a poorsurfactant and not preferred for use as surfactant in the presentinvention, but preferably can be used to provide the fabric carebenefits that are not known, appreciated and/or disclosed in U.S. Pat.No. 4,565,647. U.S. Pat. No. 4,488,981, issued Dec. 18, 1984 disclosesthe use of some C₁-C₆ alkylated oligosaccharides (lower alkylglycosides) in aqueous liquid detergents to reduce their viscosity andto prevent phase separation. C₁-C₆ alkylated oligosaccharides can beused to provide the fabric care benefits that are not known, appreciatedand/or disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,488,981. These patents areincorporated herein by reference.

It is believed that the fabric care oligosaccharide is adsorbed andbinds with cellulosic fabrics to improve the properties of the fabrics.It is believed that the fabric care oligosaccharide is bound to thecellulosic fibers, diffuses in and fills the defect sites (the amorphousregion) of the fiber, to provide the above dewrinkling, increasedstrength and improved appearance benefits. The extent of the amorphous,non-crystalline region varies with cellulosic fiber types, e.g., therelative crystallinity of cotton is about 70.% and for regeneratedcellulose, such as, rayon it is about 30.%, as reported by P. H. Hermansand A. Weidinger, “X-ray studies on the crystallinity of cellulose” inthe Journal of Polymer Science, Vol IV, p135-144, 1949. It is believedthat the amorphous regions are accessible for chemical and physicalmodifications, and that in the durable press treatment, the amorphousregions are filled with molecules that can crosslink cellulose polymersby covalent bonds, to deliver wrinkle-free benefits (cf. S. P. Rawland,in “Modified Cellulosics,” R. M. Rowell and R. A. Young, Eds., AcademicPress, New York, 1978, pp. 147-167, cited by G. C. Tesoro, in‘Crosslinking of cellulosics’, Handbook of Fiber Science and Technology,Vol. II, p.6, edited by M. Lewin and S. B. Sello, published by MarcelDekker, 1983. These publications are incorporated herein by reference.

For some aspects of the present invention the composition can containfrom about 0.001% to about 10% of the optional, but preferredoligosaccharide, preferably from about 0.01% to about 8%, morepreferably from about 0.1% to about 5%, by weight of the usagecomposition.

Typical composition to be dispensed from a sprayer contains a level ofoptional fabric care oligosaccharide of from about 0.01% to about 3%,preferably from about 0.05% to about 2%, more preferably from about 0.1%to about 1%, by weight of the usage composition.

Dryer-added compositions typically contain a level of optional fabriccare oligosaccharide of from about 0.01% to about 10%.

Both the primary fabric care polysaccharides and the adjunct fabric careoligosaccharides have a compact structure, but they have differentsizes. The smaller oligosaccharides are believed to be able to diffuseand penetrate into small defective sites, such as the amorphous regionof cotton fibers, while the larger polysaccharides can fill in largeropenings and/or defective sites on the fabric fiber surface. Thereforedepending on the fabric care benefit target, the primary fabric carepolysaccharides and the adjunct fabric care polysaccharide can be usedalone, or in mixtures. When the adjunct fabric care polysaccharide (e.g.oligosaccharides) are present, the weight ratio between saidoligosaccharides and the fabric care polysaccharides is typically fromabout 1:99 to about 99:1, preferably from about 15:85 to about 85:15,and more preferably from about 30:70 to about 70:30.

5. Mixtures Thereof

As stated hereinbefore, the composition can also contain mixtures offiber lubricant, shape retention polymer, lithium salts, and/or fabriccare polysaccharides.

C. Surfactants

Surfactant is an optional but highly preferred ingredient of the presentinvention. Surfactant is especially useful in the composition tofacilitate the dispersion, emulsification and/or solubilization ofwrinkle control agents such as silicones and/or certain relatively waterinsoluble shape retention polymers. The surfactant can provide someplasticizing effect to the shape retention polymers resulting in a moreflexible polymer network. Surfactants can provide a low surface tensionthat permits the composition to spread readily and more uniformly onhydrophobic surfaces like polyester and nylon. Surfactants also help thecomposition penetrate fibers more thoroughly to provide hydrogen bondbreaking, lubricity and plasticity at every level of the fiberstructure. Surfactant also aids the composition in penetrating fabricstreated with hydrophobic fabric finishes that tend to repel water.Residual surfactant also helps keep fibrils flat against the fibersurface, thus smoothing the surface and aiding in wrinkle release.Residual surfactant can also act to stiffen fibers, thus helping toprevent rewrinkling. Surfactant is preferably included when thecomposition is used in a spray dispenser and/or a dispenser for use in aclothes dryer other fabric modifying machine in order to enhance thespray and/or dispensing characteristics of the composition and allow thecomposition to distribute more evenly, and to prevent clogging of thespray apparatus and/or dispenser apparatus. The spreading of thecomposition can also allow it to dry faster, so that the treatedmaterial is ready to use sooner. For concentrated compositions, thesurfactant facilitates the dispersion of many actives such asantimicrobial actives and perfumes in the concentrated aqueouscompositions.

Surfactants normally fall into several groups, nonionic surfactants,ionic surfactants, amphoteric surfactants, and fluorine-basedsurfactants. Another special class of surfactants are cyclodextrincompatible surfactants which are disclosed under the section titled‘Odor Control Agents’. It is preferred to use cyclodextrin compatiblesurfactants when optional cyclodextrin is incorporated in theformulation.

When optional surfactants are incorporated, typical levels are at leastabout 0.0001%, preferably 0.001%, more preferably at least about 0.01%,and even more preferably at least about 0.1% and typically less thanabout 20%, preferably less than about 15%, more preferably less thanabout 10%, even more preferably less than about 5% and most preferablyless than about 3% of the weight of the composition.

1. Nonionic Surfactants

A preferred, but nonlimiting, type of nonionic surfactant is alkylethoxylated surfactant, such as addition products of ethylene oxide withfatty alcohols, fatty acids, fatty amines, etc. Optionally, additionproducts of mixtures of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide with fattyalcohols, fatty acids, fatty amines can be used. The ethoxylatedsurfactant includes compounds having the general formula:R⁸-Z-(CH₂CH₂O)_(s)Bwherein R⁸ is an alkyl group or an alkyl aryl group, selected from thegroup consisting of primary, secondary and branched chain alkylhydrocarbyl groups, primary, secondary and branched chain alkenylhydrocarbyl groups, and/or primary, secondary and branched chain alkyl-and alkenyl-substituted phenolic hydrocarbyl groups having from about 6to about 20 carbon atoms, preferably from about 8 to about 18, morepreferably from about 10 to about 15 carbon atoms; s is an integer fromabout 2 to about 45, preferably from about 2 to about 20, morepreferably from about 2 to about 15; B is hydrogen, a carboxylate group,or a sulfate group; and linking group Z is selected from the groupconsisting of: —O—, —N(R)_(x)—, —C(O)O—, —C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)—, andmixtures thereof, in which R, when present, is R⁸, a lower alkyl withabout 1 to about 4 carbons, a polyalkylene oxide, or hydrogen, and x is1 or 2.

The nonionic alkyl ethoxylated surfactants herein are characterized byan HLB (hydrophilic-lipophilic balance) of from about 5 to about 20,preferably from about 6 to about 15.

Nonlimiting examples of preferred alkyl ethoxylated surfactants are:

-   -   straight-chain, primary alcohol ethoxylates, with R⁸ being        C₈-C₁₈ alkyl and/or alkenyl group, more preferably C₁₀-C₁₄, and        s being from about 2 to about 8, preferably from about 2 to        about 6;    -   straight-chain, secondary alcohol ethoxylates, with R⁸ being        C₈-C₁₈ alkyl and/or alkenyl, e.g., 3-hexadecyl, 2-octadecyl,        4-eicosanyl, and 5-eicosanyl, and s being from about 2 to about        10;    -   alkyl phenol ethoxylates wherein the alkyl phenols having an        alkyl or alkenyl group containing from about 3 to about 20        carbon atoms in a primary, secondary or branched chain        configuration, preferably from about 6 to about 12 carbon atoms,        and s is from about 2 to about 12, preferably from about 2 to        about 8;    -   branched chain alcohol ethoxylates, wherein branched chain        primary and secondary alcohols (or Guerbet alcohols) which are        available, e.g., from the well-known “OXO” process, or        modification thereof, are ethoxylated.

Especially preferred are alkyl ethoxylate surfactants with each R⁸ beingC₈-C₁₆ straight chain and/or branch chain alkyl and the number ofethyleneoxy groups s being from about 2 to about 6, preferably fromabout 2 to about 4, more preferably with R⁸ being C₈-C₁₅ alkyl and sbeing from about 2.25 to about 3.5. These nonionic surfactants arecharacterized by an HLB of from 6 to about 11, preferably from about 6.5to about 9.5, and more preferably from about 7 to about 9. Nonlimitingexamples of commercially available preferred surfactants are Neodol91-2.5 (C₉-C₁₀, s=2.7, HLB=8.5), Neodol 23-3 (C₁₂-C₁₃, s=2.9, HLB=7.9)and Neodol 25-3 (C₁₂-C₁₅, s=2.8, HLB=7.5). It is found, verysurprisingly, that these preferred surfactants which are themselves notvery water soluble (0.1% aqueous solutions of these surfactants are notclear), can at low levels, effectively emulsify and or disperse siliconeoils and these surfactants can also solubilize and/or disperse shaperetention polymers such as copolymers containing acrylic acid andtert-butyl acrylate into clear compositions, even without the presenceof a low molecular weight alcohol. Many nonlimiting examples of suitablenonionic surfactants are given in the table below.

Other useful nonionic alkyl alkoxylated surfactants are ethoxylatedalkyl amines derived from the condensation of ethylene oxide withhydrophobic alkyl amines, with R⁸ having from about 8 to about 22 carbonatoms and s being from about 3 to about 30.

Other examples of useful ethoxylated surfactant include carboxylatedalcohol ethoxylate, also known as ether carboxylate, with R⁸ having fromabout 12 to about 16 carbon atoms and s being from about 5 to about 13;ethoxylated alkyl amine or quaternary ammonium surfactants, R⁸ havingfrom about 8 to about 22 carbon atoms and s being from about 3 to about30, such as PEG-5 cocomonium methosulfate, PEG-15 cocomonium chloride,PEG-15 oleammonium chloride and bis(polyethoxyethanol)tallow ammoniumchloride.

Additional suitable nonionic surfactants include surfactants derivedfrom carbohydrates such as sorbitan esters, especially sorbitanmonoesters, also alkyl glucosides, and alkyl polyglucosides. A specificdescription of many surfactants which are derived from carbohydrates canbe found in Handbook of Surfactants, M. R. Porter, 1991, Blackie & SonLtd, pp. 142-145. Glucamines are additional examples of surfactantsderived from carbohydrates and are included herein by reference to U.S.Pat. No. 5,194,639 issued Mar. 16, 1993 to D. S. Connor, J. J. Scheibel,and R. G. Severson; U.S. Pat. No. 5,338,487 issued Aug. 16, 1993 to D.S. Connor, J. J. Scheibel, and J.-N. Kao; U.S. Pat. No. 5,489,393 issuedFeb. 6, 1996 to D. S. Connor, J. J. Scheibel, and Y. C. Fu; and U.S.Pat. No. 5,512,699 issued Apr. 30, 1996 to D. S. Connor, Y. C. Fu, andJ. J. Scheibel. Preferred alkyl polyglucosides are those having aqueoussurface tension below about 35 mN/m such as AG 6202 and AG6210 from AkzoNobel Chemicals, Inc., Chicago, Ill. TABLE 1 Nonlimiting Examples ofSome Suitable Nonionic Surfactants. HLB Name Structure Value SuppliersNeodol ® 91-2.5 C₉-C₁₀ - 2.7EO 8.5 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol ® 23-1C₁₂-C₁₃ - 1.0EO 3.7 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol ® 23-2 C₁₂-C₁₃ - 2.0EO 5.9Shell Chemical Co. Neodol ® 23-3 C₁₂-C₁₃ - 2.9EO 7.9 Shell Chemical Co.Neodol ® 25-3 C₁₂-C₁₅ - 2.8EO 7.5 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol ® 23-5C₁₂-C₁₃ - 5.0EO 10.7 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol ® 25-9 C₁₂-C₁₅ - 8.9EO13.1 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol ® 25-12 C₁₂-C₁₅ - 11.9EO 14.4 ShellChemical Co. Hetoxol ® TD-3 C₁₃ - 3EO 7.9 Heterene Inc. Hetoxol ® OL-5Oleyl - 5EO 8.0 Heterene Inc. Kessco ® PEG-8 Monooleate Oleoyl - 8EO11.0 Stepan Co. Kessco ® Glycero monooleate Glyceryl mono-oleate 3.8Stepan Co. Arlacel ® 20 Sorbitan mono-laurate 8.6 ICI Americas

2. Ionic Surfactants

Nonlimiting preferred ionic surfactants are the class of anionicsurfactants. Anionic surfactants are preferred ionic surfactants sincethey are least likely to leave residues. Many suitable nonlimitingexamples from the class of anionic surfactants can be found inSurfactants and Interfacial Phenomena, 2^(nd) Ed., Milton J. Rosen,1989, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., pp. 7-16, which is hereby incorporated byreference. Additional suitable nonlimiting examples of anionicsurfactants can be found in Handbook of Surfactants, M. R. Porter, 1991,Blackie & Son Ltd, pp. 54-115 and references therein, the disclosure ofwhich is incorporated herein by reference.

Structurally, suitable anionic surfactants contain at least onehydrophobic moiety and at least one hydrophilic moiety. The surfactantcan contain multiple hydrophobic moieties and/or multiple hydrophilicmoieties, but preferably less than or equal to about 2 hydrophobicmoieties and less than or equal to about 3 hydrophilic moieties. Thehydrophobic moiety is typically comprised of hydrocarbons either as analkyl group or an alkyl-aryl group. Alkyl groups typically contain fromabout 6 to about 22 carbons, preferably about 10 to about 18 carbons,and more preferably from about 12 to about 16 carbons; aryl groupstypically contain alkyl groups containing from about 4 to about 6carbons. Each alkyl group can be a branched or linear chain and iseither saturated or unsaturated. A typical aryl group is benzene. Sometypical hydrophilic groups for anionic surfactants include but are notlimited to —CO₂ ⁻, —OSO₃ ⁻, —SO₃ ⁻, —(OR¹)_(x)—CO₂ ⁻, —(OR₁)_(x)—OSO₃ ⁻,—(OR₁)_(n)—SO₃—. With x being less than about 10 and preferably lessthan about 5. Some nonlimiting examples of suitable surfactantsincludes, Stepanol® WAC, Biosoft® 40 (Stepan Co., Northfield, Ill.).

Other suitable ionic surfactants include the cationic surfactants.Nonlimiting examples of these classes of surfactants can be found inHandbook of Surfactants, M. R. Porter, 1991, Blackie & Son Ltd, pp.179-202 as well as in Surfactants and Interfacial Phenomena, 2^(nd) Ed.,Milton J. Rosen, 1989, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., pp. 17-20 and pp. 28-31and references therein, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporatedherein by reference.

3. Amphoteric Surfactants

Amphoteric surfactants are suitable for use in the present invention.Amphoteric surfactants, also referred to as zwitterionic surfactantscomprise multiple head groups having both negative and positive chargeor at least the capacity to acquire negative and positive charge.Amphoteric surfactants have advantages over other surfactants sincethese are less irritating to the skin and yet still provide goodwetting. Some nonlimiting examples of amphoteric surfactants useful forthe present invention are: betaines, amine-oxides, sulfobetaines,sultaines, glycinates, aminoipropionates, imidazoline-based amphoterics.Various amphoteric surfactants are disclosed in the Handbook ofsurfactants by M. R. Porter, Chapman & Hall, 1991 and references thereinand in Surfactants and Interfacial Phenomena by M. Rosen, 2^(nd) Ed.,John Wiley & Sons, 1989 and references therein and these areincorporated herein by reference.

4. Fluorocarbon Surfactans

Fluorocarbon surfactants are the class of surfactants wherein thehydrophobic part of the amphiphile comprises at least in part someportion of a carbon-based linear or cyclic moiety having fluorinesattached to the carbon where typically hydrogens would be attached tothe carbons together with a hydrophilic head group. Some typicalnonlimiting fluorocarbon surfactants include fluorinated alkylpolyoxyalkylene, and fluorinated alkyl esters as well as ionicsurfactants. Representative structures for these compounds are givenbelow:

-   -   (1) R_(f)R(R¹⁰)_(x)R²    -   (2) R_(f)R—OC(O)R₃    -   (3) R_(f)R—Y-Z    -   (4) R_(f)RZ        where R_(f) contains from about 6 to about 18 carbons each        having from about 0 to about 3 fluorines attached. R is either        an alkyl or alkylene oxide group which when present, has from        about 1 to about 10 carbons and R₁ represents an alkylene        radical having from about 1 to about 4 carbons, R₂ is either a        hydrogen or a small alkyl capping group having from about 1 to        about 3 carbons. R₃ represents a hydrocarbon moiety comprising        from about 2 to about 22 including the carbon on the ester        group. This hydrocarbon can be linear, branched or cyclic        saturated or unsaturated and contained moieties based on oxygen,        nitrogen, and sulfur including, but not limited to ethers,        alcohols, esters, carboxylates, amides, amines, thio-esters, and        thiols; these oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur moieties can either        interrupt the hydrocabon chain or be pendant on the hydrocarbon        chain. In structure 3, Y represents a hydrocarbon group that can        be an alkyl, pyridine group, amidopropyl, etc. that acts as a        linking group between the fluorinated chain and the hydrophilic        head group. In structures 3 and 4, Z represents a cationic,        anionic, and amphoteric hydrophilic head groups including, but        not limited to carboxylates, sulfates, sulfonates, quaternary        ammonium groups, and betaines. Nonlimiting commercially        available examples of these structures include Zonyl® 9075, FSO,        FSN, FS-300, FS-310, FSN-100, FSO-100, FTS, TBC from DuPont and        Fluorad™ surfactants FC-430, FC-431, FC-740, FC-99, FC-120,        FC-754, FC170C, and FC-171 from the 3M™ company in St. Paul,        Minn.

D. Organic Solvents

Optional optional organic solvents include solvents and plasticizers andplasticizers act that aid the natural ability of the said composition toplasticize fibers and these provide many other benefits as well to thepresent invention which are disclosed herein. Many orgnanic solventsreduce the surface tension of said composition to achieve betterspreading and pentration particularly on surfaces that tend to behydrophobic. Organic solvents modify dry times both by increasing ordecreasing the dry time, whichever is desirable for a particular aspectof the present invention. For some aspects of the present invention, itis preferred to decrease dry time e.g. such that consumers may wearclothes quickly after the treatment is applied. When it is desired toincrease dry time, it is typical to include at least about 3% solvent orplasticizer, preferably at least about 5% solvent or plasticizer byweight of the composition. For some aspects of the present invention, itis preferred to slow the drying time e.g. to maintain fiberplaticization for a longer period of time and therefore have more timeto effect wrinkle removal.

Low molecular weight polyols with relatively high boiling points, ascompared to water, such as ethylene glycol, propylene glycol and/orglycerol are preferred optional ingredients for improving odor controlperformance of the composition of the present invention, especially whencyclodextrin is present, as disclosed herein below under the section onodor control agents. Some organic solvents provide anti-microbialefficacy as disclosed herein under the section on anti-microbialactives.

Acceptable organic solvents include compounds having from one to tencarbons. The following non-limiting classes of compounds are suitable:mono-alcohols, diols, polyhydric alcohols, ethers, ketones, esters,organic acids, and alkyl glyceryl ethers, and hydrocarbons. While allorganic solvents as defined above are acceptable in the presentinvention, typically, organic solvents that are miscible and/or solublein water are preferred. On the other hand, when an immiscible orinsoluble organic solvent has other desirable properties, e.g. low odoror favorable economics, such that it is the acceptable or in someaspects of the present invention, the preferred organic solvent,surfactants, as disclosed herein, can be used to increase miscibilityand solubility. Some nonlimiting examples include methanol, ethanol,isopropanol, hexanol, 1,2-hexanediol, hexylene glycol, (e.g.2-methyl-2,4-pentanediol), isopropylen glycol (3-methyl-1,3-butanediol),1,2-butylene glycol, 2,3-butylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol,1,4-butylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, isomersof cyclohexanedimethanol, isomers of propanediol, isomers of butanediol,the isomers of trimethylpentanediol, the isomers ofethylmethylpentanediol, alcohol ethoxylates of 2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol,2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentanediol, alcohol ethoxylates of2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentanediol glycerol, ethylene glycol, diethyleneglycol, dipropylene glycol, sorbitol, 3-methyl-3-methoxybutanol,3-methoxybutanol, 1-ethoxy-2-propanol, diethylene glycol monoethylether, diethylene glycol monopropyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutylether, triethylene glycol monoethyl ether, erythritol, and mixtures ofsolvents and plasticizers. When optional cyclodextrin is present, theplasticizer should be compatible with it. Mixtures of organic solventsare also suitable.

When organic solvent is used, it is used typically at a level of atleast about 0.5%, preferably at least about 1%, more preferably at leastabout 2%, even more preferably at least about 3% and still morepreferably at least about 4% and typically less than about 30%,preferably less than about 25%, more preferably less than about 20%,even more preferably less than about 15% by weight of the composition.To reduce concerns associated with emitting volatile organic compoundsinto the environment and reduce safety issues associated withflammability, it is typical to limit the amount of solvent in thecomposition to lower than about 10%, and preferably lower than about 7%by weight of the composition. It is preferably for the usage compositionto have a flash point of at least about 55° C., more preferably at leastabout than about 60° C., even more preferably at least about 65° C. Itis acceptable for the present invention to use mixtures of solventsand/or plasticizers.

E. Malodor Control Agent

The compositions for odor control are of the type disclosed in U.S. Pat.Nos. 5,534,165; 5,578,563; 5,663,134; 5,668,097; 5,670,475; and5,714,137, Trinh et al. issued Jul. 9, 1996; Nov. 26, 1996; Sep. 2,1997; Sep. 16, 1997; Sep. 23, 1997; and Feb. 3, 1998 respectively, allof said patents being incorporated herein by reference. Suchcompositions can contain several different optional odor control agentsin addition to the polymers described hereinbefore that can controlamine odors.

1. Cyclodextrin

As used herein, the term “cyclodextrin” includes any of the knowncyclodextrins such as unsubstituted cyclodextrins containing from six totwelve glucose units, especially, alpha-cyclodextrin, beta-cyclodextrin,gamma-cyclodextrin and/or their derivatives and/or mixtures thereof. Thealpha-cyclodextrin consists of six glucose units, the beta-cyclodextrinconsists of seven glucose units, and the gamma-cyclodextrin consists ofeight glucose units arranged in donut-shaped rings. The specificcoupling and conformation of the glucose units give the cyclodextrins arigid, conical molecular structures with hollow interiors of specificvolumes. The “lining” of each internal cavity is formed by hydrogenatoms and glycosidic bridging oxygen atoms; therefore, this surface isfairly hydrophobic. The unique shape and physical-chemical properties ofthe cavity enable the cyclodextrin molecules to absorb (form inclusioncomplexes with) organic molecules or parts of organic molecules whichcan fit into the cavity. Many odorous molecules can fit into the cavityincluding many malodorous molecules and perfume molecules. Therefore,cyclodextrins, and especially mixtures of cyclodextrins with differentsize cavities, can be used to control odors caused by a broad spectrumof organic odoriferous materials, which may, or may not, containreactive functional groups. The complexation between cyclodextrin andodorous molecules occurs rapidly in the presence of water. However, theextent of the complex formation also depends on the polarity of theabsorbed molecules. In an aqueous solution, strongly hydrophilicmolecules (those which are highly water-soluble) are only partiallyabsorbed, if at all. Therefore, cyclodextrin does not complexeffectively with some very low molecular weight organic amines and acidswhen they are present at low levels on wet fabrics. As the water isbeing removed however, e.g., the fabric is being dried off, some lowmolecular weight organic amines and acids have more affinity and willcomplex with the cyclodextrins more readily.

The cavities within the cyclodextrin in the solution of the presentinvention should remain essentially unfilled (the cyclodextrin remainsuncomplexed) while in solution, in order to allow the cyclodextrin toabsorb various odor molecules when the solution is applied to a surface.Non-derivatised (normal) beta-cyclodextrin can be present at a level upto its solubility limit of about 1.85% (about 1.85 g in 100 grams ofwater) at room temperature. Beta-cyclodextrin is not preferred incompositions which call for a level of cyclodextrin higher than itswater solubility limit. Non-derivatised beta-cyclodextrin is generallynot preferred when the composition contains surfactant since it affectsthe surface activity of most of the preferred surfactants that arecompatible with the derivatised cyclodextrins.

Preferably, the cyclodextrins used in the present invention are highlywater-soluble such as, alpha-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof,gamma-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof, derivatisedbeta-cyclodextrins, and/or mixtures thereof. The derivatives ofcyclodextrin consist mainly of molecules wherein some of the OH groupsare converted to OR groups. Cyclodextrin derivatives include, e.g.,those with short chain alkyl groups such as methylated cyclodextrins,and ethylated cyclodextrins, wherein R is a methyl or an ethyl group;those with hydroxyalkyl substituted groups, such as hydroxypropylcyclodextrins and/or hydroxyethyl cyclodextrins, wherein R is a—CH₂—CH(OH)—CH₃ or a —CH₂CH₂—OH group; branched cyclodextrins such asmaltose-bonded cyclodextrins; cationic cyclodextrins such as thosecontaining 2-hydroxy-3-(dimethylamino)propyl ether, wherein R isCH₂—CH(OH)—CH₂—N(CH₃)₂ which is cationic at low pH; quaternary ammonium,e.g., 2-hydroxy-3-(trimethylammonio)propyl ether chloride groups,wherein R is CH₂—CH(OH)—CH₂—N⁺(CH₃)₃Cl⁻; anionic cyclodextrins such ascarboxymethyl cyclodextrins, cyclodextrin sulfates, and cyclodextrinsuccinylates; amphoteric cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl/quaternaryammonium cyclodextrins; cyclodextrins wherein at least one glucopyranoseunit has a 3-6-anhydro-cyclomalto structure, e.g., themono-3-6-anhydrocyclodextrins, as disclosed in “Optimal Performanceswith Minimal Chemical Modification of Cyclodextrins”, F. Diedaini-Pilardand B. Perly, The 7th International Cyclodextrin Symposium Abstracts,April 1994, p. 49, said references being incorporated herein byreference; and mixtures thereof. Other cyclodextrin derivatives aredisclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,426,011, Parmerter et al., issued Feb. 4,1969; U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,453,257; 3,453,258; 3,453,259; and 3,453,260, allin the names of Parmerter et al., and all issued Jul. 1, 1969; U.S. Pat.No. 3,459,731, Gramera et al., issued Aug. 5, 1969; U.S. Pat. No.3,553,191, Parmerter et al., issued Jan. 5, 1971; U.S. Pat. No.3,565,887, Parmerter et al., issued Feb. 23, 1971; U.S. Pat. No.4,535,152, Szejtli et al., issued Aug. 13, 1985; U.S. Pat. No.4,616,008, Hirai et al., issued Oct. 7, 1986; U.S. Pat. No. 4,678,598,Ogino et al., issued Jul. 7, 1987; U.S. Pat. No. 4,638,058, Brandt etal., issued Jan. 20, 1987; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,746,734, Tsuchiyama etal., issued May 24, 1988; all of said patents being incorporated hereinby reference.

Highly water-soluble cyclodextrins are those having water solubility ofat least about 10 g in 100 ml of water at room temperature, preferablyat least about 20 g in 100 ml of water, more preferably at least about25 g in 100 ml of water at room temperature. The availability ofsolubilized, uncomplexed cyclodextrins is essential for effective andefficient odor control performance. Solubilized, water-solublecyclodextrin can exhibit more efficient odor control performance thannon-water-soluble cyclodextrin when deposited onto surfaces, especiallyfabric.

Examples of preferred water-soluble cyclodextrin derivatives suitablefor use herein are hydroxypropyl alpha-cyclodextrin, methylatedalpha-cyclodextrin, methylated beta-cyclodextrin, hydroxyethylbeta-cyclodextrin, and hydroxypropyl beta-cyclodextrin. Hydroxyalkylcyclodextrin derivatives preferably have a degree of substitution offrom about 1 to about 14, more preferably from about 1.5 to about 7,wherein the total number of OR groups per cyclodextrin is defined as thedegree of substitution. Methylated cyclodextrin derivatives typicallyhave a degree of substitution of from about 1 to about 18, preferablyfrom about 3 to about 16. A known methylated beta-cyclodextrin isheptakis-2,6-di-O-methyl-α-cyclodextrin, commonly known as DIMEB, inwhich each glucose unit has about 2 methyl groups with a degree ofsubstitution of about 14. A preferred, more commercially available,methylated beta-cyclodextrin is a randomly methylated beta-cyclodextrin,commonly known as RAMEB, having different degrees of substitution,normally of about 12.6. RAMEB is more preferred than DIMEB, since DIMEBaffects the surface activity of the preferred surfactants more thanRAMEB. The preferred cyclodextrins are available, e.g., from CerestarUSA, Inc. and Wacker Chemicals (USA), Inc.

It is also preferable to use a mixture of cyclodextrins. Such mixturesabsorb odors more broadly by complexing with a wider range ofodoriferous molecules having a wider range of molecular sizes.Preferably at least a portion of the cyclodextrins is alpha-cyclodextrinand its derivatives thereof, gamma-cyclodextrin and its derivativesthereof, and/or derivatised beta-cyclodextrin, more preferably a mixtureof alpha-cyclodextrin, or an alpha-cyclodextrin derivative, andderivatised beta-cyclodextrin, even more preferably a mixture ofderivatised alpha-cyclodextrin and derivatised beta-cyclodextrin, mostpreferably a mixture of hydroxypropyl alpha-cyclodextrin andhydroxypropyl beta-cyclodextrin, and/or a mixture of methylatedalpha-cyclodextrin and methylated beta-cyclodextrin.

Preferably, the solution used to treat the surface under usageconditions is virtually not discernible when dry. Typical levels ofcyclodextrin in usage compositions for usage conditions are from about0.01% to about 5%, preferably from about 0.1% to about 4%, morepreferably from about 0.5% to about 2% by weight of the composition.Compositions with higher concentrations can leave unacceptable visiblestains on fabrics as the solution evaporates off of the fabric. This isespecially a problem on thin, colored, synthetic fabrics. In order toavoid or minimize the occurrence of fabric staining, it is preferablethat the fabric be treated at a level of less than about 5 mg ofcyclodextrin per gram of fabric, more preferably less than about 2 mg ofcyclodextrin per gram of fabric. The presence of the surfactant canimprove appearance by minimizing localized spotting.

When it is desired to incorporate cyclodextrin into a concentratedproduct, the cyclodextrin level is typically from about 3% to about 20%,more preferably from about 5% to about 10%, by weight of theconcentrated composition, it is preferable to dilute the concentratedcomposition before treating fabrics in order to avoid staining. Theresulting diluted compostion have usage concentrations of cyclodextrinas discussed hereinbefore, e.g., of from about 0.1% to about 5%, byweight of the diluted composition.

Cyclodextrin-Compatible Surfactant

When the optional cyclodextrin is present, the surfactant for use inproviding the required low surface tension in the composition of thepresent invention should be cyclodextrin-compatible, that is it shouldnot substantially form a complex with the cyclodextrin so as to diminishperformance of the cyclodextrin and/or the surfactant when cyclodextrinis present. Complex formation diminishes both the ability of thecyclodextrin to absorb odors and the ability of the surfactant to lowerthe surface tension of the aqueous composition.

Suitable cyclodextrin-compatible surfactants can be readily identifiedby the absence of effect of cyclodextrin on the surface tension providedby the surfactant. This is achieved by determining the surface tension(in dyne/cm²) of aqueous solutions of the surfactant in the presence andin the absence of about 1% of a specific cyclodextrin in the solutions.The aqueous solutions contain surfactant at concentrations ofapproximately 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.01%, and 0.005%. The cyclodextrin can affectthe surface activity of a surfactant by elevating the surface tension ofthe surfactant solution. If the surface tension at a given concentrationin water differs by more than about 10% from the surface tension of thesame surfactant in the 1% solution of the cyclodextrin, that is anindication of a strong interaction between the surfactant and thecyclodextrin. The preferred surfactants herein should have a surfacetension in an aqueous solution that is different (lower) by less thanabout 10%, preferably less than about 5%, and more preferably less thanabout 1% from that of the same concentration solution containing 1%cyclodextrin.

Nonlimiting examples of cyclodextrin-compatible nonionic surfactantsinclude block copolymers of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide. Suitableblock polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene polymeric surfactants, that arecompatible with most cyclodextrins, include those based on ethyleneglycol, propylene glycol, glycerol, trimethylolpropane andethylenediamine as the initial reactive hydrogen compound. Polymericcompounds made from a sequential ethoxylation and propoxylation ofinitial compounds with a single reactive hydrogen atom, such as C₁₂₋₁₈aliphatic alcohols, are not generally compatible with the cyclodextrin.Certain of the block polymer surfactant compounds designated Pluronic®and Tetronic® by the BASF-Wyandotte Corp., Wyandotte, Mich., are readilyavailable.

Nonlimiting examples of cyclodextrin-compatible surfactants of this typeinclude:

-   -   Pluronic Surfactants with the general formula        H(EO)_(n)(PO)_(m)(EO)_(n)H,

wherein EO is an ethylene oxide group, PO is a propylene oxide group,and n and m are numbers that indicate the average number of the groupsin the surfactants. Typical examples of cyclodextrin-compatible Pluronicsurfactants are: Name Average MW Average n Average m L-101 3,800 4 59L-81 2,750 3 42 L-44 2,200 10 23 L-43 1,850 6 22 F-38 4,700 43 16 P-844,200 19 43,  and mixtures thereof.Tetronic Surfactants with the general formula:[H(EO)_(n)(PO)_(m)]₂NCH₂CH₂N[(PO)_(m)(EO)_(n)H]₂

wherein EO, PO, n, and m have the same meanings as above. Typicalexamples of cyclodextrin-compatible Tetronic surfactants are: NameAverage MW Average n Average m 901 4,700 3 18 908 25,000 114 22,  andmixtures thereof.

“Reverse” Pluronic and Tetronic surfactants have the following generalformulas:

Reverse Pluronic SurfactantsH(PO)_(m)(EO)_(n)(PO)_(m)HReverse Tetronic Surfactants[H(PO)_(n)(EO)_(m)]₂NCH₂CH₂N[(EO)_(m)(PO)_(n)H]₂

wherein EO, PO, n, and m have the same meanings as above. Typicalexamples of cyclodextrin-compatible Reverse Pluronic and ReverseTetronic surfactants are: Name Average MW Average n Average m ReversePluronic surfactants: 10 R5 1,950 8 22 25 R1 2,700 21 6 Reverse Tetronicsurfactants 130 R2 7,740 9 26 70 R2 3,870 4 13 and mixtures thereof.

Silicone Polyethers

Silicone polyethers can also act as a preferred class of cyclodextrinsurfactants when these have a dimethyl polysiloxane hydrophobic moietyand one or more hydrophilic polyalkylene side chains, and having. Thegeneral formula of this class of surfactants is disclosed above underthe section on optional silicones.

Cyclodextrin Compatible Anionic Surfactants

Nonlimiting examples of cyclodextrin-compatible anionic surfactants arethe alkyldiphenyl oxide disulfonate, having the general formula:

wherein R is an alkyl group. Examples of this type of surfactants areavailable from the Dow Chemical Company under the trade name Dowfax®wherein R is a linear or branched C₆-C₁₆ alkyl group. An example ofthese cyclodextrin-compatible anionic surfactant is Dowfax 3B2 with Rbeing approximately a linear C₁₀ group. These anionic surfactants arepreferably not used when the antimicrobial active or preservative, etc.,is cationic to minimize the interaction with the cationic actives, sincethe effect of both surfactant and active are diminished.

The surfactants above are either weakly interactive with cyclodextrin(less than 5% elevation in surface tension, or non-interactive (lessthan 1% elevation in surface tension). Normal surfactants like sodiumdodecyl sulfate and dodecanolpoly(6)ethoxylate are strongly interactive,with more than a 10% elevation in surface tension in the presence of atypical cyclodextrin like hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin and methylatedbeta-cyclodextrin.

Typical levels of cyclodextrin-compatible surfactants in usagecompositions are from about 0.01% to about 2%, preferably from about0.03% to about 0.6%, more preferably from about 0.05% to about 0.3%, byweight of the composition. Typical levels of cyclodextrin-compatiblesurfactants in concentrated compositions are from about 0.1% to about8%, preferably from about 0.2% to about 4%, more preferably from about0.3% to about 3%, by weight of the concentrated composition.

2. Low Molecular Weight Polyols

Low molecular weight polyols with relatively high boiling points, ascompared to water, such as ethylene glycol, propylene glycol and/orglycerol are preferred optional ingredients for improving odor controlperformance of the composition of the present invention, especially whencyclodextrin is present. The incorporation of a small amount of lowmolecular weight glycols into the composition of the present inventiontypically enhances the formation of the cyclodextrin inclusion complexesas the fabric dries.

The polyols' ability to remain on the fabric for a longer period of timethan water, as the fabric dries, typically allows it to form ternarycomplexes with the cyclodextrin and some malodorous molecules. Theaddition of the glycols tends to fill up void space in the cyclodextrincavity that is unable to be filled by some malodor molecules ofrelatively smaller sizes. Preferably the glycol used is glycerin,ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, diethylene glycol, dipropylene glycolor mixtures thereof, and more preferably ethylene glycol and/orpropylene glycol. Cyclodextrins prepared by processes that result in alevel of such polyols are highly desirable, since they can be usedwithout removal of the polyols.

Some polyols, e.g., dipropylene glycol, are also useful to facilitatethe solubilization of some perfume ingredients in the composition of thepresent invention.

Typically, glycol is added to the composition of the present inventionat a level of from about 0.01% to about 3%, by weight of thecomposition, preferably from about 0.05% to about 1%, more preferablyfrom about 0.1% to about 0.5%, by weight of the composition. Thepreferred weight ratio of low molecular weight polyol to cyclodextrin isfrom about 2:1,000 to about 20:100, more preferably from about 3:1,000to about 15:100, even more preferably from about 5:1,000 to about10:100, and most preferably from about 1:100 to about 7:100.

3. Metal Salts

Optionally, but highly preferred, the present invention can includemetallic salts for added odor absorption and/or antimicrobial benefitfor the cyclodextrin solution when cyclodextrin is present. The metallicsalts are selected from the group consisting of copper salts, zincsalts, and mixtures thereof.

Copper salts have some antimicrobial benefits. Specifically, cupricabietate acts as a fungicide, copper acetate acts as a mildew inhibitor,cupric chloride acts as a fungicide, copper lactate acts as a fungicide,and copper sulfate acts as a germicide. Copper salts also possess somemalodor control abilities. See U.S. Pat. No. 3,172,817, Leupold, et al.,which discloses deodorizing compositions for treating disposablearticles, comprising at least slightly water-soluble salts ofacylacetone, including copper salts and zinc salts, all of said patentsare incorporated herein by reference.

The preferred zinc salts possess malodor control abilities. Zinc hasbeen used most often for its ability to ameliorate malodor, e.g., inmouth wash products, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,325,939, issuedApr. 20, 1982 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,674, issued Sep. 4, 1983, to N. B.Shah, et al., all of which are incorporated herein by reference.Highly-ionized and soluble zinc salts such as zinc chloride, provide thebest source of zinc ions. Zinc borate functions as a fungistat and amildew inhibitor, zinc caprylate functions as a fungicide, zinc chlorideprovides antiseptic and deodorant benefits, zinc ricinoleate functionsas a fungicide, zinc sulfate heptahydrate functions as a fungicide andzinc undecylenate functions as a fungistat.

Preferably the metallic salts are water-soluble zinc salts, copper saltsor mixtures thereof, and more preferably zinc salts, especially ZnCl₂.These salts are preferably present in the present invention primarily toabsorb amine and sulfur-containing compounds that have molecular sizestoo small to be effectively complexed with the cyclodextrin molecules.Low molecular weight sulfur-containing materials, e.g., sulfide andmercaptans, are components of many types of malodors, e.g., food odors(garlic, onion), body/perspiration odor, breath odor, etc. Low molecularweight amines are also components of many malodors, e.g., food odors,body odors, urine, etc.

When metallic salts are added to the composition of the presentinvention they are typically present at a level of from about 0.1% toabout 10%, preferably from about 0.2% to about 8%, more preferably fromabout 0.3% to about 5% by weight of the usage composition.

4. Soluble Carbonate and/or Bicarbonate Salts

Water-soluble alkali metal carbonate and/or bicarbonate salts, such assodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, potassium carbonate, cesiumcarbonate, sodium carbonate, and mixtures thereof can be added to thecomposition of the present invention in order to help to control certainacid-type odors. Preferred salts are sodium carbonate monohydrate,potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, andmixtures thereof. When these salts are added to the composition of thepresent invention, they are typically present at a level of from about0.1% to about 5%, preferably from about 0.2% to about 3%, morepreferably from about 0.3% to about 2%, by weight of the composition.When these salts are added to the composition of the present inventionit is preferably that incompatible metal salts not be present in theinvention. Preferably, when these salts are used the composition shouldbe essentially free of zinc and other incompatible metal ions, e.g., Ca,Fe, Ba, etc. which form water-insoluble salts

5. Enzymes

Enzymes can be used to control certain types of malodor, especiallymalodor from urine and other types of excretions, including regurgitatedmaterials. Proteases are especially desirable. The activity ofcommercial enzymes depends very much on the type and purity of theenzyme being considered. Enzymes that are water soluble proteases likepepsin, tripsin, ficin, bromelin, papain, rennin, and mixtures thereofare particularly useful.

Enzymes are normally incorporated at levels sufficient to provide up toabout 5 mg by weight, preferably from about 0.001 mg to about 3 mg, morepreferably from about 0.002 mg to about 1 mg, of active enzyme per gramof the aqueous compositions. Stated otherwise, the aqueous compositionsherein can comprise from about 0.0001% to about 0.5%, preferably fromabout 0.001% to about 0.3%, more preferably from about 0.005% to about0.2% by weight of a commercial enzyme preparation. Protease enzymes areusually present in such commercial preparations at levels sufficient toprovide from 0.0005 to 0.1 Anson units (AU) of activity per gram ofaqueous composition.

Nonlimiting examples of suitable, commercially available, water solubleproteases are pepsin, tripsin, ficin, bromelin, papain, rennin, andmixtures thereof. Papain can be isolated, e.g., from papaya latex, andis available commercially in the purified form of up to, e.g., about 80%protein, or cruder, technical grade of much lower activity. Othersuitable examples of proteases are the subtilisins which are obtainedfrom particular strains of B. subtilis and B. licheniforms. Anothersuitable protease is obtained from a strain of Bacillus, having maximumactivity throughout the pH range of 8-12, developed and sold by NovoIndustries A/S under the registered trade name ESPERASE®. Thepreparation of this enzyme and analogous enzymes is described in BritishPatent Specification No. 1,243,784 of Novo. Proteolytic enzymes suitablefor removing protein-based stains that are commercially availableinclude those sold under the trade names ALCALASE® and SAVINASE® by NovoIndustries A/S (Denmark) and MAXATASE® by International Bio-Synthetics,Inc. (The Netherlands). Other proteases include Protease A (see EuropeanPatent Application 130,756, published Jan. 9, 1985); Protease B (seeEuropean Patent Application Serial No. 87303761.8, filed Apr. 28, 1987,and European Patent Application 130,756, Bott et al, published Jan. 9,1985); and proteases made by Genencor International, Inc., according toone or more of the following patents: Caldwell et al, U.S. Pat. Nos.5,185,258, 5,204,015 and 5,244,791.

A wide range of enzyme materials and means for their incorporation intoliquid compositions are also disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,553,139,issued Jan. 5, 1971 to McCarty et al. Enzymes are further disclosed inU.S. Pat. No. 4,101,457, Place et al, issued Jul. 18, 1978, and in U.S.Pat. No. 4,507,219, Hughes, issued Mar. 26, 1985. Other enzyme materialsuseful for liquid formulations, and their incorporation into suchformulations, are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,261,868, Hora et al,issued Apr. 14, 1981. Enzymes can be stabilized by various techniques,e.g., those disclosed and exemplified in U.S. Pat. No. 3,600,319, issuedAug. 17, 1971 to Gedge, et al., European Patent Application PublicationNo. 0 199 405, Application No. 86200586.5, published Oct. 29, 1986,Venegas, and in U.S. Pat. No. 3,519,570. All of the above patents andapplications are incorporated herein, at least in pertinent part.

Enzyme-polyethylene glycol conjugates are also preferred. Suchpolyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of enzymes, wherein the PEG oralkoxy-PEG moieties are coupled to the protein molecule through, e.g.,secondary amine linkages. Suitable derivatization decreasesimmunogenicity, thus minimizes allergic reactions, while stillmaintaining some enzymatic activity. An example of protease-PEG's isPEG-subtilisin Carlsberg from B. lichenniformis coupled to methoxy-PEGsthrough secondary amine linkage, and is available from Sigma-AldrichCorp., St. Louis, Mo.

6. Zeolites

When the clarity of the solution is not needed, and the solution is notsprayed on fabrics, other optional odor absorbing materials, e.g.,zeolites and/or activated carbon, can also be used. A preferred class ofzeolites is characterized as “intermediate” silicate/aluminate zeolites.The intermediate zeolites are characterized by SiO₂/AlO₂ molar ratios ofless than about 10. Preferably the molar ratio of SiO₂/AlO₂ ranges fromabout 2 to about 10. The intermediate zeolites have an advantage overthe “high” zeolites. The intermediate zeolites have a higher affinityfor amine-type odors, they are more weight efficient for odor absorptionbecause they have a larger surface area, and they are more moisturetolerant and retain more of their odor absorbing capacity in water thanthe high zeolites. A wide variety of intermediate zeolites suitable foruse herein are commercially available as Valfor® CP301-68, Valfor®300-63, Valfor® CP300-35, and Valfor® CP300-56, available from PQCorporation, and the CBV100® series of zeolites from Conteka.

Zeolite materials marketed under the trade name Abscents® andSmellrite®, available from The Union Carbide Corporation and UOP arealso preferred. These materials are typically available as a whitepowder in the 3-5 micron particle size range. Such materials arepreferred over the intermediate zeolites for control ofsulfur-containing odors, e.g., thiols, mercaptans.

7. Activated Carbon

The carbon material suitable for use in the present invention is thematerial well known in commercial practice as an absorbent for organicmolecules and/or for air purification purposes. Often, such carbonmaterial is referred to as “activated” carbon or “activated” charcoal.Such carbon is available from commercial sources under such trade namesas; Calgon-Type CPG®; Type PCB®; Type SGL®; Type CAL®; and Type OL®.Activated carbon fibers and cloth may also be used in combination withthe compositions and/or articles of manufacture disclosed herein toprovide malodor removal and/or freshness benefits. Such activated carbonfibers and fabrics can be acquired from Calgon.

8. Mixtures Thereof

Mixtures of the optional odor control agents described above aredesirable, especially when the mixture provides control over a broaderrange of odors.

F. Perfume

The wrinkle control composition of the present invention can alsooptionally provide a “scent signal” in the form of a pleasant odor whichprovides a freshness impression to the treated fabrics. The scent signalcan be designed to provide a fleeting perfume scent. When perfume isadded as a scent signal, it is added only at very low levels, e.g., fromabout 0% to about 0.5%, preferably from about 0.003% to about 0.3%, morepreferably from about 0.005% to about 0.2%, by weight of the usagecomposition.

Perfume can also be added as a more intense odor in product and onfabrics. When stronger levels of perfume are preferred, relativelyhigher levels of perfume can be added.

Any type of perfume can be incorporated into the composition of thepresent invention. The preferred perfume ingredients are those suitablefor use to apply on fabrics and garments. Typical examples of suchpreferred ingredients are given in U.S. Pat. No. 5,445,747, issued Aug.29, 1995 to Kvietok et al., incorporated herein by reference.

When long lasting fragrance odor on fabrics is desired, it is preferredto use at least an effective amount of perfume ingredients which have aboiling point of about 300° C. or higher. Nonlimiting examples of suchpreferred ingredients are given in U.S. Pat. No. 5,500,138, issued Mar.19, 1996 to Bacon et al., incorporated herein by reference. It is alsopreferred to use materials that can slowly release perfume ingredientsafter the fabric is treated by the wrinkle control composition of thisinvention. Examples of materials of this type are given in U.S. Pat. No.5,531,910, Severns et al., issued Jul. 2, 1996, said patent beingincorporated herein by reference.

When cyclodextrin is present, it is essential that the perfume be addedat a level wherein even if all of the perfume in the composition were tocomplex with the cyclodextrin molecules when cyclodextrin is present,there will still be an effective level of uncomplexed cyclodextrinmolecules present in the solution to provide adequate odor control. Inorder to reserve an effective amount of cyclodextrin molecules for odorcontrol when cyclodextrin is present, perfume is typically present at alevel wherein less than about 90% of the cyclodextrin complexes with theperfume, preferably less than about 50% of the cyclodextrin complexeswith the perfume, more preferably, less than about 30% of thecyclodextrin complexes with the perfume, and most preferably, less thanabout 10% of the cyclodextrin complexes with the perfume. Thecyclodextrin to perfume weight ratio should be greater than about 5:1preferably greater than about 8:1, more preferably greater than about10:1, even more preferably greater than about 20:1, still morepreferably greater than 40:1 and most preferably greater than about70:1.

Preferably the perfume is hydrophilic and is composed predominantly ofingredients selected from two groups of ingredients, namely, (a)hydrophilic ingredients having a ClogP of less than about 3.5, morepreferably less than about 3.0, and (b) ingredients having significantlow detection threshold, and mixtures thereof. Typically, at least about50%, preferably at least about 60%, more preferably at least about 70%,and most preferably at least about 80% by weight of the perfume iscomposed of perfume ingredients of the above groups (a) and (b). Forthese preferred perfumes, the cyclodextrin to perfume weight ratio istypically of from about 2:1 to about 200:1; preferably from about 4:1 toabout 100:1, more preferably from about 6:1 to about 50:1, and even morepreferably from about 8:1 to about 30:1.

1. Hydrophilic Perfume Ingredients

The hydrophilic perfume ingredients are more soluble in water, have lessof a tendency to complex with the cyclodextrins, and are more availablein the odor absorbing composition than the ingredients of conventionalperfumes. The degree of hydrophobicity of a perfume ingredient can becorrelated with its octanol/water partition coefficient P. Theoctanol/water partition coefficient of a perfume ingredient is the ratiobetween its equilibrium concentration in octanol and in water. A perfumeingredient with a greater partition coefficient P is considered to bemore hydrophobic. Conversely, a perfume ingredient with a smallerpartition coefficient P is considered to be more hydrophilic. Since thepartition coefficients of the perfume ingredients normally have highvalues, they are more conveniently given in the form of their logarithmto the base 10, logP. Thus the preferred perfume hydrophilic perfumeingredients of this invention have logP of about 3.5 or smaller,preferably of about 3.0 or smaller.

The logP of many perfume ingredients have been reported; for example,the Pomona92 database, available from Daylight Chemical InformationSystems, Inc. (Daylight CIS), Irvine, Calif., contains many, along withcitations to the original literature. However, the logP values are mostconveniently calculated by the “CLOGP” program, also available fromDaylight CIS. This program also lists experimental logP values when theyare available in the Pomona92 database. The “calculated logP” (ClogP) isdetermined by the fragment approach of Hansch and Leo (cf., A. Leo, inComprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C. Hansch, P. G. Sammens, J.B. Taylor and C. A. Ramsden, Eds., p. 295, Pergamon Press, 1990,incorporated herein by reference). The fragment approach is based on thechemical structure of each perfume ingredient, and takes into accountthe numbers and types of atoms, the atom connectivity, and chemicalbonding. The ClogP values, which are the most reliable and widely usedestimates for this physicochemical property, are used instead of theexperimental logP values in the selection of perfume ingredients whichare useful in the present invention.

Non-limiting examples of the more preferred hydrophilic perfumeingredients are allyl amyl glycolate, allyl caproate, amyl acetate, amylpropionate, anisic aldehyde, anisyl acetate, anisole, benzaldehyde,benzyl acetate, benzyl acetone, benzyl alcohol, benzyl formate, benzyliso valerate, benzyl propionate, beta gamma hexenol, calone, camphorgum, laevo-carveol, d-carvone, laevo-carvone, cinnamic alcohol, cinnamylacetate, cinnamic alcohol, cinnamyl formate, cinnamyl propionate,cis-jasmone, cis-3-hexenyl acetate, coumarin, cuminic alcohol, cuminicaldehyde, Cyclal C, cyclogalbanate, dihydroeuginol, dihydroisojasmonate, dimethyl benzyl carbinol, dimethyl benzyl carbinylacetate, ethyl acetate, ethyl aceto acetate, ethyl amyl ketone, ethylanthranilate, ethyl benzoate, ethyl butyrate, ethyl cinnamate, ethylhexyl ketone, ethyl maltol, ethyl-2-methyl butyrate, ethyl methylphenylglycidate, ethyl phenyl acetate, ethyl salicylate, ethyl vanillin,eucalyptol, eugenol, eugenyl acetate, eugenyl formate, eugenyl methylether, fenchyl alcohol, flor acetate (tricyclo decenyl acetate),fructone, frutene (tricyclo decenyl propionate), geraniol, geranyloxyacetaldehyde, heliotropin, hexenol, hexenyl acetate, hexyl acetate,hexyl formate, hinokitiol, hydrotropic alcohol, hydroxycitronellal,hydroxycitronellal diethyl acetal, hydroxycitronellol, indole, isoamylalcohol, iso cyclo citral, isoeugenol, isoeugenyl acetate, isomenthone,isopulegyl acetate, isoquinoline, keone, ligustral, linalool, linalooloxide, linalyl formate, lyral, menthone, methyl acetophenone, methylamyl ketone, methyl anthranilate, methyl benzoate, methyl benzylacetate, methyl cinnamate, methyl dihydrojasmonate, methyl eugenol,methyl heptenone, methyl heptine carbonate, methyl heptyl ketone, methylhexyl ketone, methyl isobutenyl tetrahydropyran, methyl-N-methylanthranilate, methyl beta naphthyl ketone, methyl phenyl carbinylacetate, methyl salicylate, nerol, nonalactone, octalactone, octylalcohol (octanol-2), para-anisic aldehyde, para-cresol, para-cresylmethyl ether, para hydroxy phenyl butanone, para-methoxy acetophenone,para-methyl acetophenone, phenoxy ethanol, phenoxyethyl propionate,phenyl acetaldehyde, phenylacetaldehyde diethyl ether, phenylethyloxyacetaldehyde, phenyl ethyl acetate, phenyl ethyl alcohol, phenylethyl dimethyl carbinol, prenyl acetate, propyl butyrate, pulegone, roseoxide, safrole, terpineol, vanillin, viridine, and mixtures thereof.

Nonlimiting examples of other preferred hydrophilic perfume ingredientswhich can be used in perfume compositions of this invention are allylheptoate, amyl benzoate, anethole, benzophenone, carvacrol, citral,citronellol, citronellyl nitrile, cyclohexyl ethyl acetate, cymal,4-decenal, dihydro isojasmonate, dihydro myrcenol, ethyl methyl phenylglycidate, fenchyl acetate, florhydral, gamma-nonalactone, geranylformate, geranyl nitrile, hexenyl isobutyrate, alpha-ionone, isobornylacetate, isobutyl benzoate, isononyl alcohol, isomenthol, para-isopropylphenylacetaldehyde, isopulegol, linalyl acetate, 2-methoxy naphthalene,menthyl acetate, methyl chavicol, musk ketone, beta naphthol methylether, neral, nonyl aldehyde, phenyl heptanol, phenyl hexanol, terpinylacetate, Veratrol, yara-yara, and mixtures thereof.

The preferred perfume compositions used in the present invention containat least 4 different hydrophilic perfume ingredients, preferably atleast 5 different hydrophilic perfume ingredients, more preferably atleast 6 different hydrophilic perfume ingredients, and even morepreferably at least 7 different hydrophilic perfume ingredients. Mostcommon perfume ingredients which are derived from natural sources arecomposed of a multitude of components. When each such material is usedin the formulation of the preferred perfume compositions of the presentinvention, it is counted as one single ingredient, for the purpose ofdefining the invention.

2. Low Odor Detection Threshold Perfume

The odor detection threshold of an odorous material is the lowest vaporconcentration of that material which can be olfactorily detected. Theodor detection threshold and some odor detection threshold values arediscussed in, e.g., “Standardized Human Olfactory Thresholds”, M. Devoset al, IRL Press at Oxford University Press, 1990, and “Compilation ofOdor and Taste Threshold Values Data”, F. A. Fazzalari, editor, ASTMData Series DS 48A, American Society for Testing and Materials, 1978,both of said publications being incorporated by reference. The use ofsmall amounts of perfume ingredients that have low odor detectionthreshold values can improve perfume odor character, even though theyare not as hydrophilic as perfume ingredients of group (a) which aregiven hereinabove. Perfume ingredients that do not belong to group (a)above, but have a significantly low detection threshold, useful in thecomposition of the present invention, are selected from the groupconsisting of ambrox, bacdanol, benzyl salicylate, butyl anthranilate,cetalox, damascenone, alpha-damascone, gamma-dodecalactone, ebanol,herbavert, cis-3-hexenyl salicylate, alpha-ionone, beta-ionone,alpha-isomethylionone, lilial, methyl nonyl ketone, gamma-undecalactone,undecylenic aldehyde, and mixtures thereof. These materials arepreferably present at low levels in addition to the hydrophilicingredients of group (a), typically less than about 20%, preferably lessthan about 15%, more preferably less than about 10%, by weight of thetotal perfume compositions of the present invention. However, only lowlevels are required to provide an effect.

There are also hydrophilic ingredients of group (a) that have asignificantly low detection threshold, and are especially useful in thecomposition of the present invention. Examples of these ingredients areallyl amyl glycolate, anethole, benzyl acetone, calone, cinnamicalcohol, coumarin, cyclogalbanate, Cyclal C, cymal, 4-decenal, dihydroisojasmonate, ethyl anthranilate, ethyl-2-methyl butyrate, ethylmethylphenyl glycidate, ethyl vanillin, eugenol, flor acetate,florhydral, fructone, frutene, heliotropin, keone, indole, iso cyclocitral, isoeugenol, lyral, methyl heptine carbonate, linalool, methylanthranilate, methyl dihydrojasmonate, methyl isobutenyltetrahydropyran, methyl beta naphthyl ketone, beta naphthol methylether, nerol, para-anisic aldehyde, para hydroxy phenyl butanone, phenylacetaldehyde, vanillin, and mixtures thereof. Use of low odor detectionthreshold perfume ingredients minimizes the level of organic materialthat is released into the atmosphere.

G. Antimicrobial Active

Optionally, but preferably, solubilized, water-soluble, antimicrobialpreservative can be added to the composition of the present inventionbecause these aqueous products may be prime breeding grounds for certainmicroorganisms, especially when in aqueous compositions. This drawbackcan lead to the problem of storage stability of these solutions for anysignificant length of time. Contamination by certain microorganisms withsubsequent microbial growth can result in an unsightly and/or malodoroussolution. Because microbial growth in aqueous solutions is highlyobjectionable when it occurs, it is highly preferable to include asolubilized, water-soluble, antimicrobial preservative, which iseffective for inhibiting and/or regulating microbial growth in order toincrease storage stability of the preferably clear, aqueous consumerproducts such as the subject product of this patent.

Typical microorganisms that can be found in raw materials for theseproducts and whose growth can be found in the resulting aqueoussolutions include bacteria, both Gram (−) and (+). Gram (−) contaminantsmay include species such as Escherichia coli and Pseudomonas aeruginosawhich may be found in some water sources, and can be introduced duringthe preparation of these solutions. Other Pseudomonas species, such asP. cepacia, are typical microbial contaminants in surfactantmanufacturing facilities and may readily contaminate packed finishedproducts. Typical other Gram (−) bacterial contaminants may includeBurkholderia, Enterobacter and Gluconobacter species. Gram (+) speciesmay include Bacillus species e.g. B. cereus and B. sphaericus; and mayalso include other Gram (+) such as Staphylococcus species, e.g. S.aureus.

Fungal contaminants may include Aspergillus species. Therefore, it ispreferable to use a broad spectrum preservative, e.g., one that iseffective on both bacteria (both gram positive and gram negative) andfungi. A limited spectrum preservative, e.g., one that is only effectiveon a single group of microorganisms, e.g., fungi, can be used incombination with a broad spectrum preservative or other limited spectrumpreservatives with complimentary and/or supplementary activity. Amixture of broad spectrum preservatives can also be used. In some caseswhere a specific group of microbial contaminants is problematic (such asGram negatives), aminocarboxylate chelators, such as those describedhereinbefore, can be used alone or as potentiators in conjunction withother preservatives. These chelators which include, e.g.,ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), hydroxyethylenediaminetriaceticacid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA), and otheraminocarboxylate chelators, and mixtures thereof, and their saltsincluding phosphonates, and mixtures thereof, can increase preservativeeffectiveness against Gram-negative bacteria, especially Pseudomonasspecies.

Antimicrobial preservatives useful in the present invention includebiocidal compounds, i.e., substances that kill microorganisms, orbiostatic compounds, i.e., substances that inhibit and/or regulate thegrowth of microorganisms. Preferred antimicrobial preservatives arethose that are water-soluble and are effective at low levels.Water-soluble preservatives useful in the present invention are thosethat have a solubility in water of at least about 0.3 g per 100 ml ofwater, i.e., greater than about 0.3% at room temperature, preferablygreater than about 0.5% at room temperature.

The water-soluble antimicrobial preservative in the present invention isincluded at an effective amount. The term “effective amount” as hereindefined means a level sufficient to prevent spoilage, or prevent growthof inadvertently added microorganisms in the packaged product, for aspecific period of time. In other words, the preservative is not beingused to kill microorganisms on the surface onto which the composition isdeposited. Instead, it is preferably being used to prevent spoilage ofthe product solution in order to increase the shelf-life of thecomposition. Preferred levels of preservative are from about 0.0001% toabout 0.5%, more preferably from about 0.0002% to about 0.2%, mostpreferably from about 0.0003% to about 0.1%, by weight of the usagecomposition.

The preservative can be any organic preservative material which will notcause damage to fabric appearance, e.g., discoloration, coloration,bleaching. Preferred water-soluble preservatives include organic sulfurcompounds, halogenated compounds, cyclic organic nitrogen compounds, lowmolecular weight aldehydes, quaternary ammonium compounds, dehydroaceticacid, phenyl and phenolic compounds, alcoholic solvents and mixturesthereof.

The following are non-limiting examples of preferred water-solublepreservatives for use in the present invention. A more complete list isfound in U.S. Pat. No. 5,714,137, incorporated hereinbefore byreference.

1. Organic Sulfur Compounds

Preferred water-soluble preservatives for use in the present inventionare organic sulfur compounds. Some non-limiting examples of organicsulfur compounds suitable for use in the present invention are:

a) 3-Isothiazolone Compounds

A preferred preservative is an antimicrobial, organic preservativecontaining 3-isothiazolone groups.

This class of compounds is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,265,899, Lewiset al., issued May 5, 1981, and incorporated herein by reference. Apreferred preservative is a water-soluble mixture of5-chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one, more preferably a mixture of about 77%5-chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and about 23%2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one, a broad spectrum preservative availableas a 1.5% aqueous solution under the trade name Kathon® CG by Rohm andHaas Company.

When Kathon® is used as the preservative in the present invention it ispresent at a level of from about 0.0001% to about 0.01%, preferably fromabout 0.0002% to about 0.005%, more preferably from about 0.0003% toabout 0.003%, most preferably from about 0.0004% to about 0.002%, byweight of the composition.

Other isothiazolins include 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one, available underthe trade name Proxel® products; and2-methyl-4,5-trimethylene-4-isothiazolin-3-one, available under thetrade name Promexal®. Both Proxel and Promexal are available fromZeneca. They have stability over a wide pH range (i.e., 4-12). Neithercontain active halogen and are not formaldehyde releasing preservatives.Both Proxel and Promexal are effective against typical Gram negative andpositive bacteria, fungi and yeasts when used at a level from about0.001% to about 0.5%, preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.05%, andmost preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.02% by weight of the usagecomposition.

b) Sodium Pyrithione

Another preferred organic sulfur preservative is sodium pyrithione, withwater solubility of about 50%. When sodium pyrithione is used as thepreservative in the present invention it is typically present at a levelof from about 0.0001% to about 0.01%, preferably from about 0.0002% toabout 0.005%, more preferably from about 0.0003% to about 0.003%, byweight of the usage composition.

Mixtures of the preferred organic sulfur compounds can also be used asthe preservative in the present invention.

2. Halogenated Compounds

Preferred preservatives for use in the present invention are halogenatedcompounds. Some non-limiting examples of halogenated compounds suitablefor use in the present invention are:

-   -   5-bromo-5-nitro-1,3-dioxane, available under the trade name        Bronidox L® from Henkel. Bronidox L® has a solubility of about        0.46% in water. When Bronidox is used as the preservative in the        present invention it is typically present at a level of from        about 0.0005% to about 0.02%, preferably from about 0.001% to        about 0.01%, by weight of the usage composition;    -   2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol, available under the trade name        Bronopol from Inolex can be used as the preservative in the        present invention. Bronopol has a solubility of about 25% in        water. When Bronopol is used as the preservative in the present        invention it is typically present at a level of from about        0.002% to about 0.1%, preferably from about 0.005% to about        0.05%, by weight of the usage composition;    -   1,1′-hexamethylene bis(5-(p-chlorophenyl)biguanide), commonly        known as chlorhexidine, and its salts, e.g., with acetic and        gluconic acids can be used as a preservative in the present        invention. The digluconate salt is highly water-soluble, about        70% in water, and the diacetate salt has a solubility of about        1.8% in water. When chlorhexidine is used as the preservative in        the present invention it is typically present at a level of from        about 0.0001% to about 0.04%, preferably from about 0.0005% to        about 0.01%, by weight of the usage composition.    -   1,1,1-Trichloro-2-methylpropan-2-ol, commonly known as        chlorobutanol, with water solubility of about 0.8%; a typical        effective level of chlorobutanol is from about 0.1% to about        0.5%, by weight of the usage composition.    -   4,4′-(Trimethylenedioxy)bis-(3-bromobenzamidine) diisethionate,        or dibromopropamidine, with water solubility of about 50%; when        dibromopropamidine is used as the preservative in the present        invention it is typically present at a level of from about        0.0001% to about 0.05%, preferably from about 0.0005% to about        0.01% by weight of the usage composition.

Mixtures of the preferred halogenated compounds can also be used as thepreservative in the present invention.

3. Cyclic Organic Nitrogen Compounds

Preferred water-soluble preservatives for use in the present inventionare cyclic organic nitrogen compounds. Some non-limiting examples ofcyclic organic nitrogen compounds suitable for use in the presentinvention are:

a) Imidazolidinedione Compounds

Preferred preservatives for use in the present invention areimidazolidione compounds. Some non-limiting examples ofimidazolidinedione compounds suitable for use in the present inventionare:

-   -   1,3-bis(hydroxymethyl)-5,5-dimethyl-2,4-imidazolidinedione,        commonly known as dimethyloldimethylhydantoin, or DMDM        hydantoin, available as, e.g., Glydant® from Lonza. DMDM        hydantoin has a water solubility of more than 50% in water, and        is mainly effective on bacteria. When DMDM hydantoin is used, it        is preferable that it be used in combination with a broad        spectrum preservative such as Kathon CG®, or formaldehyde. A        preferred mixture is about a 95:5 DMDM hydantoin to        3-butyl-2-iodopropynylcarbamate mixture, available under the        trade name Glydant Plus® from Lonza. When Glydant Plus® is used        as the preservative in the present invention, it is typically        present at a level of from about 0.005% to about 0.2% by weight        of the usage composition;    -   N-[1,3-bis(hydroxymethyl)-2,5-dioxo-4-imidazolidinyl]-N,N′-bis(hydroxymethyl)urea,        commonly known as diazolidinyl urea, available under the trade        name Germall II® from Sutton Laboratories, Inc. (Sutton) can be        used as the preservative in the present invention. When Germall        II® is used as the preservative in the present invention, it is        typically present at a level of from about 0.01% to about 0.1%        by weight of the usage composition;    -   N,N″-methylenebis        {N′-[1-(hydroxymethyl)-2,5-dioxo-4-imidazolidinyl]urea},        commonly known as imidazolidinyl urea, available, e.g., under        the trade name Abiol® from 3V-Sigma, Unicide U-13® from        Induchem, Germall 115® from (Sutton) can be used as the        preservative in the present invention. When imidazolidinyl urea        is used as the preservative, it is typically present at a level        of from about 0.05% to about 0.2%, by weight of the usage        composition.

Mixtures of the preferred imidazolidinedione compounds can also be usedas the preservative in the present invention.

b) Polymethoxy Bicyclic Oxazolidine

Another preferred water-soluble cyclic organic nitrogen preservative ispolymethoxy bicyclic oxazolidine, available under the trade nameNuosept® C from Hüls America. When Nuosept® C is used as thepreservative, it is typically present at a level of from about 0.005% toabout 0.1%, by weight of the usage composition.

Mixtures of the preferred cyclic organic nitrogen compounds can also beused as the preservative in the present invention.

4. Low Molecular Weight Aldehydes and Alcohols

a) Formaldehyde

A preferred preservative for use in the present invention isformaldehyde. Formaldehyde is a broad spectrum preservative which isnormally available as formalin which is a 37% aqueous solution offormaldehyde. When formaldehyde is used as the preservative in thepresent invention, typical levels are from about 0.003% to about 0.2%,preferably from about 0.008% to about 0.1%. more preferably from about0.01% to about 0.05%, by weight of the usage composition.

b) Glutaraldehyde

A preferred preservative for use in the present invention isglutaraldehyde. Glutaraldehyde is a water-soluble, broad spectrumpreservative commonly available as a 25% or a 50% solution in water.When glutaraldehyde is used as the preservative in the present inventionit is typically present at a level of from about 0.005% to about 0.1%,preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.05%, by weight of the usagecomposition.

c) Ethanol

A preferred potentiator or preservative enhancer in this invention maybe an alcohol, such as ethanol, an effective amount of solvent,preferably from about 1% to about 15%, more preferably from about 1% toabout 10%, most preferably from about 1% to about 5%, by weight of thecomposition to assist in the drying of the spray product during use andfor increased efficacy of the preservative system in the bottledproduct.

5. Quaternary Compounds

Preferred preservatives for use in the present invention are cationicand/or quaternary compounds. Such compounds include polyaminopropylbiguanide, also known as polyhexamethylene biguanide having the generalformula:HCl.NH₂—(CH₂)₃—[—(CH₂)₃—NH—C(═NH)—NH—C(═NH.HCl)—NH—(CH₂)₃—]_(x)—(CH₂)₃—NH—C(═NH)—NH.CN

Polyaminopropyl biguanide is a water-soluble, broad spectrumpreservative which is available as a 20% aqueous solution availableunder the trade name Cosmocil CQ® from ICI Americas, Inc., or under thetrade name Mikrokill® from Brooks, Inc.

1-(3-Chlorallyl)-3,5,7-triaza-1-azoniaadamantane chloride, available,e.g., under the trade name Dowicil 200 from Dow Chemical, is aneffective quaternary ammonium preservative; it is freely soluble inwater; however, it has the tendency to discolor (yellow), therefore itis not highly preferred.

Mixtures of the preferred quaternary ammonium compounds can also be usedas the preservative in the present invention.

When quaternary ammonium compounds are used as the preservative in thepresent invention, they are typically present at a level of from about0.005% to about 0.2%, preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.1%, byweight of the usage composition.

6. Dehydroacetic Acid

A preferred preservative for use in the present invention isdehydroacetic acid. Dehydroacetic acid is a broad spectrum preservativepreferably in the form of a sodium or a potassium salt so that it iswater-soluble. This preservative acts more as a biostatic preservativethan a biocidal preservative. When dehydroacetic acid is used as thepreservative it is typically used at a level of from about 0.005% toabout 0.2%, preferably from about 0.008% to about 0.1%, more preferablyfrom about 0.01% to about 0.05%, by weight of the usage composition.

7. Phenyl and Phenolic Compounds

Some non-limiting examples of phenyl and phenolic compounds suitable foruse in the present invention are:

-   -   4,4′-diamidino-α,ω-diphenoxypropane diisethionate, commonly        known as propamidine isethionate, with water solubility of about        16%; and 4,4′-diamidino-α,ω-diphenoxyhexane diisethionate,        commonly known as hexamidine isethionate. Typical effective        level of these salts is about 0.0002% to about 0.05% by weight        of the usage composition.

Other examples are benzyl alcohol, with a water solubility of about 4%;2-phenylethanol, with a water solubility of about 2%; and2-phenoxyethanol, with a water solubility of about 2.67%; typicaleffective level of these phenyl and phenoxy alcohol is from about 0.1%to about 0.5%, by weight of the usage composition.

8. Aminocarboxylate Chelators

Chelators, e.g., ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA),hydroxyethylene-diaminetriacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaaceticacid (DTPA also known commercially as Dequest 2060),aminotri(methylenphosphonic aicd)penta sodium salt (known commericallyas Dequest 2006), and other aminocarboxylate chelators, and mixturesthereof, and their salts and phosphonates, and mixtures thereof, canoptionally be used to increase antimicrobial and preservativeeffectiveness against Gram-negative bacteria, especially Pseudomonasspecies. Although sensitivity to EDTA/DTPA and other aminocarboxylatechelators is mainly a characteristic of Pseudomonas species, otherbacterial species highly susceptible to chelators include Achromobacter,Alcaligenes, Azotobacter, Escherichia, Salmonella, Spirillum, andVibrio. Other groups of organisms also show increased sensitivities tothese chelators, including fungi and yeasts. Furthermore,aminocarboxylate chelators can help, e.g., maintaining product clarity,protecting fragrance and perfume components, and preventing rancidityand off odors.

Although these aminocarboxylate chelators may not be potent biocides intheir own right, they function as potentiators for improving theperformance of other antimicrobials/preservatives in the compositions ofthe present invention. Aminocarboxylate chelators can potentiate theperformance of many of the cationic, anionic, and nonionicantimicrobials/preservatives, phenolic compounds, and isothiazolinones,that are used as antimicrobials/preservatives in the composition of thepresent invention. Nonlimiting examples of cationicantimicrobials/preservatives potentiated by aminocarboxylate chelatorsin solutions are chlorhexidine salts (including digluconate, diacetate,and dihydrochloride salts), and Quaternium-15, also known as Dowicil200, Dowicide Q, Preventol D1, benzalkonium chloride, cetrimonium,myristalkonium chloride, cetylpyridinium chloride, lauryl pyridiniumchloride, and the like. Nonlimiting examples of useful anionicantimicrobials/preservatives which are enhanced by aminocarboxylatechelators are sorbic acid and potassium sorbate.

Nonlimiting examples of useful nonionic antimicrobials/preservativeswhich are potentiated by aminocarboxylate chelators are DMDM hydantoin,phenethyl alcohol, monolaurin, imidazolidinyl urea, and Bronopol(2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol).

Examples of useful phenolic antimicrobials/preservatives potentiated bythese chelators are chloroxylenol, phenol, tert-butyl hydroxyanisole,salicylic acid, resorcinol, and sodium o-phenyl phenate. Nonlimitingexamples of isothiazolinone antimicrobials/preservatives which areenhanced by aminocarboxylate chelators are Kathon, Proxel and Promexal.

The optional chelators are present in the compositions of this inventionat levels of, typically, from about 0.01% to about 0.3%, more preferablyfrom about 0.02% to about 0.1%, most preferably from about 0.02% toabout 0.05% by weight of the usage compositions to provide antimicrobialefficacy in this invention.

Free, uncomplexed aminocarboxylate chelators are required to potentiatethe efficacy of the antimicrobials. Thus, when excess alkaline earth(especially calcium and magnesium) and transitional metals (iron,manganese, copper, and others) are present, free chelators are notavailable and antimicrobial potentiation is not observed. In the casewhere significant water hardness or transitional metals are available orwhere product esthetics require a specified chelator level, higherlevels may be required to allow for the availability of free,uncomplexed aminocarboxylate chelators to function asantimicrobial/preservative potentiators.

Bacteriostatic Effects of pH

Bacteriostatic effects can sometimes be obtained for aqueouscompositions by adjusting the composition pH to an acid pH, e.g., lessthan about pH 4, preferably less than about pH 3, or a basic pH, e.g.,greater than about 10, preferably greater than about 11. Low pH is asuitable approach for some aspects of the the present invention becausethe low pH may minimize the potential of bacterial contamination. HighpH 10, preferably greater than about 11, also may minimize bacterial andantimicrobial contamination, but is not preferred when optionalcyclodextrin is present since the cyclodextrin will be ionized and thiswill render it less effective to complexing some odor molecules. HighpH's can also lead to skin irritaiton. Therefore, aqueous compositionsof the present invention should have a pH of from about 3 to about 10,preferably from about 4 to about 8. The pH chosen is consistent withmaintaining stability and performance of ingredients in the composition.The pH is typically adjusted with inorganic molecules such as (HCl) orNaOH.

When optional cyclodextrin is present it is preferred to use anantimicrobial that does not significantly complex with cyclodextrin.When optional cyclodextrin is present sufficient anti-microbial shouldbe included to ensure effectiveness.

9. Mixtures Thereof

The preservatives of the present invention can be used in mixtures inorder to control a broad range of microorganisms.

H. Propellant

The composition of the present invention can optionally containpropellant. Propellants aid in dispensing product particularly when thecomposition is used in association with an aerosol containers.Propellants are typically small molecule hydrocarbons which can compriseelectronegative moieties such as oxygen or halogens. For somehydrocarbon propellants, the hydrogens are completely replace by othermoieties such as halogens. Commercial propellants are often mixtures ofsuch compounds. While chlorofluorocarbons (typically referred to asCFC's) are acceptable for some aspects of the present invention, CFC'sare not preferred due to real and/or perceived negative environmentalimpact. Propellants acceptable for the present invention will typicallyhave a vapor pressure of less than about 200 psig, more preferably, lessthan about 150 psig, even more preferably less than about 100 psig, andmost preferably less than about 70 psig at 70° F. Some nonlimitingexamples of propellants and propellant products are propane, isobutane,n-butane, 1,1-difluoroethane, 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane, isopentane,n-pentane as well as products and mixtures sold under the Aeron®Tradename all available from CPC International. A full listing of suchproduct is available at the website address www.diversifiedcpc.com *****(traditional reference) sponsored by Diversified CPC international andthese nonlimiting examples are incorporated herein by reference.

I. Other Optional Ingredients

The composition of the present invention can optionally contain otheradjunct odor-controlling materials, chelating agents, additionalantistatic agents if more static control is desired, insect and mothrepelling agents, colorants, especially bluing agents, viscosity controlagents, and mixtures thereof in addition to the antiwrinkle ingredients,e.g., polymers. The total level of optional ingredients is preferablyless than about 10%, more preferably less than about 5% even morepreferably less than about 3%, and still more preferably less than about2%, by weight of the usage composition. These optional ingredientsexclude the other ingredients specifically mentioned hereinbefore.Incorporating adjunct odor-controlling materials can enhance thecapacity of the cyclodextrin to control odors as well as broaden therange of odor types and molecule sizes which can be controlled. Suchmaterials include, for example, the metallic salts describedhereinbefore, water-soluble cationic and anionic polymers in addition tothose already disclosed, zeolites as discussed hereinbefore,water-soluble bicarbonate salts, and mixtures thereof. Other optionalmaterials are salts for viscosity control, antistatic agents, insect ormoth repelling agent, optional colorant, optional anti-clogging agent,and mixtures thereof of optional ingredients.

1. Optional Water-Soluble Polyionic Polymers

Some water-soluble polyionic polymers, e.g., water-soluble cationicpolymer and water-soluble anionic polymers in addition to thosediscussed hereinbefore, can be used in the composition of the presentinvention to provide additional odor control benefits.

a) Cationic Polymers, e.g., Polyamines

Water-soluble cationic polymers, e.g., those containing aminofunctionalities, amido functionalities, and mixtures thereof, are usefulin the present invention to control certain acid-type odors.

b) Anionic Polymers, e.g., Polyacrylic Acid

Water-soluble anionic polymers in addition to those describedhereinbefore, e.g., polyacrylic acids and their water-soluble salts areuseful in the present invention to control certain amine-type odors.Preferred polyacrylic acids and their alkali metal salts have an averagemolecular weight of less than about 20,000, more preferably less than10,000, even more preferably from about 500 to about 5,000. Addedpolymers must not cause the composition to exceed acceptable limits onthe Trouton's ratio. Salts are useful viscosity control agents, asdisclosed below to use together with polymers to control the Trouton'sratio, if necessary. Polymers containing sulfonic acid groups,phosphoric acid groups, phosphonic acid groups, and their water-solublesalts, and mixtures thereof, and mixtures with carboxylic acid andcarboxylate groups, are also suitable. Cross-linked polymers are alsouseful.

Water-soluble polymers containing both cationic and anionicfunctionalities are also suitable. Examples of these polymers are givenin U.S. Pat. No. 4,909,986, issued Mar. 20, 1990 to N. Kobayashi and A.Kawazoe, incorporated herein by reference. Another example ofwater-soluble polymers containing both cationic and anionicfunctionalities is a copolymer of dimethyldiallyl ammonium chloride andacrylic acid, commercially available under the trade name Merquat 280®from Calgon.

When a water-soluble polymer is used it is typically present at a levelof from about 0.001% to about 3%, preferably from about 0.005% to about2%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 1%, and even morepreferably from about 0.05% to about 0.5%, by weight of the usagecomposition.

2. Optional Antistatic Agents

The composition of the present invention can optionally containadditional effective amounts of other antistatic agent to provide thetreated clothes with in-wear static. Preferred antistatic agents arethose that are water soluble in at least an effective amount, such thatthe composition remains a clear solution. Examples of these antistaticagents are monoalkyl cationic quaternary ammonium compounds, e.g.,mono(C₁₀-C₁₄ alkyl)trimethyl ammonium halide, such as monolauryltrimethyl ammonium chloride, hydroxycetyl hydroxyethyl dimethyl ammoniumchloride, available under the trade name Dehyquart E® from Henkel, andethyl bis(polyethoxy ethanol)alkylammonium ethylsulfate, available underthe trade name Variquat 66® from Witco Corp., polyethylene glycols,polymeric quaternary ammonium salts, such as polymers conforming to thegeneral formula:—[N(CH₃)₂—(CH₂)₃—NH—CO—NH—(CH₂)₃—N(CH₃)₂ ⁺—CH₂CH₂OCH₂CH₂]—_(x) ²⁺2x[Cl⁻]available under the trade name Mirapol A-1® from Rhône-Poulenc, and—[N(CH₃)₂—(CH₂)₃—NH—CO—(CH₂)₄—CO—NH—(CH₂)₃—N(CH₃)₂—(CH₂CH₂OCH₂CH₂]—_(x)⁺ x[Cl⁻],available under the trade name Mirapol AD-1® from Rhône-Poulenc,quaternized polyethyleneimines,vinylpyrrolidone/methacrylamido-propyltrimethylammonium chloridecopolymer, available under the trade name Gafquat HS-100® from GAF;triethonium hydrolyzed collagen ethosulfate, available under the tradename Quat-Pro E® from Maybrook; neutralized sulfonated polystyrene,available, e.g., under the trade name Versa TL-130® from Alco Chemical,neutralized sulfonated styrene/maleic anhydride copolymers, available,e.g., under the trade name Versa TL-4® from Alco Chemical; and mixturesthereof.

It is preferred that a no foaming, or low foaming, agent is used, toavoid foam formation during fabric treatment. It is also preferred thatpolyethoxylated agents such as polyethylene glycol or Variquat 66® arenot used when alpha-cyclodextrin is used. The polyethoxylate groups havea strong affinity to, and readily complex with, alpha-cyclodextrin whichin turn depletes the uncomplexed cyclodextrin available for odorcontrol.

When an antistatic agent is used it is typically present at a level offrom about 0.05% to about 10%, preferably from about 0.1% to about 5%,more preferably from about 0.3% to about 3%, by weight of the usagecomposition.

3. Optional Insect and/or Moth Repelling Agents

The composition of the present invention can optionally contain aneffective amount of insect and/or moth repelling agents. Typical insectand moth repelling agents are pheromones, such as anti-aggregationpheromones, and other natural and/or synthetic ingredients. Preferredinsect and moth repellent agents useful in the composition of thepresent invention are perfume ingredients, such as citronellol,citronellal, citral, linalool, cedar extract, geranium oil, sandalwoodoil, 2-(diethylphenoxy)ethanol, 1-dodecene, etc. Other examples ofinsect and/or moth repellents useful in the composition of the presentinvention are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,449,987; 4,693,890;4,696,676; 4,933,371; 5,030,660; 5,196,200; and in “Semio Activity ofFlavor and Fragrance Molecules on Various Insect Species”, B. D.Mookherjee et al., published in Bioactive Volatile Compounds fromPlants, ASC Symposium Series 525, R. Teranishi, R. G. Buttery, and H.Sugisawa, 1993, pp. 35-48, all of said patents and publications beingincorporated herein by reference. When an insect and/or moth repellentis used it is typically present at a level of from about 0.005% to about3%, by weight of the usage composition.

4. Optional Colorant

Colorants and dyes, especially bluing agents, can be optionally added tothe wrinkle control compositions for visual appeal and performanceimpression. When colorants are used, they are used at extremely lowlevels to avoid fabric staining. Preferred colorants for use in thepresent compositions are highly water-soluble dyes, e.g., Liquitint®dyes available from Milliken Chemical Co. Non-limiting examples ofsuitable dyes are, Liquitint Blue HP®, Liquitint Blue 65®, LiquitintPatent Blue®, Liquitint Royal Blue®, Liquitint Experimental Yellow8949-43®, Liquitint Green HMC®, Liquitint Yellow II®, and mixturesthereof, preferably Liquitint Blue HP®, Liquitint Blue 65®, LiquitintPatent Blue®, Liquitint Royal Blue®, Liquitint Experimental Yellow8949-43®, and mixtures thereof.

5. Optional Anti-Clogging Agent

Optional anti-clogging agent which enhances the wetting andanti-clogging properties of the composition, especially when starch ispresent, is chosen from the group of polymeric glycols of alkanes andolefins having from 2 to about 6, preferably 2 carbon atoms. Theanti-clogging agent inhibits the formation of “plugs” in the spraynozzle. An example of the preferred anti-clogging agent is polyethyleneglycol having an average molecular weight of from about 800 to about12,000, more preferably from about 1,400 to about 8,000. When used, theanti-clogging agent is present at a level of from about 0.01% to about1%, preferably from about 0.05% to about 0.5%, more preferably, fromabout 0.1% to about 0.3% by weight of the usage composition.

6. Viscosity Control Agent

Optional viscosity control agents, such as electrolytes are useful forlowering viscosity in the present compositions. Not to be bound bytheory, but when carboxylic acid polymers have some degree of charge,these can build viscosity via electrostatic repulsion, electrolytes canprovide shielding between charges that reduces electrostatic repulsionand thus reduces viscosity.

Inorganic salts suitable for reducing dilution viscosity include MgI₂,MgBr₂, MgCl₂, Mg(NO₃)₂, Mg₃(PO₄)₂, Mg₂P₂O₇, MgSO₄, magnesium silicate,NaI, NaBr, NaCl, NaF, Na₃(PO₄), NaSO₃, Na₂SO₄, Na₂SO₃, NaNO₃, NaIO₃,Na₃(PO₄), Na₄P₂O₇, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, sodiumtetrachloroaluminate, sodium tripolyphosphate (STPP), Na₂Si₃O₇, sodiumzirconate, CaF₂, CaCl₂, CaBr₂, CaI₂, CaSO₄, Ca(NO₃)₂, Ca, KI, KBr, KCl,KF, KNO₃, KIO₃, K₂SO₄, K₂SO₃, K₃(PO₄), K₄(P₂O₇), potassium pyrosulfate,potassium pyrosulfite, LiI, LiBr, LiCl, LiF, LiNO₃, AlF₃, AlCl₃, AlBr₃,AlI₃, Al₂(SO₄)₃, Al(PO₄), Al(NO₃)₃, aluminum silicate; includinghydrates of these salts and including combinations of these salts orsalts with mixed cations e.g. potassium alum AlK(SO₄)₂ and salts withmixed anions, e.g. potassium tetrachloroaluminate and sodiumtetrafluoroaluminate. Salts incorporating cations from groups IIIa, IVa,Va, VIIa, VIIa, VIII, Ib, and IIb on the periodic chart with atomicnumbers >13 are also useful in reducing dilution viscosity but lesspreferred due to their tendency to change oxidation states and thus theycan adversely affect the odor or color of the formulation or lowerweight efficiency. Salts with cations from group Ia or IIa with atomicnumbers >20 as well as salts with cations from the lactinide or actinideseries are useful in reducing dilution viscosity, but less preferred dueto lower weight efficiency or toxicity. Mixtures of above salts are alsouseful.

Organic salts useful in this invention include, magnesium, sodium,lithium, potassium, zinc, and aluminum salts of the carboxylic acidsincluding formate, acetate, proprionate, pelargonate, citrate,gluconate, lactate aromatic acids e.g. benzoates, phenolate andsubstituted benzoates or phenolates, such as phenolate, salicylate,polyaromatic acids terephthalates, and polyacids e.g. oxylate, adipate,succinate, benzenedicarboxylate, benzenetricarboxylate. Other usefulorganic salts include carbonate and/or hydrogencarbonate (HCO₃ ⁻¹) whenthe pH is suitable, alkyl and aromatic sulfates and sulfonates e.g.sodium methyl sulfate, benzene sulfonates and derivatives such as xylenesulfonate, and amino acids when the pH is suitable. Electrolytes cancomprise mixed salts of the above, salts neutralized with mixed cationssuch as potassium/sodium tartrate, partially neutralized salts such assodium hydrogen tartrate or potassium hydrogen phthalate, and saltscomprising one cation with mixed anions.

Other useful organic salts include amino compounds that be protonated toform cationic salts either prior to addition or in situ such as TrisAmino® (2-amino-2-hydroxymethyl-1,3-propanediol) or AMPD™(2-amino-2-methyl-1,3-propanediol) Both available from Angus ChemicalCompany.

Generally, inorganic electrolytes are preferred over organicelectrolytes for better weight efficiency and lower costs. Mixtures ofinorganic and organic salts can be used. Typical levels of electrolytein the compositions are less than about 10%. Preferably from about 0.5%to about 5% by weight, more preferably from about 0.75% to about 2.5%,and most preferably from about 1% to about 2% by weight of the fabricsoftener composition.

J. Mixtures Thereof

A variety of mixtures and combinations of optional supplemental wrinklecontrol agent, optional odor control agent, optional perfume, optionalantimicrobial active, optional aminocarboxylate chelator, optionalwater-soluble polyionic polymer, optional antistatic agent, optionalinsect repellant, optional colorant, optional anti-clogging agent, canbe used in the present polymer compositions.

II. Information Concerning Use of Wrinkle Control Compositions

Information is may be provided to the consumer in the form ofinstructions. However, other forms and methods of dissminatinginformation may be used and are described in the following sections.Preferably, information will be provided in one or more of these formsvia a combination of dissemination methods.

A. Information—Educational Elements

The information provided to the consumer may be described in terms ofthe educational elements that are disclosed in detail below. Thisdescription of essential and optional educational elements isnonlimiting. It should be recognized that the methods of improving theperformance of a wrinkle control composition by increasing the educationassociated with that composition and/or exposing the consumer to othertypes of optional educational elements, such as information concerningthe use of the composition that is not specifically disclosed herein,will improve the performance of the composition and ultimately itsacceptance by the consumer.

A preferred educational element or information to be provided to theconsumer is (1.) a set of instructions that will instruct the consumeron bow to improve the performance of the wrinkle composition when thesaid composition is used by the consumer. Other preferred information oreducational elements will comprise, (2.) information that will tend toconvince the consumer that the performance of the said composition isauthetic, e.g. instill belief, (3.) instructions that teach the consumeron how to incorporate the use of wrinkle control compositions into theirdaily habits and lifestyles, (4.) instructions concerning the pluralityof uses and applications the consumer may employ the composition for,(5.) information concerning the presence of additional benefits otherthan wrinkle control that may be derived form the use of thecompositions, (6.) information identifying the consumer that manymembers of the household or organization can competently and safely usethe wrinkle control composition, and (7.) combinations thereof.

1. Instructions for Proper Use of the Composition

It is surprising to discover that a method for using a wrinkle controlcomposition is not intuitively obvious to the typical consumer. Manyconsumers apply a less than adequate amount of product, do not acheiveadequate distribution, and/or wait for wrinkles to spontaneouslydisappear. Therefore it has been found that the majority of consumersmust be taught how to use the wrinkle control product including, but notimited to, applying appropriate product levels, distributing the productevenly, and manipulating fabrics. Unless the consumer is taught how touse the product properly, it is highly unlikely that the consumer willuse the product successfully, and due to their disappointment will notrepurchase it. There are a variety of procedural elements that theconsumer must learn, including how best to apply the composition, how toshape the garment after applying the composition, what types of clothesrespond best to the composition, and when to use the composition, amongothers.

Surprisingly, methods of using the described compositions to guaranteegood wrinkle control performance are not intuitively understood by theconsumer. Other product features such as additional non-wrinkle relatedbenefits are also unobvious unless they are shared via instructions thatare designed to call them to the consumer's attention. Therefore, anarticle of manufacture comprising a wrinkle control composition andoptionally, but preferably a container including a spray dispenser and aset of instructions unexpectedly raises the value of the productsignificantly to the consumer vs. a similar article lacking suchinstructions. The set of instructions can be provided directly on orindependent of such a container.

a) Instructions for Applying a Wrinkle Control Composition

Instructions for applying a wrinkle control composition provide guidancefor applying the composition successfully to achieve good wrinklecontrol performance. Surprisingly the best way to apply product is notintuitively understood by many consumers. Articulating instructions forapplying such a composition and providing these to the consumer in theform of a set of instructions together with a wrinkle controlcomposition raises the value of the product significantly to theconsumer vs. a similar article lacking such instructions for use.Methods of use instructions can also be provided independent of atangible article of use, but rather in conjunction with a recognizableproduct image (e.g. trademarks, trade dress, trade color, andadvertising are nonlimiting exemples of recognizable product image).

Methods of application include detailed instructions concerning how toprepare clothes and product prior to application, instructions on theamount of product to apply, procedures for applying the product,procedures for manipulating the fabrics to aid the wrinkle removal,optional post-treatment procedures, and instructions pertinent tospecific types of fabrics.

i) Pre-Application Procedures

Several preparatory steps occur before product is applied to fabrics.Fabrics should be arranged such that the increment of fabric to betreated or preferably, if possible the entire fabric is available forapplication of the composition. Typically, this is done either byspreading a fabric on a surface or suspending it by hanging it on ahanger or clothelines or similar means. If the fabric is a householdfabric, it may be suitable and often desirable to treat the householdfabric in its typical environment. For instance, it is preferred totreat curtains as they hang on the door, table clothes as they arespread on a table, bedspreads and sheets as they lay on a bed andpillowcases while they cover pillows. Treating household fabrics in thismanner can save the time of removing the fabric treating it and thenreplacing it. In addition, the treatment of household fabrics in theirtypical environment is also convenient because it provides a space tohang or spread the fabric. In cases where a fabric will be treated on asurface or while hanging and it is desirable to prevent over spray ontoan unintended surface such as floors, table tops, washing machines,walls, etc. In applications where overspray is possible, a material suchas a towel or newspaper should be placed underneath the fabric toprevent unintended deposition on surounding surfaces.

When using a wrinkle control composition that may separate, it ispreferred, but not essential to shake the composition before applying tohomogenize the contents and guarantee uniform application of activesduring use.

ii) Amount of Composition to Apply

An effective amount of a wrinkle control composition of the presentinvention is applied to fabrics, preferably but not essentially, byspraying as disclosed below. When the composition is apply onto fabric,an effective amount should be deposited onto the fabric, with the fabricbecoming damp and for some cases, totally saturated with thecomposition, at least where the wrinkle exists. In general, lower levelsof treatment application are preferred, typically from about 1%,preferably from about 3%, even more preferably 5%, and most preferablyfrom about 7% by weight of the fabric and with higher levels oftreatment typically being less than about 300% preferably less thanabout 150%, more preferably less than about 100%, even more preferablyless than about 75%, still more preferably less than about 50%, and mostpreferably less than about 35% by weight of the fabric. For heavierfabrics or fabrics that are more heavily wrinkled, typically higherlevels of treatment are needed to reduce wrinkles.

Although general guidelines above are helpful to understand the range ofproduct application level, many factors affect the specific level oftreatment suitable for each fabric, e.g. whether the fabric is wet ordry, whether the fabric is heavy or light and whether the fabric islightly wrinkled or heavily wrinkled.

When dry fabrics are treated with the wrinkle controlling compositions,the amount of the composition that should be used is dependent onseveral factors including, but not limited to, the weight of the fabric,the type of fabric, and the type of wrinkle in the fabric. Fabrics canhave several types of wrinkles. One type of is wrinkle is characterizedby its relative depth and sharpness. Such wrinkles are difficult toremove and require a higher level of treatment and more work by the userto remove. When fabrics have such tough to remove wrinkles or the fabricis heavy, wrinkle controlling compositions are typically applied atlower levels of at least about 5% of the weight of the fabric,preferably at least about 7% of the weight of the fabric and at higherlevels of typically less than about 300% of the weight of the fabric,preferably less than about 150% of the weight of the fabric, and mostpreferably less than about 100% of the weight of the fabric.

Another type of wrinkle is characterized by its broad nature and lack ofdepth; such wrinkles are often referred to as “bumpiness”, “waviness”,or “rumples”. Such wrinkles are often less difficult to remove than thesharp type of wrinkle discussed above. When fabrics are lighter inweight or have wrinkles that are less difficult to remove typicallylevels of treatment application are at least about 1% of the weight ofthe fabric preferably at least about 3% of the weight of the fabric,more preferably at least about 5% of the weight of the fabric, and mostpreferably about 7% of the weight of the fabric and at higher levels oftypically less than about 100% of the weight of the fabric, preferablyless than about 50% of the weight of the fabric, more preferably lessthan about 30% of the weight of the fabric and most preferably less than25% of the weight of the fabric.

Although it is preferably to treat dry fabrics, wet fabrics can betreated with the wrinkle control composition as well to preventwrinkling during the drying process, and deliver a softness feel,especially to fabrics that haven't been treated with a fabric softener.Fabrics treated while wet should be manipulated into the desired endconformation after spraying and hung or laid flat to dry. The wrinklecontrolling compositions are also useful for wet fabrics when wetfabrics are being line dried.

To reduce the potential for staining, it is always preferable tominimize the total amount of wrinkle controlling composition needed toremove the wrinkles form the fabric.

iii) Procedures for Applying the Composition

Many different devices and/or implements can be used to apply treatmentto fabrics and the use of these devices and/or implement is, at times,dependent on the context. Generally preferred practices for applying thecomposition include arranging for the source of the composition to be anappropriate distance from the fabric and achieving good distribution.Practices for applying the composition to fabric which are specific todevices used for distribution are disclosed herein below. When applyingtreatments to fabrics via an aerosol means herein it is recommended tohold the source of the aerosol directed towards the fabric at a distancethat is typically at least about 2 inches, preferably at least about 3inches, more preferably at least about 4 inches, still more preferablyat least about 5 inches and most preferably at least about 6 inches fromthe fabric, while the upper distance from fabric is typically less thanabout 40 inches preferably less than about 20 inches, more preferablyless than about 15 inches, even more preferably less than about 12inches, even more preferably still less than about 10 inches and mostpreferably less than about 8.5 inches from the fabric.

More preferably, the wrinkle control composition should be applied in amanner that achieves even coverage over the entire fabric surface. Evencoverage and good distribution of the product over the fabric is highlypreferred, because this practice reduces drying time, prevents staining,and guarantees that all the wrinkles in a fabric will be treated withthe composition. While it is acceptable to treat the overall garmentusing a discrete distribution action e.g. spray a spot on a fabric andthen move to another spot on the fabric and spray, it is much morehighly preferably to spray fabrics using a sweeping motion over thefabric to aid maximum spreading and coverage of the wrinkle controllingcomposition. When using a manual sprayer to treat fabrics it ispreferred to sweep horizontally and vertically a few times to achieveeven distribution. Using other motions to achieve good distribution suchas a circular motion is also acceptable. In the case of a shirt, it isdiscovered that very specific recommendations such as sweeping whilespraying are surprisingly effective in helping the consumer achieve thebenefit.

An even distribution can also be conveniently achieved by using a devicethat provides a continuous stream of aerosol, such as a pressurized orpowered sprayers. Pressurized and powered sprayers may also be desiredto prevent hand and finger fatigue even though a continuous spray maynot be required. When using a continuous spray, a sweeping motion isstill useful for achieving a good distribution of the composition, butsweeping should be continuous and rapid when using a continuous spray.When using a continuous spray, employing a circular motion to achievegood distribution is also helpful.

While it is typically preferred to attempt to achieve uniformdistribution over a garment, there are situations in which a non-uniformdistribution is acceptable and even useful. For instance, in areas wheremore difficult wrinkles exist on the fabrics, it is usually desirable toconcentrate a higher dose of wrinkle controlling composition on thesewrinkled sites vs. the bulk of the fabric. For garments that have a fewlighter wrinkles, it is normally preferable to apply wrinkle controllingcompositions generally over these sites. However, it is acceptable totreat only the part of a fabric that will be visible, e.g., the front ofa shirt where only the front will be visible since the back will becovered by a jacket.

a. Distribution Via an Aerosol

For purposes of the present invention and aerosol is defined as liquiddroplets distributed in a gaseous carrier, and for purposes of thepresent invention the liquid to be formed into droplets comprises thewrinkle control composition and the gaseous carrier is air.

Many devices can be used to produce aerosols including, but not limitedto trigger sprayers, pumps, pressurized sprayers, pre-compressionsprayers, sprayers fueled by propellant, chambers with mechanicalsprayers, steamers, steam irons, paint sprayers, etc. The preferreddevices for generating aerosols for the purpose of the present inventionare trigger sprayers, pre-compression sprayers, and propellant drivensprays. When using trigger sprayers, it is efficacious to instruct theconsumer to pull the triggering mechanism in full strokes to aerosolizethe product effectively and provide the best distribution on fabrics,while reducing negatives such as sprayer drip and large droplet size.

When aerosols are used these should provide specific spray distribution,particle size, and other spray characteristics within specific ranges asdisclosed herein below.

b. Application Via an Implement

A variety of implements can be used to aid in the application of thecomposition to fabrics. Examples of such implements include rollers,gloves, mitts, brushes, and substrates.

Substrates are typically used to transfer the said composition tofabrics during the drying process either in domestic or commercialfabric drying equipment. Substrates are defined herein as any item thatcan releasably contain the composition until such time as the substrateplus said composition is added to the dryer and it comes into contactwith the fabrics to be treated with the composition. The substratereleases the composition and transfers it in a controlled fashion suchthat the composition is evenly distributed across the surfaces of thegarments within the dryer.

It should be understood that everyday objects available to the consumerand specially manufactured items are suitable for use as substrates forthe purpose of introducing a wrinkle controlling composition into thedryer and transferring the composition to the target fabrics. Availablesubstrates that can be used to deliver wrinkle controlling compositioninclude but are not limited to, cloth diapers, rags, wash clothes,towels, flexible nonwoven sheet or towellete, or sponges. It should alsobe understood that a substrate can be a manufactured item that issuitable for releasably containing the wrinkle controlling compositionto fabrics in the dryer. When used in combination with substrates, thedesired amount of the wrinkle controlling composition should be poureddirectly on the substrate (unless it is already contained within thesubstrate as an article of manufacture) and the substrate plus thewrinkle controlling composition is then placed in the clothes dryer andthe dryer is activated. The dryer temperature should be set according torecommendations given by the fabric manufacturer.

A substrate can be chosen such that it has the capacity to contain thedesired level of the said wrinkle controlling composition. Alternately,multiple substrates can be used to deliver the desired amount of wrinklecontrolling composition when the amount exceeds the capacity of onesubstrate. Also, when the batch or load of fabrics is large either innumber and/or weight, it is often desirable to use multiple substratesin combination with the wrinkle controlling composition to achieve amore uniform distribution of the wrinkle controlling composition duringthe tumbling of the fabrics in the dryer. When the wrinkle controllingcomposition is poured on a fabric or substrate for delivery into theclothes dryer, it is preferred that the item used to deliver the wrinklecontrolling composition is clean.

c) Physical Manipulations for Removing Wrinkles

Not to be bound by theory, but the removal of wrinkles from fabricstypically requires some form of mechanical force in addition to thechemical energy of the composition. Surprisingly, it is not obvious toconsumers that mechanical energy is necessary to remove wrinkles when awrinkle control composition is applied to fabric. Nor is it self-evidentthat when mechanical energy is used together with the said wrinklecontrol composition, that the level of mechanical energy is low or mildcompared to typical mechanical energy employed in the wrinkle removalprocess, such as ironing or pressing. Therefore, it greatly increase thevalue and everyday convenience of the product to go to extreme measuresto communicate this point as transparently as possible to the consumer.

In limited instances, the mechanical force required can be exceptionallylow, such as in the force of gravity on a fabric that is being hung froma hanger, clothesline or similar means or the moderate force achieved byaccelerating the fabrics through shaking. More typically the mechanicalforce required is slightly higher and so it is optional but preferred toapply physical manipulations to the fabric. Often these physicalmanipulations are most meaningfully described by actions such asstretching, tugging, and smoothing, but these are to be understood asnonlimiting directions for physical manipulations.

i) Physical Manipulations

After an effective level of treatment is applied to the fabrics, thereare several manipulations that can be employed to aid in removingwrinkles. Not to be bound by theory, but some type of mechanical force,in addition to chemical energy imparted by the said composition, isnecessary to remove wrinkles from clothing. It is acceptable in limitedcases, such as the treating lightweight garments with very lightwrinkling, to employ exceeding low mechanical energy, specificallythrought the application of gravitational force on the fabrics bysuspending it or shaking it while suspended. Typically however, at leasta moderate level of gentle physical manipulation is desirable to removewrinkles after treatment. It is preferred to avoid excessive physicalmanipulation as this may lead to stretching of the garment. Preferredphysical manipulations of a treated garment will include pinching,shaking, snapping, pressing, pulling and combinations of theseoperations. It should be understood that these actions are nonlimitingof the appropriate physical actions that may be used to manipulate thegarment or fabric.

Generally physical manipulation of the fabric should occur in at leastone direction, preferably perpendicular to the wrinkles, where thedirection of the wrinkles can be identified. More preferably, themanipulation of the fabric will occur in at least two directions thatare perpendicular. When a direction can not be identified for thewrinkles, it is preferable to gently manipulate the fabric in at leastone direction, and more preferably in at least two directions that areperpendicular to each other.

Fabrics can also be smoothed or pulled using the hands with pressing,gliding motions similar to those employed with an iron. Stretching andtugging motions to pull out wrinkles are also acceptable methods ofsmoothing to the fabric. Pressing and gliding with the hands can beaccomplished by placing the fabric on a surface, especially a horizontalsurface such as a table, bed, mat, ironing board or othe surface thatcan provide counter pressure to the pressure exerted by the hands toeffect the stretching and smoothing. When a surface is used for counterpressure, it is sometimes preferable to protect the surface from overspray by covering with a mat, cloth, or paper, etc. Alternately, thegarment can be suspended, as on a hanger or clothes line and hands canbe placed on either side of the fabric and pressed together to providecounter pressure for each other as the hands move along the fabric tostretch and smooth it. Attaching weights to the lower edges of asuspended garment can act as a substitute to smoothing the garment byhand and will provide moderate physical manipulation of the fabricFabric manipulation is especially useful on certain areas of fabricsthat are designated as challenge areas. Typically, the challenge areasare more difficult to smooth due to the thickness of fabric, seams,interfaces or the presence of intentional creases or pleats that areexpected to have sharp appearance. Challenge areas, on garments andfabrics in general, can include the following nonlimiting areas collars,seams, plackets, hems, ruffles, appliqués, embroidery, various otherfabric decorations, areas with interfacing, intentional creases, e.g. inthe front of pants, and pleats. Often a more energetic level of fabricmanipulation or smoothing is required on challenge areas A nonlimitingtype of smoothing action for challenge areas is delivered by pinchingfingers together and pulling the area through the fingers when theseareas are small as with collars, etc.

Once the fabric has been sprayed and optionally, but preferably,stretched or smoothed, it is hung until dry or maintained under stressto reduce the reappearance of the wrinkle. The manipulations to removewrinkles can be performed with the garment hung vertically, e.g., on aclothes hanger or spread on a horizontal surface, such as, a bed, anironing board, a table surface, and the like. Another method to loosenwrinkles after treating involves shaking out fabrics with enough energyto loosen wrinkles, in some cases it may be necessary to impart enoughenergy to cause the fabric to make a snapping noise or motion. Thewrinkles could also be manipulated out of the fabric using an implementdesigned to help smooth the fabrics. Such an implement would be usefulin preventing contacts between hands and wrinkle controllingcomposition, when desired.

Many fabrics or garments also contain bends in the fabrics, often termedcreases or pleats, that are desirable. Such creases or pleats are oftenfound on the front of pant legs and the sides of sleeves. These can bereinforced while the garment is being shaped to preserve the crease.Creases are reinforced by applying pressure usually by pinching thefabric either with hands, fingers, or an implement and pulling thecrease through the pressure point or by hanging the garment so that itfolds at the crease and reinforces it with the pressure of gravity. Thefabric should then be laid out flat to dry or hung on a hanger or withsome other apparatus such that the fabric will remain smooth whiledrying. Weights can be attached to critical points on fabrics andgarments to aid in maintaining smooth appearance and/or reinforcecreases during drying.

d) Post-Treatment Procedures

i) Drying the Treated Fabric

Depending on the amount of product used to treat the garment and theweight of the garment, the garment should be dried in air for an uppertime of less than about 24 hours, preferably less than about 12 hours,more preferably less than about 6 hours, still more preferably less thanabout 3 hours, and most preferably equal to or less than about 2 hoursand typically the lower limit of drying time is equal to or greater thanabout 1 minute, preferably greater than about 5 minutes, more preferablyequal to or greater than about 10 minutes, still more preferably greaterthan or equal to about 30 minutes and most preferably greater than orequal to about 60 minutes. It is preferable to let fabrics that werevery wet prior to treating with the wrinkle controlling composition dryfor longer periods. It is also preferable to let fabrics that aretreated with higher amounts of the wrinkle controlling composition dryfor longer periods of time. When consumers do have difficulty withlengthy dry times, surprisingly, it is not obvious to them that thereare changes in their fabric care habits that can be made to address thedry time problem. Therefore, it is helpful to instruct consumers tochange their fabric care habits by choosing garments to wear well aheadof time, preferably the night before wear, to allow adequate dry time.Alternately, consumers can be advised to use less spray and toconcentrate application at the most wrinkled sites. Also, consumers canbe advised to use the iron, to provide heat energy for drying thefabrics.

It is acceptable to assist the drying, either by heating, or blowing airacross the fabric surface, or both. Thus, at times it is desirable tofollow the use of wrinkle controlling composition by treating the fabricwith an appliance that can help dry the clothes. Nonlimiting examples ofsuch appliances are clothes dryers and hand-held hair dryers. Thewrinkle controlling composition, in combination with an appliance, canbe used on both dry or wet fabrics. For instance, the wrinklecontrolling composition can be used in combination with a clothes dryerto remove wrinkles from single fabrics or garments as well as batches,or loads, of fabrics and garments. Drying with low-heat or cool air ispreferred for fabrics that normally have a tendency to shrink, such aswool, silk, rayon, and the like.

A hand-held hair dryer can be used to increase the speed of drying ofindividual fabrics. It is preferably to use the hand-held hair dryer onfabrics that are not very wet since it can be time consuming to dryfabrics with such an appliance. Therefore, it is preferable to employthis method on fabrics that were treated in a dry state.

When using a hand-held hair dryer, the wrinkle controlling compositionshould be applied evenly over fabrics using the minimal amount ofwrinkle controlling composition necessary. Preferably, the fabric ismanipulated as described above to remove wrinkles prior to drying withthe hand-held hair dryer. The hand-held dryer is turned on either low,medium, or high heat, preferably medium or high heat and the air streamis applied evenly over the fabrics until the fabrics are dry. However,care should be taken to preferably use low-heat and/or cool air to dryfabrics that are prone to shrinkage, such as, wool, silk, rayon, and thelike, especially when the fabrics are reaching the point of dryingcompletely. After drying the fabric should be placed in a configurationthat will maintain its smoothness until use.

ii) Ironing

Ironing is a process that is typically used when consumers prefer a morepressed look. Ironing is also a useful way to apply physicalmanipulation and drying in a single activity. There are consumers whoprefer a pressed look on all garments, but many consumers distinguishbetween ‘casual’ clothes and ‘formal’ clothes. Consumers who distinguishsharply between casual clothes and formal or dress clothes often want amore pressed appearance for the formal or dress clothes that wouldinclude extremely smooth surfaces and very sharp creases and pleatswhere it is perceived creases and pleats are necessary for the finishedlook of the garment. When a more pressed look is desired, the consumeris instructed to use the wrinkle control compositions together withironing to achieve the best execution of the desired formal look.

Employing a wrinkle control composition together with ironing reduceswork involved with ironing and improves outcome vs. current ironingaids, especially ironing aids that are primarily starch. Spraying thefabrics with said wrinkle control compositions plasticizes the fibersmaking it easier to remove the wrinkles with ironing. Certain preferredwrinkle control composition, particularly those containing optionalshape retention polymer and optional silicone, particularly certainsilicone polyethers, provide a much better end feel to the fabrics,especially vs. starch-based formulations, while delivering the ultrasmooth and sharp appearance of starch. Surprisingly, consumers do notexpect fabrics that look sharp and smooth, similar to the appearance ofstarched garments, will also feel soft and silky as is achieved withsome preferred compositions. Therefore, this potential benefit isunobvious and instructing the consumer of its existence is essential toincreasing the value of these compositions as ironing aids.

When used together with ironing, the wrinkle controlling composition ispreferably applied to fabrics prior to ironing. A preferred way todeliver the wrinkle controlling composition to the fabrics is byspraying. The wrinkle controlling composition can also be delivered byemploying a through-the-dryer method as articulated above.Alternatively, in some embodiments, it is acceptable to deliver thewrinkle controlling composition through the iron concurrent with theironing process. The iron should be set to a temperature appropriate forironing the fabric. The wrinkle controlling compositions aid in“plasticizing” the fibers and thus reduce the time and effort involvedin ironing wrinkles out of fabrics. In general, the wrinkle controllingcomposition described herein should be used in a way similar to otherironing aids. After ironing, the fabric should be placed in aconfiguration that will maintain its smoothness as discussed above.

e) Instructions for Use on Specific Fabrics

It is not obvious to consumers how these compositions should be usedwith different fabrics. Therefore, it is useful to disclose such methodsof use as instructions to the consumer. Such instructions raise thevalue of a product to the consumer. Wrinkle control compositions areuseful for both casual and formal clothing. Some nonlimiting examples ofcasual clothing include: polos, khakis, T-shirts, jeans, knit wear,sweaters, etc. This product is also useful for formal clothes including,but not limited to: dresses, jackets, dress shirts, slacks, skirts, etc.Other clothes that will benefit from the use of these compositions willinclude uniforms, especially school or work related uniforms.

As articulated herein above, many consumers make a distinction betweencasual clothes and formal or dress clothes. In line with thisdistinction, consumer want these clothes to have different appearances.Therefore, consumers often put the extra effort into ironing formal ordress clothes to get the smooth sharp appearance desired in thesegarments as disclosed above. However, consumers will also often ironcasual clothes or knits to attain a smooth look, but also bedissatisfied with the outcome because ironing will squish, smash, anddamage the garment fibers. While this may not be apparent on formalclothes, which tend to be tightly woven, the damage done to fibers isoften very apparent on knits, sweaters, and other garments with looseweaves. Many loosely woven fabrics have a fluffiness and quality ofdrape that consumers appreciate and value. These loosely woven fabricsalso often have finishes that can be described as ‘sheen’. When suchgarments are ironed, the fibers are smashed and stiffened and thequalities of fluffiness and drape are lost to a significant degree,since the fiber has been stripped of its natural properties by ironing.Therefore, wrinkle control compositions are highly valued by consumersas an alternate way to impart a smooth, finished appearance to knits,sweaters, and other loosely woven and casual garments while still,surprisingly maintain and even reinforce the natural qualities of thefiber that lead to desirable attributes such as fluffiness, drape, andsheen.

When treating silk or rayon fabrics that are labeled “Dry Clean Only”,this should be done with compositions and devices that enable the finestand most well distributed product application possible to avoid stainingas such fabrics are typically highly sensitive to staining and willstain even on contact with water, if the water is not excessively welldistributed.

If any fabrics become stained these should be washed according toinstructions provided by the manufacturer of the fabric to remove thestain. While it is acceptable to use compositions herein on manysynthetic garments, the product is especially effective on fabrics thatcontain a majority of natural fibers, e.g. the product is more effectiveon fabrics containing 100% cotton or 65% cotton/35% polyester vs.fabrics containing 35% cotton/65% polyester. The said compositions arealso very effective on other fabrics and blends containing natural orslightly altered natural fibers that absorb water such as rayon, wool,silk, etc.

Many household fabrics can be treated with the wrinkle controllingcomposition while these household fabrics are residing in their typicalenvironment. For instance, fabric shower curtains and window curtainscan be treated while hanging on the rods, bed spreads, quilts, sheets,ruffles, and dusters can be treated while on a bed, and table linens canbe treated while on the table. Spraying is a preferred method fortreating fabrics residing in their typical environment. In these cases,reasonable care should be taken to avoid staining the environment aroundthe fabric. In many cases spraying household fabrics in their naturalenvironment can replace time consuming, costly, inconvenient, orundesirable processes. For instance, shower curtains are oftende-wrinkled by using the bathroom plumbing to generate a large quantityof steam. Spraying wrinkle controlling composition on the showercurtains eliminates the need to waste a large quantity of waterproducing steam, the potentially undesirable effects of steam on otherelements of the bathroom (e.g., wall covers may peel), and theinconvenience of having to close the bathroom to use for a certainperiod of time. Spraying wrinkle controlling composition on curtains andbed clothes eliminates the often awkward and time consuming job oftrying to iron large, irregular items; a process (e.g. ironing) thatoften results in accidentally generating even deeper more obvious andharder-to-remove wrinkles, as the user struggles to control both thelarge, irregularly shaped fabric and the iron. Thus, treating householdfabrics as they hang in place with wrinkle controlling composition oftenminimizes frustration and struggle. It is especially desirable todispense wrinkle removal compositions from a powered sprayer asdisclosed above to further improve the performance and convenience.

2. Expectations of Treatement

Very surprisingly, many consumers have difficulty understanding andaccepting that a wrinkle control composition will work. Not to be boundby theory, but consumers have accepted wrinkles for so long as aninevitable part of life that they now believe wrinkle removal requires asignificant investment of time and a good degree of work. Consumers havesignificant difficulty accepting that a simple wrinkle controlcomposition can actually work for them, despite the fact that there arecurrently several wrinkle control compositions on the market. Thisdemonstrates very strongly that consumers must first be taught that thewrinkle control composition is effective before they will incorporateits use in their daily lives. A highly preferred educational element isto teach consumers that wrinkle control compositions are effective inremoving and/or controlling wrinkles in fabric without the applicationof heat.

3. Instructions for Incorporating Product into Daily Habits andLifestyles

Previously, wrinkle control compositions, due to cost and inconvenience,have been reserved for special or occasional use, thus confining thebusiness to a small niche business. It is an aim of the presentinvention to educate consumers in the ways that an affordable wrinklecontrol composition can be incorporated into everyday use.

A variety of daily use opportunities are articulated at several pointsherein and particularly in methods of use. A few nonlimiting examplesare articulated here. For example, a consumer may not consider, unlesstold, that it is advantageous to choose fabrics well ahead of theintended time for use in order to provide time for the fabrics to drybefore use. A consumer may not consider, unless told that the productprovides an oppotunity to dewrinkle and refresh used fabrics for resuseas a substitute for laundry processes and thereby extending the usefullife of such fabrics. Consumers may not recognize that the use of suchcompositions reduces the cost and requirements for maintaining clothesin a presentable state, thereby enlarging theselection of clothes theconsumer is willing to purchase. Likewise, consumers realize the thesomposition is safe for use by many members of the consumers' domicileor organization, including those with physical challenges, the elderly,the handicapped, children, youth, students, etc. as more fully disclosedbelow which enables most everyone in the household to de-wrinkle theirown clothes. A consumer may not consider the variety and breath offabrics the composition can be used for such as wok or school uniforms.A consumer may not consider the opportunity to dewrinkle and refreshfabrics which are stored improperly, unless told.

Since consumers have a variety of lifestyles and habits it is helpful toexpose consumers to a variety of methods of using the product, so thatthey may find one that is suitable for them. However, when the habits ofa consumer or consumer group are well know it is useful to focus apresentation on methods of use to communicate directly to that consumer.

4. Uses and Applications of Wrinkle Control Compositions

Surprisingly, consumers typically only purchase wrinkle control spraycompositions for special or occasional use, e.g. going on trips. It ismore likely that the consumer will incorporate the use of a wrinklecontrol composition into their everyday life when they are taught aplurality of uses and applications.

Nonlimiting examples of fabric articles on which these types ofcompositions may be used include clothing such as shirts, pants, schooluniforms, dresses, skirts and the like, and household fabrics such asdraperies, napkins, table clothes, bed linens such as sheets,pillowcases, and comforters.

Non-limiting examples of applications or use situations for thesecompositions include treating clothes that have been lightly worn andare more wrinkled than soiled such that they can be refreshed anddewrinkled without having to go through a laundry process prior torewear. A similar rewear process can be used with drycleanables toreduce the number of times these fabrics need to be drycleaned. Further,fabrics that have been in storage may be treated to remove wrinkles sothat these fabrics do not have to be put through a laundry process priorto wear or usage. Reducing the number of times a fabric needs to becleaned or laundered will lengthen the lifetime of the fabric. Thisbenefit is not obvious to the consumer and must be taught for it to berealized and experienced. A final touch-up of clothing such as schooluniforms, work, and dress clothes shortly prior to wear may also beaccomplished with the use of the present composition.

A wrinkle control composition useful in the methods of the presentinvention has a variety of modes of use. While such a composition isexceptionally effective together with the typical laundry processes itis also a surprisingly useful alternative to typical laundry processes.Typical, nonlimiting examples of “laundry processes” include, but arenot limited to the processes of dry cleaning, laundering in an automaticwashing machine, professional or commercial laundering, steam cleaning,hand washing, professional or commercial pressing, home ironing, linedrying, air drying, drying in an automatic clothes dryer, drying with afan, drying with a hand held hair dryer or blow dryer etc.

a) Commerical Uses and Applications

The wrinkle control compositions useful in the methods of the presentinvention may be used in commercial and institutional settings as wellas in domestic settings. A nonlimiting list of commercial andinstitutional settings wherein the composition finds use includescommercial laundry and dry cleaning operations, hotels, motels, clothingretailers, resorts, spas, cruise ships, hair salons, beauty salons,fabric stores, tailor or alterations businesses, hospitals, day carecenters, assisted living centers, uniform manufacture and rentalbusiness, businesses catering to the physically active such as sportsequipment retailers, ahtletic clubs, gyms, fitness and workout centers,academic settings, especially college campuses, camping and adventureoutfitters, travel agencies, car rental agencies, and automotive productstores. Consumers should be made aware of these uses and the versatilityof such wrinkle control compositions in commercial operations.

More specifically, the wrinkle control compositions described herein areuseful as finishing compositions or ‘pressing aids’ for commercialdrycleaners, or commercial laundries that provide cleaning and fabriccare services. Within the drycleaning or commercial laundry contexts,compositions may be used to provide body, a smooth appearance whilemaintaining the soft, silky feel of the fabric, dewrinkling without lossof qualities of drape, fluffiness and sheen. Further, the describedcompositions may act to replace some processes such as pressing garmentsby providing a more acceptable end point to the consumer, namely, ade-wrinkled, but fluffy garments.

Institutions that provide lodging or caretaking such as hotels, motels,hospitals, hospices, dormitories, assisted living, and day carefacilities may provide the composition to customers, staff, orresidents, in lieu of devices that are normally used in typical laundryprocesses such as irons, washing machines, or dryers. In many settingsdisclosed above, typical laundry process equipment is a nuisance or evena hazard to individuals and wrinkle control compositions that do notrequire the application of heat to cure or otherwise activate thewrinkle controlling effect provide a useful alternative to frequentlytreating fabrics via typical laundry processes.

Department and clothing retailers can also use the describedcompositions to treat fabrics and garments to improve the look and valueof salable wares. In addition, such retailers may provide suchcompositions to their consumers or to treat salable wares after purchaseto improve appearance as a goodwill gesture to their consumers.

b) In-Home Uses and Applications

i) Use of Wrinkle Control Compositions for Fabric Appearance Finishing

When a wrinkle control composition is used for finishing the fabricappearance, such usage generally occurs at some point after the fabrichas been laundered and before the fabric is used for the first time. Inorder to provide clarity with respect to the fabric appearance finishingprocess, clothing will be used as a specific example. However, it willbe understood that for the purposes of the present invention, appearancefinishing can apply to any other fabrics in addition to clothing.

It is preferable to treat fabrics with a wrinkle controlling compositionprior to wearing the fabrics because although typical laundry processesdo an adequate job of removing wrinkles, these processes typically donot completely remove wrinkles nor do these processes prevent wrinklesthat may occur during storage prior to wear. The ways in which clothesare handled and stored between domestic and commercial cleaning andfabric care processes often leads to reintroduction of wrinkles prior tothe first wearing of the garment. Several handling situations that canlead to re-wrinkling, include, but are not limited to storage inclosets, or cabinets, clothes left in an unfolded state in any containeror space, such as in laundry baskets, in dryers, on tables, on floors,in drawers, or on beds, storage in containers, especially when tightlypacked containers such as in suitcases for trips or storage, storage intrunks, and storage in crowded drawers or other crowded or crampedenvironments.

Typically, any situation where clothes are stored for a length of timeleads to a resurgence of wrinkles. Rewrinking can ocurr whenever theclothes are under any amount of compression, even where the compressionis only due to the weight of the fabric and the action of gravity on thegarment. Previous methods for removing resurgent wrinkles in suchinstances required running the clothes through domestic or commercialprocesses which consumes time and resources and can be very aggravatingsince it is essentially rework. Surprisingly, it has been discoveredthat the use of a wrinkle composition provides a quick, inexpensivesolution to the ongoing problem of poor fabric handling and storage thatleads to wrinkle resurgence after laundry processes.

In addition to the reintroduction of wrinkles, storage can also lead tomusty or off odors in the clothing. An additional benefit of treatingstored fabrics with wrinkle control compositions, especially suchcompositions that contain perfume and/or odor control agent, is the factthat the odor of garment is refreshed.

ii) Use of Wrinkle Control Composition for Garment Rewear

Rewear is defined herein as wearing clothing multiple times beforesubjecting the clothing to a domestic or commercial cleaning process.Many consumers practice this rewear habit. Also, it has been discoveredthat while the habit is practiced for good reasons, the current state ofthe habit, or the way the habit is currently practiced by the consumerhas some undesirable elements. The many reasons for practicing rewearinclude, but are not limited to, 1) a desire to preserve the integrity,look, color sheen, and general newness of a fabric, e.g. lengthen thelifetime of a fabric since cleaning processes and fabric care processes(e.g. ironing) often lead to fabric damage, 2) saving the time requiredto clean fabrics after each wear, and 3) saving the cost associated withcleaning and various fabric care processes. Since the wrinklecontrolling compositions can be used to enable and encourage the rewearhabit among a variety of consumers, treating fabrics with wrinklecontrolling compositions has been found to be an unobvious andsurprising alternative to typical domestic and commercial cleaning andfabric care processes.

Consumers will wear a garment that has been worn before, even if theappearance and odor of the garment are less than optimal. Typically,consumers will only rewear clothing that has been lightly worn beforeand usually only if the clothing does not have obvious spots and/orstains to signal that it has been worn before. However, consumers findthis practice less than optimal since most garments will have wrinklesfrom being worn before. In addition, the garment is likely to have someresidual odor from previous wear. Many consumers believe that a garmentis not ‘ready-to-wear’ if it has wrinkles. Therefore, it has been foundthat wrinkle controlling compositions provide a solution to an unobviousproblem in a heretofore unrecognized consumer habit. Wrinkle controlcompositions can provide the needed level of wrinkle removal and odorremoval to provide the consumer with a significantly more acceptableoutcome to support their rewear habit.

Also, there are consumers who wish to practice the rewear habit, but donot because these consumers feel very uncomfortable wearing clothes thathave even aminor level of wrinkling. Such consumers feel strongly that agarment is not ‘ready to wear’ if it is even lightly wrinkled and willsend a lightly wrinkled garment back through laundry processes. Even ifthe garment has no residual odor and they do not believe it is dirty, ifthe garment is even lightly wrinkled such consumers may find the garmentunacceptable for rewear. To these consumers, even if the fabric is notdirty, others will perceive it as unclean due to the wrinkling and theseconsumers will feel their image and status in the eyes of others suffersas a results of wearing garments that may be perceived as unclean. Thisis true of virtually all consumers with respect to clothing that is wornfor business or more formal social occasions. For such consumers, awrinkle controlling composition can relieve a tremendous burden of workassociated with keeping clothes continually looking ready-to-wear,fresh, and clean. Enabling the rewear habit is also particularly usefultogether with garments that must be worn multiple times during a certainperiod, such as uniforms, and especially school uniforms.

Wrinkle controlling compositions, surprisingly, extend the usablelifetime of clothing items and the lifetime of the appearance of theclothing by reducing the number of times the fabric will be subjected tothe harsh laundry processes that lead to fabric damage and appearancereduction. By enabling the consumer to rewear clothing more frequentlywithout laundering, less damage occurs to the clothing item over a givenperiod of time. Less laundering results in less damage to the fibers andthe appearance of the clothing item is maintained for a longer period oftime.

Therefore, in a further process aspect of the present invention, amethod for extending the useful life of clothing items is provided. Asused herein, the “useful life” of a clothing item refers to the periodof time a consumer would have used and worn a given clothing item beforereplacing it because of the degradation to the appearance and/or feel ofthe item that results from the incremental damage caused by repeatedlaunderings of the item. As used herein, “incremental damage” or fiberdamage resulting from the repeated washing or laundering of clothingitems is intended to refer to the degradation or damage to fabric fiberattributes such as texture, sheen, color, and any other visual, tactileor olfactory sensed feature that initially made the clothing itemappealling to the consumer.

The method comprises the step of providing a wrinkle control compositionthat is capable of controlling wrinkles in fabrics without theapplication of heat and without subjecting the clothing to a launderingprocess that would otherwise tend to cause an incremental measure ofdamage to the fabric fibers during laundering. The compositions for usein such a method will contain water and optionally, but preferably, aperfume and/or ordor control agent amongst other optional materials. Amore detailed description of the compositions that are useful in themethods of the present invention have been provided above.

In addition, the method comprises the step of providing information tothe consumer conserning the use of the composition, preferably, the useof the composition to enable the rewear of previously worn clothingitems as a means for extending the useful life of such items. A detaileddescription of the information that is to be provided and the manner inwhich that information can be disseminated are also provided herein.

Within the context of laundry processes, the wrinkle control compositionhas many uses. Wrinkle control compositions can be used within the homedryer (or a commercial dryer in a Laundromat), together with the iron asan ironing aid, within a fabric care chamber, and together with asteamer and other miscellaneous fabric care devices.

iii) Use of Composition with Typical Domestic Cleaning and Fabric CareProcesses

For the purposes of this section concerning typical domestic laundryprocesses, there is no distinction between processes performed in theconsumers' domicile and processes performed by the consumer atcommercial facilities, such as a laundromat.

Methods for Use with the Dryer

These compositions can be applied to fabrics in a clothes dryer by manymeans. For instance, the wrinkle controlling composition can be sprayedonto fabrics or garments prior to adding them to the dryer, sprayed onfabrics or garments while the fabrics or garments are in the dryer,poured directly on the batch of garments and fabrics, or poured onto oneof the fabrics or garments that is added to the dryer. The wrinklecontrolling composition can also be sprayed onto the fabrics in thedryer by a device that is part of the dryer or attached to it. Althoughthere are a variety of acceptable approaches to achieve introduction ofthe said composition into the dryer, even distribution of the wrinklecontrol composition is critical to achieving the best performance and sothe approaches that achieve the most uniform distribution are preferred.

Processes and implements that aid in good distribution in the dryer arepreferred. One method for use within the dryer is to spray productcomposition evenly over a fabric or bundle of fabrics, place these itemsin a dryer, set the dryer at an appropriate setting as recommend by themanufacturers of the fabrics and when the fabrics are dried immediatelyremove them and manipulate the fabric into the desired conformationeither as it is hanging or as it is laying on a surface. Allow thefabric to remain in this conformation for at least about 10 minutes.Other process for treating fabrics with wrinkle control compositionwhile in the dryer including applying composition as an aerosol while inthe dryer and/or using various implements to distribute the wrinklecontrol composition during tumbling. Implements may include, but are notlimited to a variety of substrates.

To provide enable good distribution when composition is applied withinthe dryer, it is preferred, to use smaller bundle sizes with typicalsizes below about 15 lbs (about 6.8 kg), preferably below about 10 lbs(about 4.5 kg), more preferably below about 8 lbs. (about 3.6 kg), evenmore preferably below about 6 lbs. (about 2.7 kg) and most preferably ator below about 4 lbs. (about 1.8 kg) It is also desirable to arrange thebundle composition such that fabrics in the bundle have similar weightsor densities to promote even distribution. When a substrate is used itis also desirable for each substrate plus wrinkle controllingcomposition to have a weight or density similar to the fabrics in thebundle to facilitate even distribution. Therefore, in cases where largerbundles are treated, it is preferable to use a larger substrate ormultiple substrates. However, where a larger substrate has asignificantly different weight and/or density relative the fabric itemsto be treated, it is preferred to have multiple smaller substrates sothat the weight and/or density of each substrate is more similar to thatof the clothes, thereby facilitating the distribution of the wrinklecontrol composition.

When treating fabrics in the clothes dryer the amount of wrinklecontrolling composition used is dependent on the size of the load offabrics. For a 4 lbs. bundle of fabrics, wrinkle controllingcompositions should be used typically at lower levels of least about 10g, preferably at least about 20 g, even more preferably at least about30 g, still more preferably at least about 50 g, and most preferablyabout 66 g, and at an upper level of equal to or less than about 3000 g,preferably equal to or less than about 1500 g, more preferably equal toor less than about 750 g, still more preferably equal to or less thanabout 500 g and most preferably equal to or less than about 100 g. Whenthe bundle size is greater than about 4 lbs., higher amounts of wrinklecontrolling composition are appropriate and when the bundle size issmaller than about 4 lbs. (about 1.8 kg) lower amounts of wrinklecontrolling composition are appropriate. When the wrinkle controllingcomposition is provided together with a substrate as an article ofmanufacture, more than one article can be used where a greater amount ofwrinkle control composition is needed.

Total drying time is typically set at a lower limit of at least about 1minute, preferably about 2 minutes, more preferably about 3 minutes,even more preferably about 5 minutes and most preferably about 7 minutesand with an upper limit set at about 60 minutes, preferably 45 minutes,more preferably 30 minutes even more preferably about 20 minutes andstill more preferably about 15 minutes and most preferably about 10minutes. Preferably fabrics are still at least slightly damp whenremoved from the dryer.

Garments and fabrics should be removed as soon as possible, preferablyimmediately, following the drying cycle and arranged to maintain thesmooth appearance of the fabrics with for instance, but not limited to,arranging sleeves, collars, pant legs so these are smooth and nottwisted in any way, hanging the fabric on a hanger, laying the fabricflat or putting it to its intended use to maintain its appearance e.g.hanging curtains, putting bed linens on a bed, placing table linens on atable. Preferably the fabric will not be folded and stored until it iscompletely dry.

Methods for Use with the Iron

Methods for use with the iron are disclosed herein above.

Methods for Use with Fabric Treatment Chambers

In another aspect of the present invention, the composition can besprayed onto fabrics in an in-home de-wrinkling chamber containing thefabric to be de-wrinkled and/or optionally deodorized, thereby providingease of operation. Conventional personal as well as industrialdeodorizing and/or de-wrinkling apparatuses are suitable for use herein.Traditionally, these apparatuses act by a steaming process which effectsa relaxation of the fibers. Examples of home dewrinkling chambersinclude shower stalls. The spraying of the composition or compounds ontothe fabrics can then occur within the chamber of the apparatus or beforeplacing the fabrics into the chamber. The spraying means shouldpreferably be capable of providing droplets with a weight averagediameter of from about 8 to about 100 μm, preferably from about 10 toabout 50 μm. When treatment occurs within a chamber preferably, theloading of moisture on fabrics made of natural and synthetic fibers isfrom about 5 to about 25%, more preferably from about 5 to about 10% byweight of the dried fabric. Other conventional steps that can be carriedout in the dewrinkling apparatus can be applied such as heating anddrying. Preferably, for optimum dewrinkling benefit, the temperatureprofile inside the chamber ranges from about 40° C. to about 80° C.,more preferably from about 50° C. to about 70° C. The preferred lengthof the drying cycle is from about 15 to about 60 minutes, morepreferably from about 20 to about 45 minutes.

The steaming step in the dewrinkling apparatus can also be eliminatedwhile obtaining the benefits, if the composition is maintained within atemperature range from about 22° C. (about 72° F.) to about 76° C.(about 170° F.) before spraying.

Methods for Use Together with Miscellaneous Apparatus for TreatingFabrics

Rollers, gloves, mitts, mats, steamers, swivel head hangers, showers,and shower heads are nonlimiting examples of implements that are usefulin combination with said compositions to apply compositions, to improvethe physical manipulation of the treated fabrics, thereby improving theperformance and/or improve the overall usage experience.

Rollers, gloves and mitts can all be used to apply product, either byincorporating product into these implements or by applying product tothe implement and then applying it to the fabrics. Rollers, gloves, andmitts, can also be used for smoothing actions, to improve de-wrinklingperformance and experience. Consumers who do not want to contact thecompositions with their hands will also have protection using thesedevices. Some consumers will also apply more pressure when using animplement and thereby, get a better outcome.

Said composition can be incorporated into a steamer and then applied tofabrics using typical settings on these devices to generate steam.

Showers and shower heads can be used to apply the composition tofabrics, conveniently in the bathroom where the bathtub or shower stallcan capture over spray. Composition can be loaded into a removableshower head or into a removable implement that attaches to the showerhead so that it is applied to fabrics when the shower is turned on.Similar devices could be constructed to attach to other plumbingoutlets, e.g. faucets in the bath, sink, garden.

When using hangers to suspend fabric during treatment, it is preferableto hang the garments to be treated with the wrinkle removal compositionsusing a swivel clothes hanger. The swivel clothes hanger has a framethat can be rotated around the stem of the hook. A garment hung on saidswivel hanger can be oriented in many directions. This facilitates aneven and thorough treatment of the garment with the wrinkle compositionwhen using the spray to treat the garments. Additionally, the swivelhanger facilitates inspection and manipulation of the garment and so isgenerally useful when used together with wrinkle controllingcompositions.

5. Non-Wrinkle Control Benefits

Some aspects of the methods of the present invention may optionallyoffer benefits in addition to wrinkle control including softness,silkiness, increased body (often referred to also as crispness orstructure), static control, color care, color loss prevention, sheen,color maintenance, odor control, malodor reduction, antimicrobialprotection, antibacterial protection, insect repellence, waterrepellence, improve water transport, improved fabric breathability,fiber integrity, fabric integrity, fiber strengthening, fabricstrengthening, maintaining the original and or natural texture of feelof the garment anti-shrinkage, shape retention, etc. Consumers need tobe instructed as to the presence of these benefits and the proceduresfor obtaining them so that they may be appreciated by the consumer andcontribute to consumer's satisfaction with the product. Therefore, it isimportant to instruct the consumer about the presence of optionaladditional benefits and to provide instruction concerning the use of thecomposition to achieve these added benefits.

In addition, there are a number of benefits that may be derived from theuse of a wrinkle control composition that aids the consumer in removingand controlling wrinkles in their fabrics without the application ofheat to cure or otherwise activate the wrinkle controlling effect. Thesebenefits include but are not limited to reducing the cost and carerequirements for maintaining the consumer's clothing items, enablingpersons less skilled or less capable to perform an effectivede-wrinkling procedure on their fabrics and to prolong the usable lifeof a consumer's fabrics by enabling the consumer to rewear clothingitems without laundering the items.

Specifically, a nonobvious benefit of the use of a wrinkle controlcomposition is the fact that such composition allows the consumer thefreedom to purchase a wider selection of garments and fabrics, namely,garments and fabrics that are desirable but which the consumerpreviously avoided due to their care requirements or their tendency towrinkle. The use of a wrinkle control composition reduces the carerequirements of many garments from impractical, time consuming, andexpensive to that of a simple, inexpensive practical task.

Another unobvious benefit of a wrinkle control composition is that manymembers of the household can use the composition successfully andwithout concern for the safety of the person using the composition orthe clothes being treated. Consumers who cannot or who have difficultyin performing typical domestic laundering processes such as ironing,will be able to effectively use the compositions described herein. Thesepersons include but are not limited to, children, youth, the physicallyor mentally challenged or handicapped, the elderly, college students andthose less skilled or competent in typical laundry processes who may beof either gender, but more typically are men, especially husbands. Suchconsumers may use commercial laundry processes as an alternative totypical domestic laundry processes, but this is costly and timeconsuming and for some unavailable due to the difficulties involved intransporting fabrics, lack of funds, etc. For these consumers, a wrinklecontrolling compositions provide a much more simple, accessible, andsafe alternative to typical laundry processes for improving theappearance of their clothing.

As has also benn described herein, a most unobvious benefit from the useof the a wrinkle control composition is the capability to extend theuseful life of garments and other fabrics items that need frequentlaunderings, by practicing the rewear habit so as to reduce thefrequency at which the item would otherwise require laundering and thefiber damage that would have accompanied that periodic laundering.

6. Identify Potential Users of the Composition

Many fabric care products are traditionally used by only a select fewmembers of the household. These select members will be referred toherein as the ‘laundry experts’. It is often perceived that the washprocess is too difficult, complex, and at times, for some householdmembers, a safety hazard (e.g. reaching into the washing machine and/orironing can be difficult, impossible and/or hazardous for some). It isbelieved that a certain degree of maturity, skill and/or willingness toput labor against the task is necessary to complete the traditional washprocess which may include washing clothes, drying clothes, and ironingclothes successfully (e.g. achieving the right finished look withoutdamaging clothes). Often it develops that one person, traditionally thefemale-head-of-household, becomes the household ‘laundry expert’ and ifthe task is delegated to others, the safety of the fabrics, at least,will be at risk. This is because so many things can go wrong in domesticlaundry processes which can be complex, comprising many steps and manyitems to be treated with a variety of laundry products. For instance, ifthe water is too hot, the fabrics will shrink. If light colored fabricsare laundered with dark colored fabrics, it is likely that colors maybleed and ruin the coloring of the lighter colored fabrics. Indeed therole of ‘laundry expert’ can be so onerous that it will also developthat there are households where there is no ‘laundry expert’ because allavoid the task either through fear of ruining fabrics or because time,energy and/or interest, are not available to perform the onerous task.In these cases, many times, money replaces energy to complete thelaundry processes by employing others to do this work.

It is advantageous to the ‘laundry expert’, to households with nolaundry expert, and to consumers with limited access to laundryprocesses, including but not limited to commercial and institutionalorganizations, to learn that a wrinkle control compositon can be usedcompetently and effectively by nearly all members of the household,including, but not limited to children, youth, the physicallychallenged, the handicapped, students, the elderly, those with busy orphysically active lifestyles. It is important to teach the consumer thata wrinkle care composition can provide a simple and easy means for allto use and to achieve a good finished endpoint without damaging thefabrics or creating safety issues for the user. It is furtheradvantageous to those who are not ‘laundry experts’ to discover thatthere is a simple way for them to refresh lightly worn clothes and givenewly washed fabrics a better finished appearance.

The ‘laundry expert’ is not always available to employ laundry processesthat give the clothes the desired finishing touches and the simplicityand ease of the wrinkle control composition allows others to competentlyand safely finish their clothes for wear without having to depend on thelaundry expert. Alternately, it is not necessary to pay for fabrics tobe laundered that have lost a finished appearance, but are notfundamentally unclean. Instead such fabrics can be refinished andrefreshed quickly, easily, safely, and inexpensively using these typesof compositions. The wrinkle control composition imparts a sense offreedom and control to all members of the household to improve theirappearance without undo labor or concern for safety of fabrics orindividuals. Use of these types of compositions also gives the ‘laundryexperts’ more freedom and control over their own time by allowing themto delegate the finishing task to other members of the household. Byteaching both the ‘laundry experts’ and the ‘non-laundry experts’ thisadvantage, the acceptance and use of the wrinkle care product improvesthe performance of the composition and increases the success of themarket as measured by repurchase and share size increases also.

7. Combinations

It is preferably to teach the consumer a combination of the educationalelements and most preferable to teach all educational elements disclosedherein. It is also preferably to teach other useful educational elementsand tips to consumers as these become revealed in combination withnonlimiting educational elements disclosed herein.

B. Disseminating Information—Educational Elements

The methods of the present invention also require providing informationto the consumer concerning the use of a wrinkle control composition thatprovides a wrinkle controlling effect without the application of heat tocure or otherwise activate the winkle controlling effect. Thisinformation may be provided in the form of instructions provided inassociation with the product, as described above, productdemonstrations, consumer testimonials and other educational elementsthat are specifically tailored for a specific consumer group, sensorymedia presentations and various combinations thereof. The disseminationof the information by any of these means should be simple and easy tograsp. The dissemination of the educational elements in this manner willtypically engage the consumer for at least about 5 seconds, preferablyabout 30 seconds, more preferably at least about 1 minute, even morepreferably at least about 2 minutes.

A highly preferred method for disseminating educational elements is tocombine a preferably live product demonstration together with a sensorypresentation, namely a video presentation. The objective of using acombination of dissemination techniques is to provide the consumer witha convincing and exciting experience that will further act to heightenthe consumer's awareness of and value in the use of wrinkle controllingcompositions.

1. Product Demonstrations

A highly preferred method for disseminating the educational elements, isa live face-to-face demonstration of product performance for theconsumer. When consumers are exposed to such a live demonstration, theylearn how improve the performance of the composition when they use itthemselves. Preferably, they will also learn that the wrinkle controlperformance is authentic and genuine without the application of heat orthe use of processes that require heat to cure or otherwise activate thewrinkle controlling effect.

The primary intention of product demonstrations is to overcome consumerskepticism by employing the two highly preferred educational elements toconvince the consumer that wrinkle control product performance isauthentic and to instruct the consumer in successful methods of usingthe product to achieweve that performance. Typically, the demonstrationis at least about 5 seconds, preferably it is at least about 10 seconds,more preferably it is at least about 15 seconds, more preferably it isat least about 30 seconds, even more preferably it is at least about 2minutes, still more preferably it is at least about 5 minutes, and mostpreferably it is at least about 10 minutes. Since it is desirable toprovide consumers with as much educational information as possible, whenthe demonstration format provides the opportunity, it is acceptable, forsome aspects of the present invention, e.g. product parties, salescalls, multi-level marketing meetings, to provide a demostration that isabout 30 minutes in length or preferably up to 60 minutes in length.Such a length will enable a demonstrator the time to demonstrate the useof a wrinkle controlling composition on various types of fabrics and topresent a variety of situational uses.

It is most preferable for live demonstrations to incorporate fabrics,e.g. clothes or household fabrics (curtains, table clothes, napkins),that are relevant to the consumer and are used in their daily lives.Preferably, the wrinkle control product is demonstrated on theserelevant fabrics. Because it is costly to provide real garments for eachdemonstration, it is anticipated that swatches, or sections or pieces offabrics may be used to represent these relevant fabrics during thedemonstration of a wrinkle control product. When swatches are used inthe wrinkle control demonstration, it is highly preferred that thedemonstrator have on hand a pair of the relevant fabrics that are beingrepresented by the swatch, one of which represents the fabric articlebefore treatment and one which represents the garment after treatment.The fabrics articles showing thewrinkle condition before and aftertreatment helps to set the context for the consumer and provides themwith a realistic example of the finished article.

Product demonstrations can be done ‘live’ which for the purposes of thepresent invention will mean that the demonstratation is performed in thepresence of the consumer. Live demonstrations have the advantage ofproviding the consumer with the opportunity to interact and askquestions that can clarify and remove issues and doubts that might bebarriers to purchase and use. Live demonstrations also have theadvantage of allowing the demonstrator to learn about the consumers'lifestyles and thereby tailor the demonstration and educational elementsto the needs of the consumers.

Live product demonstrations tend to be more convincing than pre-recordeddemonstrations. Many consumers are skeptical that a composition can beused to control wrinkles in a product without the application of heat tofabric treated with the composition. Consumers are more apt to acceptthat the wrinkle controlling effect is authentic after they view a livedemonstration of the product's performance. However, live demonstrationsfor every potential customer would be cost prohibitive and extremelytime consuming. Therefore, many other effective means of disseminatingeducational elements are also presented below.

A preferred way to disseminate educational elements is to encourageconsumers who have become convinced of the product's performance andunderstand how to use the method successfully, to further disseminatethis information to their family, friends, and acquaintances throughtheir own demonstrations of the product. The value of the trust factorin such personal connections can not be underestimated as it contributesto providing a convincing product performance demonstration that willincrease the value of the product in the minds of other consumers.

Many other effective means of disseminating educational elements aredisclosed below, including but not limited to, a variety of ‘non’ livedemonstrations including virtual demonstrations, demonstrations on avariety of electronic media and demonstrations for surrogates e.g. aperson that the consumer will identify with when the demonstrator givethe surrogate the demonstration. Surrogate demonstrations have theadvantage that these can be given to a large group of consumers at oncevia mass media and less garments are needed therefore, surrogatedemonstrations can be extremely cost effective.

a) Live Demonstrations Incorporating Direct Contact with the Consumers

For the purposes herein a ‘live’ demonstration is one in which thedemonstrator is demonstrating the product in the presence of theconsumer.

Live demonstrations are a highly preferred method for disseminatingeducational elements as they tend to be more convincing and exciting forthe consumer. A ‘live’ demonstration for consumers is a preferred way topresent the product proposition because such a demonstration can engagethe sight, hearing, touch, and smell senses of the consumer. Thesedemonstrations are also highly interactive with the consumer able to askquestions and get focused answers and feedback on how to use product. Itis a very effective way to interactively instruct consumers insuccessful methods of using the product and to optionally to confirmthat the consumer understands the method of successful use.

Another surprising benefit of live demonstrations is that suchdemonstrations often encourage the consumers who see it to diffuse theeducational elements voluntarily to family, friends, and acquaintancesin a way that encourages trust and belief in product performance.Methods that incorporate the dissemination of information to family,friends, and acquaintances are preferred, because such demonstrationsideally incorporate an element of trust that acts to increase thelikelihood that the demonstration of product performance will beconvincing. Such voluntary diffusion by consumers is not only effectivein convincing other consumers of product performance, but it is alsohighly cost effective.

Methods below that also incorporate opportunities to combine a videopresentation with a live demonstration are also preferred, but notessential, as this approach is very effective in convincing the consumerof the authenticity of product performance and in instructing theconsumer in successful methods of using the product.

Various nonlimiting methods and venues for presenting the livedemonstration are disclosed below.

i) Demonstrations at the Point-of-Sale

Point-of-Sale demonstrations are demonstrations made near where wrinklecontrol compositions are sold. For instance, a nonlimiting list wheredemonstrations can be made includes airports, bus or train stations,malls, motels, hotels, on mass transportation, spas, gyms, fitnesscenters, restaurants, clothing retailers, or college campuses, whereseveral retailers nearby sell the wrinkle control composition isacceptable for the purposes of the present invention. This includesvirtual demonstrations when the point-of-sale is a virtual shoppingdestination on a computer network. Such a demonstration can occur for asingle consumer or a group of consumers. The point where the compostionis sold is preferably, but not limited to, the place at which thedemonstration will take place. Essentially, the demonstration shouldinstuct the consumer how to remove wrinkles on an actual garment and/orhousehold fabric. Point-of-sale demonstration can include demonstrationscarried out by retailers or sellers of wrinkle control compositions aswell as by the manufacturers of wrinkle compositions. Suchdemonstrations can also include video presentations.

ii) Demonstrations at Product Parties

Product parties, e.g. Tupperware™ Parties, Rubbermaid® Parties, are acost effective and efficient way to disseminate educational elements vialive demonstrations. Typically several people will attend such a productparty at the home of a friend or acquaintance, therefore, several peopleare available for a demonstration of the composition. Not to be bound bytheory, but the relaxed atmosphere of viewing the demonstration in thecompany of friends and acquaintances enhances the educational experienceand the absorption of knowledge. The atmosphere of trust embodied inhaving a family member, friend, or acquaintance sponsor thedemonstration also acts to increase the likelihood that thedemonstration of composition performance will be convincing. Such arelaxed atmosphere encourages the asking of questions and discussionthat can enhance the consumers ability to be instructed in successfulmethods of using the composition. This relaxed atmosphere alsoencourages consumers to trade ideas about how to use the composition, aswell. Small group demonstrations and discussions lend themselves well tospreading information and encouraging excitement about the saidcomposition and article of manufacture. This methodology is also usefulbecause the product demonstrations can be lengthy, in-depth, includevideo presentations and tailored to the needs of the individualconsumers.

iii) Demonstrations Via Level Marketing Organizations

Multi-level marketing or organizations which are based on building anetwork of distributors, such as AmWay®, is an acceptable and useful wayto disseminate information concerning the use of wrinkle controlcompositions. Such organizations are advantageous for disseminatinginformation because a broad group of distributors and sales peopleattend product shows and become educated first hand on productperformance and use. Such product shows are a useful place to provideproduct demonstrations and disseminate information in association withsaid compositions of the present invention. Once distributors and salespeople are trained to demonstrate the wrinkle control compositions andare acquainted with the information to be provided in association withsaid composition and articles of the present invention, this group ofpeople can train their own distributors and sales force by doing productdemonstrations and disseminating information. In organizations dependingon methods and devices such as level multi-level marketing anddistributor networks, many of the networks are built through personalfriends, neighbors and acquaintances which brings a level of trust thataids in instructing consumers on how to achieve improved performance andin convincing the consumers that product performance is authentic. Thismethod of disseminating educational elements effectively combines thebenefit of a trained group of demonstrators with trust inherent inpersonal relationships to provide convincing demonstrations of productperformance. This methodology is also valuable because productdemonstration can be lengthy, in-depth, include video presentations, andtailored to the needs of the individual consumers.

iv) Door-to-Door Sales

Door-to-Door sales as done by corporations like Avon Inc. are a good wayto prvoide information directly to the consumer. During the sales call,the sales representative has a unique opportunity to discuss thecomposition and how to improve the performance of wrinkle controlcompositions, and to incorporate the use of such compositions into theirdaily routine. During the time afforded by the sales call, the salesrepresentative will have an opportunity to provide preferredcombinations of presentations e.g. live demos combined with videopresentations and other types of presentations. Door-to-door sales canbe highly effective in instructing the consumer in successful methods ofusing the compositon and also in tailoring educational elements to theconsumers' daily habits and lifestyle needs since the consumer and thesales representative have time together to discuss the consumer'slifestyle. The consumer will have opportunities to ask questions to helpwith their understanding of the performance of the said composition aswell as methods of use. Also, advantageously, the consumer can presentreal-life examples for on-the-spot, relevant demonstrations which shouldprove even more convincing than demonstrations on fabrics the salesrepresentative might choose. While door-to-door sales is typically notan efficient method of broadly disseminating information, it is a highlyeffective method of communication due to the opportunity to spend aneffective amount of time with the consumer.

v) Demonstrations at Special Events

Special events (e.g. concerts, festival, fairs, fashion shows, productshows, political events, sports events, graduations, book tours, poetryreadings, art shows, movie, theater and restaurant openings) areacceptable venues for dissemination of information to the consumer. Suchspecial events have the advantage of providing the flexibility to reacha large group of people while simultaneously interacting with smaller orone-on-one selections of consumers from the larger group. Special eventsalso provide opportunities for promotional activities and demonstrationsto surrogates as describe below.

vi) Demonstrations for Club Groups and Associations

National and regional club groups and associations e.g. groups thatbring persons together who serve special interests or hobbies areacceptable venues for disseminating information. Presentations at clubgroups meet the need of giving effective demonstrations to small andlarge groups of people and can also provide a venue for consumers to askspecific questions to help the presentation and demonstration to theirspecific habits and lifestyles.

Some nonlimiting examples of club groups include groups based on sharedwork interests e.g. Association of American Business Clubs (ABUCS),American, American Medical Association, National Federation of YoungFarmer; political groups e.g. College Democrats of America, The CollegeRepublicans; student groups, e.g. fraternities, sororities; clubs basedon ethnic, gender, or demographic similarities, e.g. Egyptian StudentAssociation, National Association for the Advancement of Colored People(NAACP), American Association of Retired People (AARP), NationalOrganization of Women (NOW), Ireland-Japan Friendly Club; and hobygroups e.g. National University of Singapore Taekwondo, United StatesChess Federation, American Bonsai Society, United Kingdom Radio Society,Foreign Correspondents Club of Japan, Russian Motorcycle and SidecarOwners Association of Australia, and Moscow City Golf Club.

vii) Encouraging Friend-to-Friend Demonstrations of Product Performanceand Dissemination of Educational Elements

Encouraging friends to disseminate information to the consumerconcerning wrinkle control compositions via convincing livedemonstrations instructions in successful use of the product as well asother optional educational elements and/or via various other methods ofpresentation are effective, efficient, and affordable. Encouragingfriends to do live demonstrations for friends and neighbors anddisseminate information is also especially effective because there is anelement of trust in the relationship that contributes to effectivecommunication of the benefits and educational elements. The act ofencouraging friends to demonstrate to friends and neighbors can beaccomplished in a variety of ways including, but not limited to offeringtangible rewards (e.g. monetary remuneration, promotional offers, gifts,products, or coupons) as well as non-tangible rewards (e.g. providingrecognition or opportunities to increase prestige). People who are knownto embrace new product offerings and desire to disseminate thisinformation to their friends (a group often know as ‘early adopters’)can be given convincing live demonstrations and instructed in successfulmethods of use which essentially accomplishes the dual tasks of raisingproduct value in the mind of the that particular consumer and alsoteaching that particular consumer how to appropriately disseminatedinformation concerning wrinkle control compositions to others.

Consumers who will demonstrate for others can also be givenpresentations of educational elements on various media (e.g. video tape,compact disk) and also coached on benefits of the compositions inaddition to wrinkle control (e.g. fresh odor, rewear opportunitites) toensure that they give effective demonstrations and presentations. Thesepresentational and demonstrations preferably comprise convincing otherconsumers of product performance, instructing other consumers insuccessful methods of use, as well as other educational elements andcombinations of educational elements and in providing presentations thatpreferably appeal to the multiple senses and combine variouspresentation approaches. For some consumers the prestige associated withbeing the first to use a product and be the knowledgeable person whoteaches friends about the product is enough incentive to encourage themto teach friends about the product. Such a segment of consumers is oftencall ‘the early adopters’. To facilitate the process by which ‘earlyadopters’ will teach friends and neighbors to use the product and tofuel the incentive of ‘early adopters’ to do so, it is useful toidentify a group of people fitting the ‘early adopter’ profile and toprovide them with product samples and educational materials, beforethese become widely available so that they perceive themselves to haveunique and exclusive knowledge that they will be anxious to share withtheir friends and neighbors.

b) Demonstrations for Surrogates

For the purposes of this invention, a surrogate will take the place ofthe consumer and will be an individual that the consumer identifieswith. There will be many instances in which the demonstration of thewrinkle control composition will be given to the surrogate in the placeof the consumer. Preferably the surrogate will demonstrate a sense ofexcitement, amazement, and desire for the composition as well a otherpositive emotions linked with the product. The surrogate could either beor represent a real consumer or the surrogate can be well-knowncelebrity or a person that is trusted by a wide group of consumers.Optionally, surrogates can be chosen to capture the interest of specificsegments of the consumer population, particularly the non-traditionalsegments and this optional approach has the advantage of fitting in wellwith a program aimed at tailoring the dissemination of information tothe consumer or a specific group of consumers. Some typical butnonlimiting surrogates demonstrations might include a presentation on atalk show to a host, such as Jay Leno or Oprah Winfrey or a presentationat a show or concert to a popular performer or performance group such asN-Sync. Another approach to surrogate demonstrations is to have a famouspersonality trained to provide demonstrations either for other famouspersonages or for consumers and/or surrogate consumers orrepresentations of consumers.

i) Personality and Talk Shows

Personality and talk shows typically incorporate one or multiple host(s)and/or hostess(es) that interview people. These typically reach largeaudiences and are an efficient route to disseminating informationbroadly in a cost effective manner. Talk show hosts and/or hostessesoften become well-known and respected celebrities in their own right andtherefore, become highly preferred choices to provide a surrogateexperience for the consumer in the viewing audience. Persons that thehost and/or hostess are interviewing can often make suitable surrogatesas well and are often suitable for including in the surrogatedemonstration experience for the audience. Some nonlimiting examples ofcurrently relevant, highly recognizable, and respected host(s) and orhostess(es) include, Oprah Winfrey, of the Oprah Winfrey Show, Jay Lenoof the Tonight Show, Martha Stewart on Martha Stewart Living EmerilLagasse of Emeril and Emeril Live, Mary Hart, Bob Boen, etc. ofEntertainment Tonight. While the visual experience is preferably, audioexperiences, e.g. radio, compact disk, etc. are also acceptable for thepresent invention as a method of disseminating information effectivelyand efficiently.

ii) Performance-Based Shows

Suitable surrogates, in the form of current, relevant, well-known, andrespected celebrities are often part of a special events. Somenonlimiting examples of special events include concerts, book tours,poetry readings, sports events, fashion shows, etc. Such events provideuseful forums for surrogate demonstrations that are efficient and costeffective way since these forums reach a multitude of consumerssimultaneously. Such events can be live, in the sense that consumers arepresent at the events in person and/or the events can broadcast via amultitude of mass media and/or prerecorded via a variety of recordingmedia—records, tapes, radio, compact disks, video tapes, movies.

iii) Advice and Self-Improvement Presentations

Advice-Based presentations include presentations giving the consumerlifestyle advice, advice on how to improve their quality of life, etc.Some currently relevant, non-limiting examples of such presentationswould include Martha Stewart's Martha Stewart Living, Fashion Emergency,Homes with Style, and Shabby Chic all on E!, Richard Simmons exercisevideos, Body Shaping, Fitness Beach, and CoEd Training all on FitTV theFitness Network, Alive! with Joyce Resin, Power House presented byAlliant Energy, and BBC Home and Garden. Such presentations can beprovided via a variety of media, presentations before live audiences,and virtual websites being the most typical but nonlimiting.

iv) Game Shows

Game shows are also an acceptable venue for giving demonstrations anddisseminating information to consumers via surrogates. Game show hostsare often well known and trusted by consumers. Additionally, game showshave the advantage of providing an opportunity for raising the wrinklecontrol composition awareness by showcasing new and innovative productsboth by sponsoring the program as well as offering wrinkle controlcompositions as game show prizes. The Price is Right, Wheel of Fortune,Who Wants to be a Millionaire, Win Ben Stein's Money, Rock and RollJepordy on MTV, Cooking for Love with Thea Andrews on WTN, TorontoCanada, Ready Set Cook! with Sissy Biggers on the Food Network, HollwoodSquares, Double Dare 2000 on Nickelodeon Network, are all nonlimitingexamples of currently relevant game shows.

c) Combinations of Demonstrations

Combinations of demonstrations are most effective for rapidly diffusingthe information to the broadest group of consumers and also targetingspecific segments of consumers. A highly preferred combination includesa live demonstration together with a video presentation that is at leastabout 30 seconds long, but preferably greater than 30 seconds long andcomprising information to convince the consumer of authentic productperformance and/or instructing the consumer in successful methods ofusing the product. Combining demonstrations also achieves the purposesof increasing consumer awareness of the wrinkle care products in manysegments including the non-traditional segments and also reinforces theeducational knowledge in the consumers' minds.

2. Consumer Testimonials and Tailoring Educational Elements to SpecificConsumer Groups

Consumers, especially non-traditional consumers, place higher value onproducts that are endorsed by other consumers, even when these consumersare strangers to them. Any consumer is seen as an advocate for allconsumers and therefore can surprisingly increase the value of a productby offering their endorsement or testimonial. This is especiallyimpactful for non-traditional consumer of fabric care products, becausethese consumers surprisingly have difficulty imagining themselvessuccessfully using a fabric care product. When a role model with asimilar background and lifestyle is presented endorsing the product andpreferably also disseminating information concering the authenticity ofproduct performance or instructions for using the product successfully,the consumers are much more likely to value the product.

For some aspects of the present invention, it is preferable to tailorthe dissemination of information so that it is directed to certainsegments of the population. Tailoring dissemination of informationsurprisingly helps consumers to understand and accept how a product fitsinto their daily habits and lifestyle and thus increases purchase andrepurchase rates. Some nonlimiting examples of tailoring educationalelements include, for instance, apartment dwellers and consumers wholive in small domiciles benefit from education teaching them how to usethe product when only small areas of space are available for linedrying, hanging, spreading, and storing clothes. Consumers who embraceironing appreciate education on how to use this product in combinationwith the iron to remove wrinkles better than steam irons and also leavefabrics soft to the touch (in contrast to starch); consumers who arephysically challenged (e.g. people with visual impairments benefit mostfrom specific audio presentations; college students, busy adults, andyounger people and young adults who don't normally have time or find thetime to place clothes in an arrangement that prevents wrinkling or don'thave easy access to the equipment for the traditional laundry processbenefit from educational elements teaching them to use the product onclothes that are wrinkled from improper storage e.g. storing clothes inpiles; fabrics kept in the dryer too long after the drying cycle hasfinished; fabrics stored in compressed conditions, comprising trunks,suitcases, clothing valets, drawers, tight closets, tight armoires,stored without folding or hanging, fabrics left in a laundry basket;fabrics laundered with spin cycle set at high, fabrics washed in veryhot water or dried under very hot conditions and combinations thereof.

3. Sensory Media Presentations

Sensory media presentations include all types of presentations andadvertisements that can be experienced through the five senses includingsight, sound, touch, smell, and taste or through virtual stimulation ofthese senses. Surprisingly, the most appealing demonstrations of thewrinkle control product for consumers are those that interact withand/or engage as many of the senses as possible. Presentations includingsight, sound, touch, and smell are preferred for the present invention,but taste is not specifically excluded as a potentially useful sense toengage. In addition, sensory media presentations may also provide directinteraction between a demonstrator or presenter and consumers. Likewise,sensroy media presentations can be recorded and broadcast repeatedly andas widely as desired. The sensory presentations used in the methods ofthe present invention will preferably be greater than about 30 sec.,more preferably greater than about 60 sec. even more preferably greaterthan about 90 sec. and most preferably greater than about 120 sec. inlength.

Sensory media presentations provide an extremely efficient andaffordable way to disseminate educational elements to the consumer.Sensory media presentations can also be tailored to specific consumergroups so that they have greater impact on the consumer. When sensorymedia presentations are used, the presentation is typically at leastabout 30 seconds, preferably at least about 45 seconds, more preferablyat least about 60 seconds, even more preferably at least about 90seconds and most preferably 120 seconds. On the other hand, sensorymedia presentations can often be quite costly, especially when broadcastwidely, and time often becomes an economic issue, such that it sometimesnecessary and acceptable, for some aspects of the present invention, toprovide a sensory media presentation that is typically less than about30 seconds, but preferably greater than about 5 seconds, more preferablygreater than about 10 seconds and most preferably greater than about 15seconds.

Video presentations, especially in combination with live demonstrations,provide a highly convincing and exciting experience for the consumerthat dramatically increases the value of wrinkle controllingcompositions and significantly increases their intent to purchase. Thereare, however, cost, time, and efficiency barriers that prevent providinga live demonstration and video presentations longer than about 30seconds to every consumer interested in using the composition.Therefore, alternate methods for disseminating educational elements thatare effective, affordable, and time efficient are also disclosed as partof the methods of the present invention. These can include shorter videopresentations of equal to or less than about 30 secs, preferably lessthan about 15 seconds, more preferably less than about 10 seconds andmost preferably less than about 5 seconds when cost effectiveness of thevideo presentation is an issue.

a) Electronic Media

Electronic media covers a plurality of means to communicate includingall communication tools that operate via electronic means and/orelectromagnetic radiation. Electronic media is a very efficient tool fordisseminating educational elements to a broad number of consumers.Electronic media is also extremely useful for reaching non-traditionalconsumers to heighten their awareness of the product.

i) Television

Television is a preferred electronic medium for disseminatingeducational elements due the fact that television reaches a large numberof consumers through a wide variety of programming, thus reaching manydifferent consumer segments. Also, since television is awell-established medium, the consumer segments being reached bydifferent programming are often well understood making television anideal medium for targeting specific and often, non-traditional consumersegments. Television can also encompass a variety of programming formatsincluding, but not limited to, entertainment in the form of comedies,drama, also info-mercials, commercials, talk shows, informational shows,sports, and all manner of special interest programming (e.g. home care,cooking, fashion, history, travel). Use of the product as part ofprogramming not necessarily sponsored or funded by the productmanufacturer (e.g. within the ‘script’ of a entertain program orpresented as part of a talk show) as well as in commercialadvertisements are acceptable methods of disseminating information tothe consumer. Again it is most preferred to dissseminate informationdirected at convincing the consumer of authentic product performance orinstructing the consumer of successful methods for using the product.When television is used, it is preferred that audio as well as visualcontent is presented, but in some aspects of the invention it isacceptable to present visual or audio elements alone. Informercials arean especially preferred format for disseminating educational elementsassociated with the composition and articles of the present invention,because info-mercials are typically greater in length than about 30seconds and these are efficient at reaching a wide variety of consumersand also these formats typically include product education.

ii) Computer Links

Providing computer links via computer-based networks, a nonlimitingexample of which is the global computer network, to sites (e.g. webpages, web pages) is an efficient, effective, and cost affordable methodfor disseminating information to the consumer. A benefit of usingcomputer links is the extreme breadth of reaching consumers and theextreme versatility for disseminating information, including, but notlimited to, the ability to give the consumers access to the informationfrom anywhere a computer link is available. Consumers are presently ableto access such networks from their homes or via satellite networkingfrom portable devices. Another benefit of using computer links is theopportunity to provide multimedia presentations that allow the consumerto interact effectively and the ability to update and change theinformation constantly in order to keep it current, relevant, andmeaningful as products and consumer needs change. Finally, the abilityto probe the consumer database as the consumer interacts with apresentation or demonstration such that these elements can be furtherrefined and focused for specific consumer segments, to capture theattention of specific segments through advertising on web sites andlinks of interest to those consumer segments.

It is preferred to engage as many senses as possible when disseminatinginformation via the computer link by incorporating audio-visual elementsand animated presentations. Ideally, a virtual experience is providedthat is as near to reality as possible. In this way, the computer can beused to provide a demonstration that is as near to a ‘live’demonstration as a consumer could get without being in the presence of apresenter. This virtual demonstration can effectively disseminateinformation to convince the consumer of the authentic productperformance and instructing the consumer in successful methods of usingthe product. It is preferred that the presentation be interactive toallow consumer to interactively learn how to the information to bepresented to their own daily habits and lifestyles. Typically,frequently asked questions (FAQS) and answers to can be available on thelink. It is preferred that presentations of product effectiveness oncomputer links be at least animated and for these animations to be asrealistic as possible so as to offer this as a surrogate demonstrationincluding demonstrations to both celebrities and typical consumers oreven have demonstrations by consumers.

It is suitable and preferable to use the site to provide consumertestimonials particularly when these testimonial contain informationconcerning product uses to other consumers. It is preferably forconsumer testimonials to be at least animated, and even more preferably,for these testimonials to be video taped. It is preferred that links andaddresses directing consumers to links with educational information bewidely available to the public and published everywhere advertising forthe product occurs e.g. on television, at point-of-sale, on product, onproduct labeling, on billboards, etc. Websites for other purposes canalso contain a link to the website for the product of the presentinvention such as the nonlimiting example of banner advertising whichwill contain a link to direct the consumer to the product site.

iii) Video Presentations

Video presentations include all presentations that can be stored ondevices that capture video images and can re-play the presentation whendesired, including the nonlimiting examples of compact disks, film,overhead projectors, and video tapes. When an video presentation is usedto disseminate information, this presentation contains audio as well asvisual content. Video presentations with visual content only, areacceptable for some aspects of the present invention. Videopresentations can be provided in a number of ways, including a videopresentation together with the product and packaging to disseminateinformation in a visual format when a consumer purchases a wrinklecontrol composition. Providing video presentations with product is aneffective way to target consumers who intend to use the product. Thevideo presentation is typically at least about 30 seconds, preferably atleast about 45 seconds, more preferably at least about 60 seconds, evenmore preferably at least about 90 seconds, and most preferably at leastabout 120 seconds in length. Because, sensory media presentations canoften be quit costly, especially when broadcast widely, it is preferredto provide a sensory media presentation that is typically less thanabout 30 seconds, but preferably greater than about 5 seconds, morepreferably greater than about 10 seconds and most preferably greaterthan about 15 seconds.

Video Presentations with Information Appended to Video Presentations forOther Purposes

Video presentations for other purposes are produced for a variety ofreasons. A few exampls include the recording of entertainment, e.g.movies, special events, exercise, video games, all manner of advice, andeducational material, which are then sold or rented to the public. Suchvideo presentations, provide an excellent and cost effective way todisseminate information concerning wrinkle control compositions to abroad number of consumers and also reaching many who may not yet havetried a wrinkle control composition such as disclosed herein. The videopresentation of usage information may be appended onto the main portionof the video presentation in much the same way as a commercial isappended into televised programming. Preferably, there will be anincentive to encourage the consumers who rent or buy the videopresentations for other purposes to view the video presentation of theeducational elements appended onto the video presentation andadditionally, it would be preferable, although not essential, if thesewas an incentive for the consumer to show the video presentation ofeducational elements to family, friends, neighbors, and acquaintances.

Video Presentations as Part of a Store display

Video presentations as part of the store display are an efficient,effective and affordable way to disseminate product usage information.Such a presentation can be long, incorporate a variety of productinformation and a plurality of uses. Advantageously, it can be leftrunning constantly by as part of a display. Such a video presentationalso accomplishes the purpose of increasing the ‘facing’ shelf space orshelf presence of the present invention, thus accomplishing the purposeof increasing the awareness of the composition in the consumers' mind.Furthermore, such presentations are effective at targeting consumerswith an interest in the product.

Interactive Video Presentations

Interactive video presentations are a highly preferred way to provide avideo presentation. In the present invention, an interactive videopresentation is one in which the consumer can interact with thepresentation to accomplish a number of purposes. Typically, thesepurposes include giving the consumer some control over the presentationand allowing the consumer to disclose information to tailor thepresentation or provide advice. A typical nonlimiting example of aninteractive video presentation is the video touch screen. One typical,but non-limiting element of control that the consumer has with videotouch screens is control over the flow of information. The consumer canchoose which categories to view and when to view these categories.Interactive videos provide a means for the consumer to tailor thepresentation to give them focused information that will allow them tobest incorporate the product into their daily habits and lifestyles.

iv) Audio Presentations

Audio presentations are also useful for disseminating information andcan be affordable and very efficient. Audio presentations are veryaffordable and very efficient. Additionally, audio presentations areuseful for providing reinforcing reminders of the product availabilityand information to direct consumers to places of purchase. Audiopresentations can be offered in the form of radio or appended ontocompact disks as well as audio tapes and recordings. Audio presentationsare also useful for inclusion in a container or packaging with a wrinklecontrol composition to disseminate information at time of purchase.Including an audio presentation in a container with the wrinkle controlproduct also accomplishes the purpose of increasing shelf space andpresence of the composition which increases the consumers' awareness ofthe product.

b) Printed Media

Print media include all media that are provided in written formpreferably together with a variety of audio-visual material andpresentations, but printed media alone is also useful for disseminatinginformation in the methods of the present invention. Print media can beprovided by traditional routes e.g., via hardcopy formats, e.g. paper orother tangible substrates via electronic medium and/or virtual routes,e.g. via television, computers, internet, and/or websites. Preferablypictorial materials are included which will aid in communicatinginformation expressed in words and graphics such as icons. Print mediaare relatively inexpensive and provide the further benefit that theythese can be tailored to focus information to meet the daily habits andlifestyles of specific consumer segments as well as targeting specificconsumer segments. Preferably, the print materials will be accompaniedby visual and/or pictorial materials that help to explain productperformance and/or instructions for use such as the nonlimiting exampleof icons. Print materials can also comprise short ‘catch phrases’ thatidentify the product.

i) Periodicals

Print materials in hardcopy or electronic periodicals (e.g. newspapers,newsletters, magazines, journals,) whether in the form ofadvertisements, articles or any other materials that communicateinformation are suitable for disseminating information in the methods ofthe present invention. A useful format is one that provides the longerthan traditional advertisements which have the appearance of an articleand are aimed at educating consumers. Preferably, pictorial content isincluded to aid in communicating the ideas and concepts presented inwords. A feature of periodicals that is highly useful for the presentinvention is that periodicals are often targeted to communicate tospecific segments of the population and the segment audience is wellunderstood. Thus, periodicals provide a favorable format for targetingconsumers, especially non-traditional consumers with educationalelements tailored to fit into their specific daily habits andlifestyles. Some non-limiting examples of harcopy and electronicperiodicals are Vogue, In Style, Glamour, Teen, People, Home & Garden,Architectural Digest, Smithsonian, Scientific American, GQ.

ii) Brochures

Brochures containing educational elements are also a useful form ofprint media for use in the present invention. Brochures can bedistributed widely to disseminate the information and are alsorelatively inexpensive. Brochures have the further advantage offlexibility, as these can suitably disseminate information in virtuallyany environment that a consumer may frequent, including atpoint-of-sale, clothing stores, group meetings, door-to-door sales,special events, restaurants, hotels and other places of lodging,bookstores, coffee houses, laundromats, drycleaning establishments, aswell as being distributed to the consumers' homes, etc. Brochures canalso be attached to wrinkle control product or included in containerscomprising wrinkle control product.

iii) Billboard Presentations

Billboards provide an acceptable method for disseminating information tothe consumer. Billboards serve the purpose of reaching a wide variety ofconsumers efficiently, effectively, and affordably. Preferably thesecontain printed, pictorial, and visual information communicatingeducational elements. Preferably these will quickly command theattention of consumers and allow them to rapidly assimilate all or aportion of the educational elements. Icons are a nonlimiting example ofvisual elements that can convey information quickly.

iv) Store Displays

Store displays often provide useful formats for disseminatingeducational elements in printed form. Preferably, these displays wouldalso be visually interesting by incorporating both pictorial, video, anddesign elements (e.g. architecture, color, etc. of the display) toheighten the consumers' awareness. As part of a store display, productinformation can be printed on the store shelf, on signage in and aroundthe winkle control compositions on aisle flags, on floor markers (e.g.mats), and stand alone displays containing product. Store displays suchas signage and floor markers that direct the consumer to wrinkle controlproducts are preferred as these also accomplish the purpose ofheightening the consumers' awareness of wrinkle control products.

v) Information Printed on the Package, the Package Container or inContact with the Package

Package labels, containers or items in contact with the package, e.g. anonlimiting example being a neck-hanger type brochure or a brochureattached to the package, are all suitable places for the disseminationof educational information. Typically this information will be availablein both printed and some other type of visual and/or pictorial style,e.g. a nonlimiting example of visual/pictorial style would be icons.Disseminating educational information on package labels, containersand/or in contact with the package all have the advantage of beingefficient, effective, and affordable.

4. Combinations Methods to Disseminate Educational Elements

Combinations of various demonstrations and presentations are preferredas being highly effective approaches to providing information concerningthe use of wrinkle control compositions to the consumer. Particularlypreferred are combinations of demonstrations of the compositions,preferably live together with video presentations. These types ofcombinations achieve the effect of reaching as many consumers aspossible since different consumers and different segments have accessand respond to different types of presentations, demonstrations andstimuli. Using combinations of demonstrations and presentations alsoachieves the purpose of reaching some consumers with product informationmore than one time. Different presentations and demonstrations act toreinforce the teaching of product usage information to the consumer andthus result in increased understanding of the wrinkle controlcompositions and their capabilities and in increased use and purchase ofthe wrinkle control products.

C. Methods for Improving Product Awareness

Wrinkle control compositions have an apparent low value in theconsumer's mind despite the fact that these compositions can providegood wrinkle control performance without the application of heat.Further, these compositions have typically been marketed as nichecompositions with specific uses, particularly for travel and within thecontext of current laundry processes. Therefore, these products havebeen targeted to a narrow group of consumers despite the fact thatwrinkle control compositions have a plethora a uses that serve everydayneeds beyond travel and that fall outside of and/or are complementary ofcurrent laundry processes. It is also clear that the consumer has failedto realize the fact that the composition is surprisingly easy forconsumers of all ages, lifestyles and abilities to use competently andsafely.

Another key surprising element is recognizing that this product can besafely and successfully used by a variety of consumers that fall outsideof the consumer typically targeted for fabric care products, namely, thefemale head of household. Marketing to the non-traditional consumer aswell as the traditional consumer dramatically increases the breath ofreach of the marketing program and consequently, the size of thebusiness. It is still more surprising to recognize that this product canbe safely used by consumers who might never or no longer be able to ironsafely or easily, such as the elderly, the physically challenged, andchildren. Targeting such groups as well as seeking their support andendorsements opens unique and surprising new markets to grow thebusiness. Non-traditional fabric care consumers surprisingly embrace thewrinkle control product since it frees them from dependence on the washprocess and/or waiting for the person who traditionally carriers out thetask. Traditional fabric care consumers as well as persons who normallydo the wash also embrace these wrinkle control compositions since theyallow others to successfully carry some of the load of caring forfabrics without worry that clothes will be damaged or injury or propertydamage will result as is the risk with ironing.

Methods that increase consumer awareness comprise at least one elementselected from the following list: 1) increasing awareness atpoint-of-sale, 2) increasing awareness electronically, 3) targetingnon-traditional consumer markets, 4) targeting non-traditionaldistribution channels, 5) rewards programs, 6) appropriate pricingstrategies, and 7) combinations of methods thereof.

1) Increasing Awareness at Point-of-Sale

Although currently marketed wrinkle control products are highperforming, these products have surprisingly low sales. Increasingconsumer awareness of the products dramatically increases the value ofthe product in the consumer's mind. Methods for increasing awareness atpoint-of-sale should comprise at least one of the elements selected fromthe following list: 1) increasing product choices and shelf presence, 2)store displays, 3) live drama, 4) seasonal promotions, and combinations.Although all methods for increasing awareness are preferred, the mosthighly preferred method for increasing awareness is to increase productchoices and shelf presence.

a) Increasing Product Choices and Shelf Presence

Since, it is helpful to market the product to a variety of consumersrather than focus marketing on the traditional female-head-of-household,it is also helpful to provide variants of the product to appeal toconsumers with differing needs. Extending product choices, makes itpossible to increase space presence and overall size of the product onshelf and thus increase the awareness of the product in the consumersmind. Offering variants also increases the overall value of the categoryin the consumers mind, thus increasing the likelihood of repurchase andincreasing the overall profit of the category.

i) Product Choices

Since wrinkle control products have multiple uses and appeal to amultitude of consumers, it is necessary to increase the number ofproduct choices is to increase the size of the business. Preferably,more than one variant of the product is available on shelf. Someexamples of variant strategies are presented below. Surprising, scentcontributes significantly to the acceptance of a product and to theconsumer's subliminal understanding of the product function, thereforegetting the perfume correct for the consumer base and matching theconsumer's subliminal understanding of product function with the rightperfume is critical to success.

Additionally, the product appeals to a much broader range of consumersthan the traditional consumer for laundry and fabric care products, andthus, it is necessary to have more than one fragrance to communicate theproduct function to the broader range of consumers.

Also, it is found that in consumer use the product has more than onefunction and even more surprising is the fact that wrinkle controlproducts are found to have uses that either fall outside of and/orcomplement typical domestic laundry processes and dry cleaningprocesses. For instance, in addition to removing wrinkles, it can beused to refresh garments for re-wear e.g. the product can removewrinkles and odors from already worn garments. In other words, lightlyworn garments can be reworn without going through the entire timeconsuming wash process. While typically the consumer will prefer alighter scent to match their subliminal understanding of thefunctionality of the product a slightly higher scent impact is helpfulin eliminating odors from previous wear e.g. smoke, food, and bodyodors. Also, a higher scent is useful in matching the consumer'ssubliminal understanding of the functionality a of re-wear product.

Consumers also surprisingly prefer different hand feels on differentfabrics. For instance, when sweaters, knits, dresses and silks aretreated with wrinkle spray, it is preferred that the hand feel begenerally towards softness, silkiness, or similar descriptors and thatthe fabric maintain its flow and soft drape; the wrinkle control productshould not only remove wrinkles, but also maintain and enhance thesoftness, silkiness, and drape of such materials. When fabrics aretightly woven cottons, dress shirts, khaki pants, heavy cotton shirts,or various formal dress items, it is desirable to have more body in thefabrics and thus the wrinkle control product should not only removewrinkles, but also impart and improve the body of the fabrics withoutmaking these fabric scratchy.

Other line extensions might include products specific to delicates, drycleanables, cottons, synthetics, or winter clothes and summer clothes.

Products with packaging variants are useful as well. For instance, toprovide the most user friendly product possible to the physicallychallenged, packaging requiring little effort to actuate the spray maybe offered.

Again in order to appeal to a larger array of consumers with differentneeds, it is necessary to offer a variety of sizes as well as refillpackages and club sizes. Additionally, this can be used to appeal topersons of different economic backgrounds.

When a number of different product types are offered, bundling can beused to connect more than one package together to increase overall sizeand awareness on shelf. For the purposes of the present invention atleast one of the bundled products must be a wrinkle control product. Theadditional product or products can comprise additional wrinkle controlcomposition or non-wrinkle control product, including the following,nonlimiting, examples, odor control spray, laundry detergent, fabricsoftener, extra packaging, a refill of wrinkle spray, or additional,packaging elements, e.g. sprayers, bottle caps. Product bundling acts toincrease the ‘facing’ or shelf space and also shelf presence of thepresent invention by increasing the amount of space the composition cancommand on the shelf.

iv) Container Enclosing Wrinkle Spray Product and Package.

For the present invention, the container is any enclosure that covers orpartially covers the wrinkle spray product and package. Containers canbe made from many materials including, but not limited to, plastic andcardboard. Containers serve many purposes, some nonlimiting examplesinclude: a way to comarket or give away devices, implements, and/oradditional items, including educational elements as described hereinabove, with the wrinkle control product that make the wrinkle sprayproduct easier, more convenient, or more acceptable for use by theconsumer. Such containers tend to increase ‘facing’ or shelf space atthe point of sale to increase consumer awareness of the product.

Educational Information

Educational information can be used both to communicate the productinformation discussed above and also to increase the size of the entirecontainer to be sold. Information included with the container can beprovided in a variety of ways including, but not limited to, visualand/or audio compact disks, visual and/or audio tapes, printed mediathat surround or partially surround the wrinkle spray package.

b) Store Displays

Store displays both increase the shelf presence of the product on andcritically move beyond the shelf to capture the consumers' awareness anddirect it to the wrinkle control products. Preferably, store displaysare interactive, interesting and compelling to the consumers' senses tokeep the consumers' attention on the product for a longer period therebyincreasing the likelihood that consumer awareness of the product willincrease. Displays preferably comprise sensory media presentations thatengage as many of the consumers' senses as possible. Interactivedisplays are also preferable as such displays can allow the consumer totailor the dissemination of information to their own daily life, habitsand preferences, thus increasing the likelihood that the consumer willappreciate the efficacy and relevancy of the product. Non-interactivedisplays are also suitable for the present invention. Some nonlimitingexamples of store displays that surprisingly increase consumer awarenessand direct it to products are disclosed herein below for use in thepresent invention.

i) Architectural Elements

Architectural elements can surround the product and draw consumerattention to the product by virtue of providing a visual discontinuityin the store shelving. Preferably, these are unique enough to cause aconsumer to look and/or remember the presence of the product and evenmore preferably to draw the consumer to the product and most preferablyto stimulate a purchase. Architectural elements can comprise a multitudeof graphical, printed, and pictorial information.

ii) Visual Media

Visual media including print and pictorial information on the shelf,around the product or somewhere in the store which preferablyidentifies, the product, leads the consumer to the product anddisseminates product information as well as any other educationalinformation useful to the consumer. These can be encompassed in signagesuch as posters, advertisement boards, aisle flags, floor mats, etc.Visual media can also be encompassed in videos run on constant loop todisseminate educational elements and/or videos that are interactive withthe consumer as well as computers that provide links to relevantinformation. Visual media can also include brochures that the consumermay take home. Preferably, print used in this displays will be largeenough to be easily read. If print is present on shelves, poster boardsor aisle flags, it is preferable for it to be large enough to be easilyread some distance away and also while the consumer is moving.

iii) Kiosks and Vending Machines

Kiosks and vending machines are small stand alone units that areindependent of stores with larger area space. Such units are typicallyideal for targeting particular consumers. The fact that these can beautomated makes them ideal for non-traditional distribution sites forfabric care product as well, such as airports, college campuses, bars,restaurants, physical fitness facilities, public restrooms, walkways inmalls, strip malls, parks, public and private facilities, recreationalcenters, community centers, etc. Kiosks and vending machines wouldpreferably have provisions for disseminating educational information.

c) Live Drama

In live drama, product awareness is created when a group of actorsperform a skit at point-of-sale. Skits also serve to surprise andentertain the consumer and therefore create higher awareness of theproduct. Preferably, skits are performed at times of peak trafficthrough the point-of-sale.

d) Seasonal Promotions

Seasonal promotions are a useful way to create awareness because thesetie the need for the product together with an event in the consumerslife. For instance, back-to-school promotions are useful for alertingparents to the opportunities to use product for children's schoolclothes and uniforms and also the opportunity to provide the product tostudents returning to college. Back-to-school promotions can alsocapture the attention of adolescent and college-age consumers who areimage conscious, but pressed for time and/or not adept at domesticprocesses.

2) Increasing Awareness Electronically

a) Marketing Via Computer Networks

Computer networks and particularly global computer networks are aninexpensive means of increasing product awareness electronically.Additionally, studies have shown that the internet and global computernetworks can reach audiences that have a lower than normal interest intraditional electronic media, such as television. A report by NielsenMedia Research entitled TV Viewing in Internet Households compiled inMay 1999 from data sources such as National People Meter data andNielsen/Net Ratings shows that homes with access to internet containlighter TV viewers. Therefore, surprisingly, computer network marketingcan be reaching consumers not necessarily engaged by televisionadvertising. Computer network marketing can take on various forms asdisclosed below. Computer network marketing is an ideal way to reachconsumers in a dynamic fashion, because it can be easily rearranged andlends itself well to seasonal promotions.

i) Homepage/Website for Product

The homepage/website for the product is a place consumers can visit tolearn more about wrinkle control composition and their use. Thisinteraction can take many forms including education, tailoredinformation and advice through virtual interaction with the consumer,virtual demontrations, instructions for use, chat rooms for consumers totrade usage tips, and a location to acquire samples, and buy product.Preferably, the home page would comprise 1) a convincing demonstrationof product performance and 2) instruct the consumer as to successfulmethods for using the product. In addition, the website can provideconsumers with information on where to buy product, other sources ofproduct information such as consumer helpline numbers, and offeropportunities for consumer to join clubs that provide incentives and tosuggest effective new ways to use the product.

ii) Advertising on the Internet Away from Homesite

Advertising on Internet away from the homesite can be accomplished viabanner advertising. Banner advertisements are those that are run on theinternet at other websites. Preferably, the banner advertisement attactsattention and is engaging and amusing. Also, preferably, the consumercan reach the home website by selecting the banner advertisement in someway for instance by clicking the banner advertisement. Comarketingwrinkle control compositions with other products on the internet is alsopossible. Preferrably, the comarketing program will provide the consumerwith ways to interact with the said composition and/or articles of useas disclosed above in section 2)a)I and/or provide a hot link to thehomesite of the said composition and/or articles of use.

iii) Viral Diffusion

When using internet marketing it is surprisingly effective todisseminate the homepage website address for the said composition onlabels, literature, billboards, point-of-sale displays, and advertisingin other forms of electronic media, e.g. radio and television.Additionally, information about products may be distributed via viraldiffusion on the internet. Viral diffusion is effectively a modern,highly efficient, electronic version of word-of-mouth advertising.Preferably, viral diffusion involves giving an incentive to consumers toencourage them to recruit other consumers to increase product awarenessby passing along information to others. Some nonlimiting examples ofinformation include a website link, a hotlink a banner advertisement, aproduct demonstration, product information, etc. Even more preferably,the content of the educational message would be closely controlled byasking consumers to diffuse a website address or hotlink that connectssubsequent consumers to a site controlled by the manufacturer so as toassure that the appropriate information is communicated. Some typicalnonlimitng examples of incentives to the consumer for diffusinginfomation include couponing, reimbursements, opportunities to enter orwin contests, entertaining messages, and free software.

iv) Club Memberships

Club memberships are an effective and low cost way to stimulate andcontinually renew interest in wrinkle control products with consumers.Club memberships invite consumers to provide information aboutthemselves such as locations where the consumer can be contacted, placeswhere information and samples can be sent to the consumer, andinformation about the consumers' background, lifestyles, andpreferences, especially as these pertain to product usage. Typically,consumers would be offered incentives to join club programs which couldcomprise many items including nonlimiting examples like education, toopportunities to join chat rooms with consumers of similar backgrounds,to free gifts and opportunities to enter contests. The process ofjoining the club or referring memberships is easy and can be offered inmany ways and places with some nonlimiting examples including online,through the mail, with packaging, or where product is sold. Preferablyclubs would capture consumer information and use this to improveeducation programs and product performance and benefits. Preferably theonline referral program is structured such that it is not recognized asSPAM by ISP's. Preferably, personal follow-up will occur with consumersso as to build a relationship between consumer and marketer and productrather than remaining limited to building a database.

b) Television and Cable Marketing

Television and cable marketing can be surprisingly effective attargeting particular audiences. Cable television in particular providestargeted programming to reach specific consumer groups. Research fromgroups like Nielsen Media Research provide useful guidance in selectingprogramming to target specific consumers.

c) Datacasting

Datacasting respresents combinations of internet and digitalbroadcasting to provide a combined presentation of both digital andinternet marketing as done by Capitol Broadcasting and DTV Plus inRaleigh, N.C. and Clear Channel in Cincinnati, Ohio as nonlimitingexamples.

3) Targeting Non Traditional Consumer Segments

Media directed towards adolescents, men, college students,professionals, etc.

a) Targeting Electronic Media

Internet reaches a large group of consumers that are not necessarilyaccessed by television. Internet tends to be more prevalent and/or moreused in higher income homes. Homes that have household members that usethe internet surprisingly tend to view less television. Therefore, it issurprisingly effective to advertise and maintain a homepage on theinternet for consumers who access internet, since they will not likelybe reached by other means. Over 60 million persons in the U.S. use theinternet at least once per month and are considered active users.

Also, the content of internet sites can be highly targeted whilesimultaneous reach a broad selection of the targeted group. Advertisingon certain sites can be used to attract various target customers such asthe following nonlimiting examples: for college studentswww.collegescholarships.com, and www.virtualbook.com, for adolescents toyoung adults, especially, but not limited to males, the Croft Times atwww.ctimes.net, for young and adolescent women, www.fashionTV.com, forbusy working parents, www.signleparentdad.com,www.singleparents.net/sponsors.html, www.normotc.com (NationalOrganization Mother's of Twins, Inc.)

b) Comarketing

Comarketing is a useful way of reaching consumers both in thetraditional target audience as well as consumers outside of this targetaudience. Comarketing can occur with any other marketing entity, virtualas well as non-virtual. Comarketing usually involves multiple businessentities working together to make consumers aware of how their products,services, or other offerings can be used together to provide asynergistic benefit for the consumer. Some nonlimiting examples ofcomarketing programs useful in the present invention follow. Comarketingcould occur with an organization like Tupperware, whereby Tupperware maymake an appliance, such as a laundry basket with a special holder forwrinkle spray products and then the wrinkle spray product and thelaundry basket could be sold and/or promoted together. Stores, outlets,websites and other distribution sites that offer products and help fordesigning and organizing the home could provide equipment for enhancingthe process of treating clothes and the perfomance of wrinkle spraycould be promoted and/or sold together with the wrinkle spray andorganization equipment. A wrinkle composition and iron designed to worktogether optimally could be promoted and/or sold together. Wrinklecompositions could be promoted in stores that specialize in clothesbenefiting from this product such as Banana Republic, Lerners of NewYork, Lazarus, Parisian, Elder Berman, Sacs Fifth Avenue, BabySuperStore, etc. In department stores, and superstores such as Target,Walmart, J. C. Penney, Biggs, Meijer, where clothing is sold as well asconsumer products, the wrinkle composition can be stocked both nearclothes that can benefit from product use as well in consumer productailses. Product could be comarketed with luggage to increase awarenesswith travelers.

c) Sponsoring Organizations

Sponsoring organizations such as charities, clubs, organizations, andscholarships is a good way to increase product awareness and can beespecially useful in targeting particluar groups of consumers, sinceorganizations themselves are typically targetted towards particulargroups of the population. Some nonlimiting examples of organizationsthat target particular consumers include the following: for the fashionindustry and young professionals, especially women, there are pageantscholarships such as the Miss Texas Scholarship Pageant, NubianInternational, Inc., Miss America Scholarship Pageant, Seneca College'sFashion Merchadising and Retail Scholarship (which may also provideopportunities for comarketing since other groups including, but notlimited to, The Gap, The Bay, and Tommy Hilfiger sponser thisscholarship). To increase product awareness among young professionals,sponsoring scholarships for professional training are useful and somenonlimiting examples include The U.S. Marine Corp. Scholarship Fund, TheThurgood Marshall Scholarship Fund, Technical Women's OrganizationScholarship; and The Actuarial Scholarship Fund. Organizations that canbe sponsored and target to the non-traditional handicapped consumerinclude the following nonlimiting examples: The Special Olympics,Clarinda M. Brueck Handicapped Athletic Fund; Richard Newhope Center;Disability Services, Inc.; American Association for People withDisabilities. Especially busy consumers can be targetted by sponsoringsuch nonlimiting organizations as The National Organization of Mother ofTwins Clubs; Single Parent Suppor Group (Sponsor's page found at thefollowing website http://www.singleparents.net/sponsors.html). Generalaudiences can be targeted with performances, sporting events, andpolitcal rallies or gatherings.

d) Endorsements

Seeking endorsements especially from organizations that reach thenon-traditional consumer of fabric treatment products is a desirable wayto increase product awareness. Some nonlimiting examples of preferredgroups to target include the elderly (for example through AARP), thephysically challenged (for example through the American Association forPeople with Disabilities), frequent travelers (for example through AAA),and groups advocating child safety.

4) Targeting Non-Traditional Distribution Channels.

To make the product very successful it must be widely available.Typically, fabric care goods are directed, marketed and placed indistribution channels directed at the Female-Head-of-Household. In orderto increase the succes of the product, it is necessary to make theproduct available at points-of-sale useful to other consumers as well.Such points-of-sale can be tangible or virtual. Some nonlimitingexamples of these points-of sale include: college bookstores, stores andconvenience stores immediately surrounding college campuses, andwebsites directed at college students (Virtualbook.com) which are oftenfrequented by younger adults including single adults; websites,catalogues, and other distribution routes and points-of-sale offeringgift boxes for various occasions, e.g. gift boxes for students leavinghome to go to school, gift boxes for people new to a neighborhood(welcome wagon), airports (especially shops and lounges) frequented bytravelers, specialty stores, magazines, businesses, and websitesdirected towards travelers, video arcades which are often frequented byadolescents, clothing and specialty stores, magazines, and websites,directed at adolescents (Banana Republic, Champagne International). Atsites where equipment for organizing the household, closets, and laundryroom are sold (e.g. Lechters, HomeDepot, Lowe's, The Container Store)which would capture the attention of males as well as females.

5) Rewards Programs

Rewards programs involve giving the consumer an incentive to initiate orto continue to use the product. Some examples of reward programs includeS&H greenpoints and frequent flyer miles. By analogous extension, aprogram could be initiated for frequent buyers and users of wrinklecontrol products to reinforce incorporation in daily fabric care habits.

6) Appropriate Pricing Strategies

There are wrinkle control products that perform satisfactorily in themarket today that could provide everyday convenience and freedom fromtraditional wash process and ironing, but these are not large thrivingmarkets because consumers reserve these for special use, if these arepurchased at all. Pricing surprising plays a significant role inconverting these high performing products from niche, special occasionuse products, to everyday convenience products. Typically to convert thebusiness to a thriving everyday use market, products should be pricedsuch that these are less than about 11.00 USD/500 mL of saidcomposition, more preferably less than about 8.00 USD/500 mL of saidcomposition, even more preferably less than about 5.00 USD/500 mL andmost preferably less than about 4.00 USD/500 mL of said composition.Alternately, driving the pricing too low surprisingly convincesconsumers that the product must be low in active levels and thereforeineffective and so it is preferred to maintain a pricing of greater thanabout 1.00 USD/500 mL of said composition.

7) Combinations of Methods for Improving Product Awareness Combinationsthereof of methods for imrpoving product awareness are preferred andhighly effective.

EXAMPLES OF INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE FOR CONSUMERS

The following provides some nonlimiting examples of methods formulatedas instructions for use that can be provided as written instructions,video instructions, and/or live or virtual demonstrations to consumerseither as part of an article of manufacture comprising a wrinkle controlcomposition or independent of the wrinkle control composition as amethod of educating the consumer, disseminating educational elements,and/or raising consumer awareness related to wrinkle control products.

Example 1

Example 1 teaches the consumer to treat a shirt using a ‘hang and spray’methodology. The consumer is instructed in methods as follows. Hang theshirt up (or suspend the shirt in some other way, such as pinning to aclothesline). If desired, a towel can be placed on the floor to catchany composition that falls on the floor, such as over sprays. Also, ifdesired, the shirt can be hung in the bathroom and sprayed over the tubto catch over spray. If the tub is used to catch over spray, it shouldbe rinsed after use to prevent accidental slipping. Pick up the wrinklecontrol composition and set the triggering mechanism to the open or onposition. Hold the sprayer 8-9 inches from the front of the shirt. Spraythe shirt from top to bottom in a sweeping motion using 8-9 full strokesfrom the wrinkle spray package. Sleeves and collars receive 1-2 fullstrokes from the wrinkle spray package. The shirt should appear damp,but not wet. Grab the shirt with both hands at the top and at the bottomand gently give a few quick horizontal tugs, preferably at least three,tugging at both sides of the shirt and in the middle. Next grab shirtwith both hands at the sides and near the sleeves and gently give a fewquick vertical tugs, preferably at least three, tugging at the top ofthe shirt and moving down to tug in the middle of the shirt and then atthe bottom of the shirt. Tug the sleeves to remove any remainingwrinkles. Smooth the collars by sliding between the fingers to press thearea. Smooth any areas that remain wrinkled with hands or finger tips.

Example 2

Example 2 teaches consumers to smooth wrinkles out of garments orfabrics as these is sit on a surface that is preferably flat andpreferably horizontal. Place a towel or other item on the site where thefabric will be sprayed, to catch over spray, if desired. If desired, atowel or other item can also be placed on the floor to catch over spray.Spread the fabric onto the flat surface. Pick up the wrinkle controlcomposition and set the triggering mechanism to the open or on position.Hold the sprayer 8-9 inches from the front of the fabric. Spray theproduct over the surface using a sweeping motion. Typically, it isuseful to start at the top of the fabric and spray across the fabric ina sweeping motion and then gradually move down to the bottom of thefabric. While sweeping across the fabric, one full stroke from thesprayer should be administered at least at about every six inches. Thefabric should appear damp but not wet. To smooth, slide hands over theshirt using light pressure. If needed the fabric can be tugged to removeremaining wrinkles. If some wrinkles are not easily removed, spray thesesites again, concentrating more of the wrinkle control composition onthese sites and tug preferably both perpendicularly to and parallel tothe wrinkle. If the fabric has creases that are desired to remain in thefabric (e.g. pleats, or the crease in the front of the pants) these canbe reinforced by pinching these between the fingers and pulling thefingers along the pleat or crease. Leave the fabric flat or hang to dry.

Example 3

Example 3 is intended to teach consumers to treat household fabrics intheir typical environment. After the household fabric is washed orwhenever it becomes wrinkled through use, the wrinkle control spray canbe used to remove wrinkles while the household fabric remains in itstypical environment. This saves the time of removing the householdgarment from its typical environment and finding someplace else to treatthe household fabric that has enough space to make the processconvenient. Curtains can be treated while these hang on the wall. Firstclose the curtains. Next set the wrinkle composition sprayer to open oron. Spray composition on the curtains using full strokes. Start at thetop and sweep the spray downward spraying at least at each six inchinterval and then move horizontally to the next part of the curtainspraying in a sweeping motion up and down the curtain until the entirecurtain is treated. Alternately, start at the top of the curtain andspray horizontally across the curtain using a sweeping motion, andspraying with full strokes at least at every six inches and movedownward spraying in a sweeping motion across the curtain horizontallywhile moving downward toward the bottom of the curtain. The curtainshould appear damp, but not wet. Pull large wrinkles out of the curtainsand allow curtains to hang on rods while these dry. For heavier curtainswhich require more than about 30% by weight of a wrinkle compositionthat contains at least about 50% water it may be necessary to removecurtains from rods to treat these as the increased weight whencomposition. Reasonable care should be exercised to prevent over spray,but if over spray occurs, it should be wiped up after use. If over spraydoes remain on the surface and dry, it can be removed with water. Asimilar process of treating household fabrics in their environment canbe employed with bed spreads, table clothes, pillowcases, showercurtains, etc. When the surfaces associated with or part of theenvironment of that is the typical environment of the household fabricare easily damaged by water or liquids (e.g. wood) reasonable careshould be exercised to prevent over dampening the household fabrics andthereby dampening the surfaces in the environment of the householdfabric.

III. Article of Manufacture

The present invention also encompasses articles of manufacturecomprising (1) a container having spray dispensing means, (2) a wrinklecontrol composition, and (3) optionally, but preferably, informationconcerning the use of the composition to remove and/or control wrinklesin fabrics. A variety of containers, compositions, and information canbe utilized in the present articles of manufacture as describedhereinafter.

In a second embodiment, the articles of the present invention cancomprise (1) a packaged aqueous wrinkle control composition, and (2) aset of associated instructions that includes an instruction to controland/or remove wrinkles from fabric in an energy conserving mannerthrough the use of the aqueous composition as described above. A varietyof compositions, packaging and information can be utilized in thearticles of the present invention.

A. Containers/Packaging Providing Spray Pattern

The key parameter effective in minimizing staining and reducing dry timeis in achieving a uniform distribution of the liquid composition overthe surface area of the fabric. Therefore, containers having spraydispensing means that will provide such a uniform spray distribution arepreferred. The spary dispensing means will include dispensers selectedfrom the group consisting of pump sprayers, aerosol sprayers, triggersprayers, pre-compression sprayers and non-manual power sprayers.Although less preferred, aerosol dispensers may be used in the articlesof the present invention.

The uniformity of the distribution is understood to mean the volume ofproduct dispensed per unit of surface area and the standard deviation inthe volume deposited per unit of surface area. It is preferred that thespray dispenser selected for use in the methods of the present inventionbe capable producing an acceptable spray pattern that falls within thelimits on volume of product dispensed per unit area and on the standarddeviation in volume per unit surface area disclosed herein. Preferredsprayers will provide a spray pattern with a volume per unit surfacearea of less than about 0.07 ml/inch² (0.011 ml/cm²) with a standarddeviation in the volume per unit surface area of less than about 0.056ml/inch² (0.0087 ml/cm²).

Examples of suitable spray dispensers that provide the desired spraypattern that are commercially available include, but are not limited to,the Indesco T-8500 available from Continental Sprayers Inc. and TS-800-2and TS-800-2E available from Calmar, Inc.

B. Composition

Articles of manufacture of the present invention comprise a wrinklecontrolling composition according any of the compositions describedhereinbefore in Section I.

C. Set of Instructions

The article of manufacture of the present invention also comprisesinformation concerning the use of the wrinkle control composition tocontrol wrinkles without the application of heat. It is preferred thatthe information provided with the composition comprises a set ofinstructions in association with the container, said instructionsconcerning the use the composition. The information or instructionsinforming the consumer that in order to effectively use the composition,the consumer is to apply an effective amount of the wrinkle controlcomposition to the fabrics and to physically manipulate the fabrics inorder to remove existing wrinkles from the fabrics. Other instructionscan be included in the information provided to the consumer, and thesehave been discussed in greater detail hereinabove.

As used herein, the phrase “in association with” means that the set ofinstructions is directly printed on the container and/or the packagingfor the container, or presented with the container in a separate manner,including but not limited to, a brochure, print advertisement,electronic advertisement, and/or verbal communication. The set ofinstructions preferably comprises the instruction to apply an effectiveamount of the composition, preferably by spraying, to provide theindicated benefit, e.g. wrinkle reduction, antimicrobial action, staticeffect, and/or reduction in time and/or effort of ironing and,optionally, the provision of the main effect of odor control and/orreduction.

A set of instructions is essential to obtaining the benefits of thepresent invention because consumers are unaware of such benefits. Morespecifically, consumers are not aware that the use of such a wrinklecontrol composition will reduce their consumption of energy. As such, aset of instructions provided in association with a wrinkle controlcomposition is essential for the consumer to enjoy the benefits of thepresent invention.

A preferred set of associated instructions can comprise an instructionto the consumer to the effect that the treatment of a fabric with anaqueous wrinkle control composition will reduce their consumption ofenergy, thereby improving the environmental impact of the fabric careprocess, by eliminating the need to use an iron or tumble dryer toremove wrinkles from fabric and/or by eliminating the need to laundertheir fabrics between each use. More specifically, a set of instructionsuseful in the articles of the present invention will include aninstruction to control and/or remove wrinkles in an energy conservingmanner and/or environmentally friendly manner by applying an aqueouswrinkle composition to wrinkled fabrics, manipulating the fabrics toremove wrinkles and allowing the fabrics to dry without the use of aniron or tumble dryer, preferably by air drying.

A preferred set of instructions will comprise an instruction to controland/or remove wrinkles in fabrics by substituting the use of such awrinkle control composition for the laundering and/or ironing of thefabric.

A preferred set of instructions will comprise an instruction to controland/or remove wrinkles from fabric by appling an aqueous wrinkle controlcomposition in an amount from about 5% to about 150%, preferably fromabout 10% to about 100%, and more preferably from about 20% to about 75%of the dry weight of the fabrics to be treated, manipulating the fabricand allowing the fabric to dry. The aqueous wrinkle control compositionof the present invention preferably comprises only a low level, if atall, of low molecular weight water soluble or water miscible solvent tominimize the emission of volatile organic compounds into theenvironment. It is preferable to limit the amount of such solvent in thecomposition to lower than about 15%, and preferably lower than about10%, and more preferably lower than 7%, by weight of the composition.“Environment conserving means” in this context refers to compositionsthat contain less than about 15% of such volatile organic compounds.Compositions containing more than about 15% are not considered to beEnvironment Conserving Means.

A preferred set of instructions will comprise an instruction to controland/or remove wrinkles from fabric by partially drying the wrinkledfabric in a tumble dryer, removing clothes while still damp and/orvisually wrinkled, applying an aqueous wrinkle composition to thewrinkled fabrics, manipulating fabrics to remove wrinkles and allowingthe fabrics to dry without the use of an iron or further use of a tumbledryer.

A preferred set of instructions will comprise an instruction to controland/or remove wrinkles from fabric by applying an aqueous wrinklecomposition to wrinkled fabric, manipulating the fabric to removewrinkles and spot ironing any wrinkles that might remain in the fabric.

It is preferred that the set of instructions comprises a recommendationand/or endorsement from a government agency, non-profit organization,utility service provider, and the like. By way of example, the U.S.Department of Energy evaluates the energy efficiencies of variousproducts, and labels those that provide certain levels of energy savingswith its ENERGY STAR mark. It is preferred that the set of instructionscomprises an instruction indicating an endorsement from the U.S.Department of Energy. Similarly, it is envisioned that utility serviceproviders will endorse and recommend to its customers various ways inwhich to reduce their energy consumption, including the usage of wrinklecontrol compositions to reduce the energy consumed in laundering clothesand other fabrics. Such endorsements and/or recommendations can beprovided with the set of instructions association with wrinkle controlcompositions, or can be distributed directly by an entity such as autility service provider to their customers. Further, it is envisionedthat cooperative arrangements may be established between manufacturersand utility service providers for the distribution of such endorsementsand recommendations in communications to the consumer from the utilityservice provider, such as the customer's monthly bill.

It is also preferred that the associated instructions compriseinformation concerning the amount of energy that is conserved bycontrolling fabric wrinkles through the use of these aqueous wrinklecontrol compositions, relative to the use of ironing and/or tumbledrying to control fabric wrinkles.

As used herein, “laundering” means any cleaning and/or refreshingprocess or procedure wherein the subject fabric is wetted with anaqueous composition either by immersion, dipping or by spray-onapplication and then dried. A typical laundering process cycle willinclude washing and rinsing the fabrics either by hand or in a manual orautomated machine and then drying. However, a laundering process cycleshould not be construed to exclude processes that do not require thewashing and rinsing of the fabric.

The set of instructions associated with the use and/or energy conservingand/or environment conservation benefits of the wrinkle controlcomposition, article and/or method of the present invention can beprovided via different means using a variety of media includingelectronic or print or a combination thereof. Perhaps in the mostconvenient and direct manner, the wrinkle control composition will bemarketed in a package and the set of instructions will be provided withthe package, printed directly on the package label, on an informationsheet provided with the package and/or on point of sale materials.Similarly, the set of instructions can be recorded in various electronicor computer readable forms and provided with the composition package.

It is also preferred to provide the instructions associated with the useand/or benefits of the wrinkle control composition, article, and/ormethod of the present invention via the mass media, such as the printmedia and/or the electronic media. Print media include, e.g.,newspapers, magazines, journals, newsletters, brochures, billboardpresentations, store displays, and the like, in, e.g., hard copy, orvirtual, electronic format. Electronic media include means tocommunicate via electronic means and/or electromagnetic radiation, e.g.,television, radio, global computer network, and the like. Electronic orcomputer readable forms can be posted and made available to the consumerfor downloading from a website located on a global computer network.

Instructions concerning the use of a wrinkle control composition arepreferably in consumer-friendly language on packaging and/or inadvertising (e.g., leaflets, coupons, displays, etc.). Byconsumer-friendly language, it is meant that consumers would beinstructed how to use the product to achieve the best results. It isimportant that the instructions be as simple and clear as possible andit is envisioned that pictures, drawings and/or icons can be used,either with or without words to render the instructions moreconsumer-friendly. The set of instructions can be multi-lingual to bemore easily understood by consumers who speak different languages.Special packaging design can also be advantageously used to conveyinstructions in a consumer-friendly fashion.

The units of measurement provided to consumers will reflect consumerunderstanding, e.g., English dosing units will be preferred in, e.g.,the United States and the United Kingdom, and metric units will be usedin, e.g., most European nations. Although all of the compositions andmethods described herein are written in metric units, it is understoodthat these units will be converted into consumer-friendly languageinstructions in the actual product packaging, advertising etc.

IV. Related Methods

A. A Method for Providing an Energy and/or Environment Conserving Meansto Control and/or Remove Wrinkles from Fabrics

A method for providing an energy and/or environment conserving means tocontrol and/or remove wrinkles from fabrics includes the steps ofproviding a packaged aqueous wrinkle control composition and providing aset of instructions in association with the wrinkle control composition,said set of instructions comprising an instruction to apply the wrinklecontrol composition to fabric, manipulating the fabric to removewrinkles, and allowing the fabrics to dry without the use of an iron ortumble dryer. A full description of various aqueous wrinkle controlcompositions that are useful in this method as well as associatedinstructions have been detailed hereinabove and will not be repeatedhere.

B. Method of Teaching a Consumer to Conserve Energy

A method for teaching a consumer to conserve energy and/or theenvironment is also provided by the present invention. The methodcomprises the step of informing a consumer that the treatment ofwrinkled fabrics with a wrinkle control composition will enable theconsumer to conserve energy and/or the environment by eliminating theneed to use an iron to remove wrinkles from fabric and/or by eliminatingthe need to re-launder the fabric between each use. In a preferredexecution, the teaching is given via electronic and/or print media. Afull description of various aqueous wrinkle control compositions thatare useful in this method as well as associated instructions have beendetailed hereinabove and will not be repeated here.

C. Method of Promoting the Use of Wrinkle Control Compositions

A method for promoting the use of wrinkle control compositions toconserve energy and/or improve the environmental impact of a laundryprocess, the method comprising the step of informing a consumer that thetreatment of laundered fabrics with a wrinkle control composition willenable the consumer to conserve energy by eliminating the need to use aniron to remove wrinkles from fabric and/or by eliminating the need tore-launder the fabric between each use. In a preferred execution, thepromotion is given via electronic and/or print media. A full descriptionof various aqueous wrinkle control compositions that are useful in thismethod as well as associated instructions have been detailed hereinaboveand will not be repeated here.

COMPOSITIONAL EXAMPLES

The following are Examples of wrinkle controlling compositions for usewith the methods of the present invention: Examples 1 2 3 4 5Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 volatile silicone 1.0 0.5 — — —Silwet L-77 2.0 — 0.5 — — Silwet L-7657 — 1.0 0.25 — — Perfume 0.1 0.050.1 0.1 0.05 Distilled Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 6 7 8 9Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Ethanol 15% — 3% 2% Isopropanol — 12% 2%1% Perfume 0-0.04%    0-0.04%    0-0.04%    0-0.04%    Water balancebalance balance balance Compound 10 11 12 13 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt %Wt % Ethanol 15% — 3% 2% Isopropanol — 12% 2% 1% Propellant* *** *** ****** Perfume 0-0.04%    0-0.04%    0-0.04%    0-0.04%    Water balancebalance balance balance *** Propellant can be selected from a variety ofmaterials Compound 14 15 16 17 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % SH3772¹0.2%  — — — SH3748¹ — 0.3%  — — SH8700¹ — — 0.3%  — KF354² — — — 0.2% hexylene glycol 10% — — — dipropylene glycol —  5% — — 3-methoxybutanol— —  5% — ethanol — —  5% 10% perfume 0-0.02%    0-0.02%    0-0.02%   0-0.02%    water balance balance balance balance ¹Silicone-glycolcopolymer from Toray Dow Corning Silicone Co., Ltd. ²Silicone-glycolcopolymer from Shin-Etsu Chemical Co. Ltd. Compound 18 19 20 21Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Silwet ® L7602³ 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0%Isopropanol 5 — 2.5 — Hexylene glycol — 5 — 2.5% Isoprene glycol — — —2.5% Hydroxypropyl-β- — — 0.5% cyclodextrin methylated — — — 0.75% cyclodextrin Perfume 0-0.04 0-0.04% 0-0.04% 0-0.04%   Water balancebalance balance balance ³Silicone-glycol copolymer from CK-Witco.Compound 21 22 23 24 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % K-766⁴ 1.0% 0.8%0.5% 0.7    EtOH 8.0% 5.0% 5.0% 3.0% Stepanol WAC⁵ 0.5% 0.7% 0.1% Neodol25-9⁶ 0.5% — — 1.0% Neodol 23-3⁷ — — 1.0% — Perfume 0-0.1%  0-0.1% 0-0.1%  0-0.1%  Water balance balance balance balance ⁴Sodiumpolymethacrylate from B F Goodrich ⁵Sodium lauryl sulfate available fromstepanol ⁶alkyl ethoxylate with 12-15 carbons and an average of 9ethoxylates available from Shell. ⁷alkyl ethoxylate with 12-13 carbonsand an average of 3 ethoxylates available from Shell Compound 25 26 2728 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Dow Corning ® 190 0.01%   0.1%  — —Surfactant⁸ Ethanol 20% 10% 10% 20% 3M Fluorad ®⁹ — — 0.01 0.1%  Perfume0-0.1%   0-0.1%   0-0.1%   0-0.1%   Water balance balance balancebalance ⁸Silicone glycol copolymer from Dow Corning. ⁹Nonionicfluorinated alkyl ester available from 3M. Compound 29 30 31 32Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Dow Corning ® 190 0.01%   0.1%  — —Surfactant⁸ Ethanol 20% 10% 10% 20% 3M Fluorad ®⁹ — — 0.01 0.1% Propellant*** Perfume 0-0.1%   0-0.1%   0-0.1%   0-0.1%   Water balancebalance balance balance ***Propellant selected from the followingCompound 33 34 35 36 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Dow Corning 1900.01%   0.1%  — — Surfactant Ethanol 20% 10% 10% 20% 3M Fluorad — — 0.010.1%  Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.5%  1.0%  cyclodextrin methylated — — 1.0!0.75%   cyclodextrin Perfume 0-0.1%   0-0.1%   0-0.1%   0-0.1%   Waterbalance balance balance balance Examples 37 38 39 40 41 Ingredients Wt %Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 volatile silicone 1.0 0.5 — — — Silwet L-77 2.0 —— — — Silwet L-7657 — 1.0 0.5 — — Polysorbate 60⁽¹⁾ — — — 0.5 Perfume0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.05 Distilled Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ⁽¹⁾Amixture of stearate esters of sorbitol and sorbitol anhydride,consisting predominantly of the monoester, condensed with about 20 molesof ethylene oxide. Examples 42 43 44 45 46 47 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt %Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 volatile silicone 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.35 1.0 1.0 SilwetL-7602 0.7 — — — — — Silwet L-7622 — 0.5 — 0.7 — 0.8 Silwet L-7604 — —0.5 — — — Silwet L-7210 — — — 0.5 — — Silwet L-7001 — — — — 1.0 — SilwetL-7600 — — — — — 0.4 Perfume 0.1 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.03 0.05 Distilled waterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Examples 48 49 50 51 52 53 Ingredients Wt% Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Lithium bromide 3.0 — 2.0 1.0 2.5 — Lithiumlactate — 3.0 — — — 2.0 D5 volatile silicone 0.5 — — 0.25 — — Siliconeemulsion A⁽¹⁾ — 2.0 — 1.0 — — Silicone emulsion B⁽²⁾ — — 2.0 — — —Silwet L-7210 0.5 — — — 0.1 — Silwet L-7602 — 0.1 — — 0.1 — SilwetL-7622 — — 0.1 0.4 — — Perfume 0.1 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.03 — Distilled waterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ⁽¹⁾DC-2-5932 silicone microemulsion (25%active) from Dow Corning, with a particle size of about 24 nm, acationic surfactant system, and a silicone with an internal phaseviscosity of about 1,200 cps. ⁽²⁾DC-1550 silicone microemulsion (25%active) from Dow Corning, with a particle size of about 50 nm, ananionic/nonionic surfactant system, and a silicone with an internalphase viscosity of about 100,000 cps. Examples 54 55 56 57 58 59Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Luviset CA 66^((a)) 0.4 — — —— — Luviset CAP^((b)) — 0.5 — — — — Sokalan EG 310^((c)) — — 0.4 — — —Ultrahold CA 8^((d)) — — — 1.0 — — Amerhold DR-25^((e)) — — — — 0.75 —Poligen A^((f)) — — — — — 0.25 Silwet L-7600 0.15 — — — — — SilwetL-7602 — 0.25 — 0.2 0.4 — Silwet L-7604 — — 0.2 — — 0.15 Neodol 23-3 0.1— — 0.2 — — Diethylene glycol 0.3 — 0.1 0.5 0.2 0.15 Perfume 0.1 0.050.03 0.08 0.05 0.05 NaOH/HCl to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 7 TopH 7.2 Kathon CG 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm Distilled waterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ^((a))Vinyl acetate/crotonic acidcopolymer. ^((b))Vinyl acetate/vinyl propionate/crotonic acid copolymer.^((c))Polyvinylpyrrolidone/acrylic acid copolymer. ^((d))Ethyl acrylate/acrylic acid/N-t-butyl acrylamide copolymer. ^((e))Ethylacrylate/methacrylic acid/methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer.^((f))Polyacrylate dispersion.

Examples 60-65

The shape retention copolymer and the surfactant(s) are added withvigorous mixing into the water seat, which is pre-adjusted to about pH12 using an aqueous NaOH (30%) solution. As the copolymer is slowingdissolved, NaOH solution is added to maintain the high pH. After about 1hour of vigorous stirring, the composition is adjusted with HCl to thedesired pH. Finally, diethylene glycol, perfume and Kathon preservativeare added with agitation.

Examples 60 61 62 63 64 65

Examples 60 61 62 63 64 65 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %Luviset CA 66^((a)) 0.4 — — — — — Luviset CAP^((b)) — 0.5 — — — —Sokalan EG 310^((c)) — — 0.4 — — — Ultrahold CA 8^((d)) — — — 1.0 — —Amerhold DR-25^((e)) — — — — 0.75 — Poligen A^((f)) — — — — — 0.25Silwet L-7600 0.15 — — — — — Silwet L-7602 — 0.25 — 0.2 0.4 0.15 SilwetL-7604 — — 0.2 — — — Neodol 23-3 0.1 — — 0.2 — 0.15 Diethylene glycol0.3 — 0.1 0.5 0.2 — Perfume 0.1 0.05 0.03 0.08 0.05 0.05 NaOH/HCl to pHto pH to pH to pH to pH to pH 9 9 8 8 7 7.2 Kathon CG 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.^((a))Vinyl acetate/crotonic acid copolymer. ^((b))Vinyl acetate/vinylpropionate/crotonic acid copolymer. ^((c))Polyvinylpyrrolidone/acrylicacid copolymer. ^((d))Ethyl acrylate/acrylic acid/N-t-butyl acrylamidecopolymer. ^((e))Ethyl acrylate/methacrylic acid/methylmethacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer. ^((f))Polyacrylate dispersion.Examples 66 67 68 69 70 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % CopolymerE^((s)) 0.5 0.3 — — — Copolymer F^((t)) — — 0.6 0.4 — Copolymer G^((u))— — — — 0.5 Lithium bromide 2.0 — — 1.0 — D5 volatile silicone 0.25 —0.2 — 0.5 PDMS 10,000 cst — 0.25 — — — Silicone emulsion B — — — 1.0 —Silwet L-77 0.7 — 0.5 — 1.0 Silwet L-7604 — 0.25 — 0.5 — Compound 71 7273 74 75 Luviflex Soft¹ 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel ®² 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 PH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ¹Ethylacrylatemethacrylate copolymer, average MW = 250,000 from BASF²1,2-benzisothioazoline-3-one available from Zeneca. Compound 76 77 7879 80 Luviflex Soft 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015EtOH 3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 PH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal.Bal. Bal. Compound 81 82 83 84 85 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0Silwet ® L7001³ 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™ A200⁴ 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.03.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 PH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 WaterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ³Pendant copolymer of polydimethylsiloxane andethylene-oxide/propylene oxide with an average MW = 20,000 and an EO/POratio of 60/40 available from CK-Witco. ⁴Arabinoglactan polymeravailable from Larex ®, Inc. Compound 86 87 88 89 90 Luviflex Soft 0.30.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.50.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 CyclodextrinEthanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006⁵ 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.120.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.Bal. ⁵Aminotri(methylenphosphonic acid) penta sodium salt available fromCompound 91 92 93 94 95 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L70011.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-β-0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ®2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel ® 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound96 97 98 99 100 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.51.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.30.3 0.3 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound101 102 103 104 105 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2.0 Silwet ® L7200⁶1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-β-0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ®0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.Bal. ⁶Pendant copolymer of polydimethylsiloxane andethylene-oxide/propylene oxide with an average MW = 19,000 and an EO/POratio of 25/75 available from CK-Witco. Compound 106 107 108 109 110Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.0150.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compounds 111 112 113114 115 Diahold ME ®⁷ 0.1 0.5 1 1.5 3.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ⁷This material is at-butyl acrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer, 12,000approximate molecular weight) (60/20/20), copolymer of average molecularweight of about 128,000 available from Mitsubishi. Compound 116 117 118119 120 Diahold ME ® 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.30.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.0150.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 121 122 123124 125 Diahold ME ® 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.0150.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 126 127 128129 130 Diahold ME ® 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2.0 Silwet ® L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.30.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.0150.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 131 132 133134 135 Diahold ME ® 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2.0 Silwet ® L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.0150.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 136 137 138139 140 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.03.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 WaterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 141 142 143 144 145 Diahold ME ® 0.30.5 0.7 1.5 2.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.30.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound146 147 148 149 150 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001³0.75 1.5 — — 0.5 Silwet ® L7002 — — 0.8 1.0 0.5 Silwet ® L77 0.5 — 0.5 —— Dow Corning Q2-5211 — 0.30 — 0.6 0.5 LaraCare ™ A200⁴ 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.50.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.03.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 WaterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 151 152 153 154 155 Luviflex Soft 0.30.5 0.7 1.5 2 245 Fluid ®⁸ 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Silwet ® L77⁹ 2.0 2.0 2.02.0 2.0 Neodol ® 23-3¹⁰ 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.0150.015 0.015 Perfume 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 pH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.⁸Decamethylcylcopentasiloxane available from Dow Corning. ⁹Pendantcopolymer of polydimethyl siloxane and ethylenoxide with averagemolecular weight of 600, available from CK-Witco ¹⁰Alkyl ethoxylatesurfactant with 12-13 carbons and an average of three ethoxylate groupsavailable from Shell Compound 156 157 158 159 160 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.50.7 1.5 2 Silwet ® L77 2.5 — — 1.0 — Q2-5211¹¹ — 2.0 — — — 190Surfactant¹² — — 1.5 — — 190 Surfactant¹³ — — — 1.0 1.75 Proxel ® 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.040.02-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.¹¹Copolymer of polydimethylsiloxane and alkylene oxide available fromDow Corning ®. ¹²Copolymer of polydimethylsiloxane and alkylene oxideavailable from Dow Corning ®. ¹³Copolymer of polydimethylsiloxane andalkylene oxide available from Dow Corning ®. Compound 161 162 163 164165 Luviflex Soft 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 TEA Di-ester Quat¹⁴ 0.75 0.5 1.21.5 1.5 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 PH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ¹⁴Fabric softener active derived from the reactionof triethanol amine and fatty acid followed by quaternization with theprimary component named N,N-di-(canolyl-oxy-ethyl)-N-methyl-N-(2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium methyl sulfate, available from Goldschmidt.Compound 166 167 168 169 170 Luviflex Soft 5.0 0.5 6.0 1.5 3.0 TEADi-ester Quat 1.8 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH 5-6 5-65-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 171 172 173 174 175Luviflex Soft 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 DEEDMAC¹⁵ 0.75 0.5 1.2 1.5 1.5 Perfume0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel ® 0.015 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.¹⁵Ditallowoyl Ethanol Ester Dimethyl Ammonium Chloride, available fromGoldschmidt. Compound 176 177 178 179 180 Luviflex Soft 5.0 0.5 6.0 1.53.0 DEEDMAC 1.8 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH 5-6 5-65-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 181 182 183 184 185Luviflex Soft — 0.7 0.5 0.5 0.7 BC15-H 0.7 — 0.5 0.5 — 2-1084Emulsion ®¹⁶ 1.0 1.0 0.75 0.75 1.2 SM2128¹⁷ Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ¹⁶Decamethylcyclopentasiloxane emulsified with N-soyalkyl-2,2″imino-biehtyanol andethoxylated octadecanamine available from Dow Corning ®. ¹⁷Dimethylsiloxane emulsified with a nonionic emulsifier available from GESilicones. Compound 186 187 188 189 190 Luviflex Soft — 0.7 0.5 0.5 0.7BC15-H 0.7 — 0.5 0.5 — 2-1084 Emulsion ®¹⁶ 1.0 1.0 0.75 0.75 1.2SM2128¹⁷ Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 191 192 193 194 195 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.50.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™ A200⁴ 0.5 0.50.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.55.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 196 197198 199 200 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.03.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 WaterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 201 202 203 204 205 Luviflex Soft 0.30.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.30.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal.Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 206 207 208 209 210 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.71.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.50.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.03.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.120.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.Compound 211 212 213 214 215 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ®L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.120.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 216 217 218 219 220 LuviflexSoft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.03.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-65-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 221 222 223 224 225Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.120.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.0150.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.Compound 225 226 227 228 229 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ®L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.120.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.0150.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-65-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 230 231 232 233234 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.03.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 235 236 237 238 239 LuviflexSoft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrinEthanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.55.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound240 241 242 243 244 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.51.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.03.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 WaterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 245 246 247 248 249 Luviflex Soft 0.30.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.30.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal.Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 250 251 252 253 254 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.71.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.50.5 0.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.03.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 255 256 257 258 259 LuviflexSoft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ®2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel ® 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound260 261 262 263 264 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.51.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.03.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.120.02-0.12 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.55.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 265 266 267 268269 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5LaraCare ™ A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ® 2006 0.02-0.120.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 270 271 272 273 274 LuviflexSoft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ®2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 WaterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 275 276 277 278 279 Luviflex Soft 0.30.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.30.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest ® 20060.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.55.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 280 281 282 283284 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2.0 Silwet ® L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5Hydroxypropyl-β- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.03.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 WaterBal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 285 286 287 288 289 Luviflex Soft 0.30.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet ® L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.3 0.30.3 0.3 0.3 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel ® 0.0150.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound290 291 292 293 294 Luviflex Soft 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.0 DEEDMAC 0.7 1.02.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04EtOH 20 3 15 15 20 3M Fluorad ® 0.005 0.01 0.01 0.015 0.02 pH 5-6 5-65-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Fluorad is a nonionicfluorinated alkyl ester available from 3M Compound 295 296 297 298 299Luviflex Soft 0.5 0.5 0.1 0.2 3.0 TEA Di-ester Quat 1.8 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 3M Fluorad ®0.005 0.015 0.01 0.005 0.02 EtOH 20 10 15 10 20 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Compound 300 301 302 303 304 LuviflexSoft 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.0 DEEDMAC 0.7 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 EtOH 20 3 15 15 20 Dow Corning ®190 0.005 0.01 0.01 0.015 0.02 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal.Bal. Bal. Bal. Fluorad is a nonionic fluorinated alkyl ester availablefrom 3M Compound 305 306 307 308 309 Luviflex Soft 0.5 0.5 0.1 0.2 3.0TEA Di-ester Quat 1.8 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.040.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Dow Corning ® 190 0.005 0.015 0.01 0.0050.02 EtOH 20 10 15 10 20 PH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal.Bal. Bal. Examples^((q)) 310 311 312 313 314 315 Ingredients Wt % Wt %Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5Neodol ® 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet ® L77 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.01.0 C45 AS^((s)) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Perfume 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.030.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.Examples^((q)) 316 317 318 319 320 321 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5 Neodol ® 23-30.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet ® L77 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 C45AS^((s)) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Perfume 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.030.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8to pH 8 to pH 8 Kathon ® 0.003 0.0003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 Distilledwater Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Examples^((q)) 322 323 324 325 326327 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.52.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5 Neodol ® 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet ® L772.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Stepanol ® WAC^((t)) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Kathon 0.003 0.0003 0.003 0.003 0.0030.003 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Examples^((q)) 328329 330 331 332 333 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5Volatile Silicone 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 Neodol ® 23-3 0.75 0.25 1.00.25 0.5 0.25 Silwet ® L77 1.25 2.25 1.0 1.25 0.5 0.5 C45 AS^((s)) 0.10.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH +HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled water Bal.Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Examples^((q)) 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile 2.5 2.52.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Silicone Neodol 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.50.5 Silwet ® L77 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Stepanol ® 0.1 0.2 0.10.2 — — — — WAC^((t)) Biosoft ® D-40^((u)) — — — 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 Perfume0.025 0.03 0.025 0.03 0.03 0.025 0.03 0.025 NaOH + HCl — to pH 9 — to pH8 — to pH 8 — to pH 8 TEA + HCl to pH 8 — to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 9 —Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Examples^((q))342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt% Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 SiliconeNeodol ® 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 — — — — Neodol ® 23-2 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.5Silwet ® L77 — — 0.75 — 1.75 — — — Silwet ® L7280 2.0 — 0.75 0.5 — 1.751.0 — Silwet ® L7608 — 2.0 — 1.0 — — — 1.0 Silwet ® L7600 — — — — 0.25 —— 0.25 Silwet ® L7607 — — — — — 0.25 0.25 — Stepanol ® 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.20.1 0.2 0.1 WAC^((t)) Perfume 0.02 0.03 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.025 0.01 0.015NaOH + HCl to pH 9 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH8 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Examples^((q))350 355 356 357 358 359 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5 Neodol ® 23-3 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.50.5 0.3 Silwet ® L77 2.2 2.2 1.25 1.25 1.1 1.1 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.0250.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 topH 8 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Examples^((q)) 360361 362 363 364 365 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5 Neodol ® 23-3 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.50.5 0.3 Silwet ® L77 2.2 2.2 1.25 1.25 1.1 1.1 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.0250.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 topH 8 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ^((s))A sodium alkylsulfate made from C₁₄ and C₁₅ chain length alcohols. ^((t))Sodium laurylsulfate. ^((u))Sodium dodecyl benzene sulfonate. Examples VIIIExamples^((q)) 366 367 368 369 370 380 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 0.5 0.5 Neodol ® 23-3 0.50.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.0 Silwet ® L77 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.25 1.0 1.0 Perfume 0.0250.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 Diahold ® ME^((u)) 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 9 to pH 8 to pH 9 to pH 8 to pH 9 Distilledwater Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Examples^((q)) 381 382 383 384 385386 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.02.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 0.75 Neodol ® 23-3 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.3 Silwet ® L772.0 2.0 1.7 1.25 1.5 1.1 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.03 0.025 0.025 0.025Diahold ® ME^((v)) 0.25 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 9 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.Bal. ^((v))Acrylic acid/tert-butyl acrylate copolymer in which a numberof the acrylic acid units have been modified with polydimethyl siloxane(PDMS). The ratio of t-butyl acrylate to acrylic acid to PDMS modifiedacrylic acid units in the polymer is approximately 3:1:1 with the numberof PDMS repeat units being approximately 100 per polymer. Examples IXExamples^((q)) 388 389 390 391 392 393 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5 Neodol ® 23-30.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet ® L77 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Stepanol ®WAC^((t)) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 TEA Di-ester Quat^((w)) 0.2 0.3 0.50.7 1.0 1.25 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl topH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled water Bal. Bal.Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ^((w))Di(acyloxyethyl)(2-hydroxyethyl)methylammonium methyl sulfate where the acyl group is derived from partiallyhydrogenated canola fatty acid. Examples^((q)) 393 394 395 396Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0Neodol ® 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet ® L77 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Stepanol ®WAC^((t)) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 DBA Di-ester Quat^((x)) 0.2 0.5 — —DEEDMAC ®^((y)) — — 0.2 0.5 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HClto pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Kathon 0.003 0.0003 0.003 0.003Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. ^((x))Di(acyloxyethyl) dimethylammonium methyl sulfate where the acyl group is derived from partiallyhydrogenated canola fatty acid ^((y))Ditallowoyl Ethanol Ester DimethylAmmonium Chloride. Examples^((q)) 397 398 399 400 401 402 Ingredients Wt% Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Starch Silwet L7001 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5Silwet ® L77 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 TEADi-ester Quat^((w)) 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.25 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.0250.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 topH 8 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.

1. An article of manufacture for providing energy and/or environment conserving means to control and/or remove wrinkles from fabric, the article comprising: an aqueous wrinkle composition in a package; and a set of instructions associated with the package, the set of instructions comprising an instruction to control and/or remove wrinkles from fabric in an energy and/or environment conserving manner, by applying the aqueous wrinkle composition to wrinkled fabrics, manipulating fabrics to remove wrinkles and allowing the fabrics to dry without the use of an iron or tumble dryer.
 2. The article of claim 1, wherein the instructions describe and/or illustrate the steps of applying the composition to a fabric, manipulating the fabric to remove wrinkles, and allowing the treated fabric to dry with words, pictures, drawings and/or icons.
 3. The article of claim 2, wherein the instructions describe the manipulation of the fabric by hand.
 4. The article of claim 3, wherein the manipulation of the fabric is by pulling, tugging, shaking, snapping, smoothing, pressing the fabric between the hands, or a combination thereof.
 5. The article of claim 1, wherein the instructions further comprise an instruction to treat fabrics with the composition to prepare the fabrics for use or reuse as a substitute for laundering.
 6. The article of claim 1, wherein the package has a spray dispenser.
 7. The article of claim 6, wherein the spray dispenser is selected from the group consisting of a pump sprayer, aerosol sprayer, trigger sprayer, pre-compression sprayer, and non-manual power sprayer.
 8. The article of claim 1, wherein said instructions further comprise an instruction to apply the aqueous wrinkle composition in an amount from about 5% to about 150% by weight of the dry fabric.
 9. The article of claim 8, wherein said instructions comprise an instruction to apply the aqueous wrinkle composition in an amount from about 20% to about 75% by weight of the dry fabric.
 10. The article of claim 1, wherein the instructions further comprise an instruction to use the aqueous wrinkle composition as a substitute for ironing and/or laundering.
 11. The article of claim 10, wherein the instructions further comprise information on the energy conserved by controlling fabric wrinkles through the use of the aqueous wrinkle composition.
 12. The article of claim 11, wherein the instructions further comprise information on the energy conserved by preparing fabrics for use or reuse without laundering.
 13. The article of claim 1, wherein the instructions further comprises a recommendation and/or endorsement by a government agency, non-profit organization, utility provider, or a combination thereof.
 14. The article of claim 13, wherein the government agency is the U.S. Department of Energy.
 15. The article of claim 1, wherein the instructions are provided to a consumer via a communication from a utility service provider.
 16. The article of claim 1, wherein the instructions are provided via electronic or print media, or combinations thereof.
 17. The article of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises water and at least one of the following active: (A). less than about 15% by weight of the composition of low molecular weight water soluble or water miscible organic solvent; (B). from about 0.001% to about 10% of wrinkle control agent selected from the group of silicones, fiber-fabric lubricants, shape retention polymers, fabric care polysaccharides, and mixtures thereof; (C). an effective amount of surfactant; (D). an effective amount the composition of hydrophilic plasticizer; (E). an effective amount of odor control agent; (F). an effective amount of perfume; (G). an effective amount, to killof antimicrobial active; (H). a effective level of propellant; and/or (I). other optional ingredients to provide additional fabric care benefits comprising: fabric softening agent, color care agent, anti-shrinkage agent, water-soluble polyionic polymer, anti-static agent, insect repelling agent, moth repelling agent, colorant, anti-clogging agent, and/or viscosity control agent.
 18. The article of claim 17, wherein the composition comprises less than about 10% by weight of the composition of low molecular weight water soluble or water miscible organic solvent.
 19. The article of claim 1, wherein the composition has a uniform composition when at rest.
 20. A method for providing energy and/or environment conserving means to control and/or remove wrinkles from fabric, the method comprising: providing an aqueous wrinkle composition in a package; and providing a set of instructions associated with the package, the set of instructions comprising an instruction to control and/or remove wrinkles from fabric in an energy and/or environment conserving manner, by applying the aqueous wrinkle composition to wrinkled fabrics, manipulating fabrics to remove wrinkles and allowing the fabrics to dry without the use of an iron or tumble dryer.
 21. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions describe and/or illustrate the steps of applying the composition to a fabric, manipulating the fabric to remove wrinkles, and allowing the treated fabric to dry with words, pictures, drawings and/or icons.
 22. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions describe the manipulation of the fabric by hand.
 23. The method of claim 22, wherein the manipulation of the fabric is by pulling, tugging, shaking, snapping, smoothing, pressing the fabric between the hands, or a combination thereof.
 24. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions further comprise an instruction to treat fabrics with the composition to prepare the fabrics for use or reuse as a substitute for laundering.
 25. The method of claim 20, wherein the package has a spray dispenser.
 26. The method of claim 25, wherein the spray dispenser is selected from the group consisting of a pump sprayer, aerosol sprayer, trigger sprayer, pre-compression sprayer and non-manual power sprayer.
 27. The method of claim 20, wherein said instructions further comprise an instruction to apply the aqueous wrinkle composition in an amount from about 5% to about 150% by weight of the dry fabric.
 28. The method of claim 27, wherein said instructions comprise an instruction to apply the aqueous wrinkle composition in an amount from about 20% to about 75% by weight of the dry fabric.
 29. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions further comprise an instruction to use the aqueous wrinkle composition as a substitute for ironing and/or laundering.
 30. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions further comprise information on the energy conserved by controlling fabric wrinkles through the use of the aqueous wrinkle composition.
 31. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions further comprise information on the energy conserved by preparing fabrics for use or reuse without laundering.
 32. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions further comprise a recommendation and/or endorsement by a government agency, non-profit organization, utility provider, or a combination thereof.
 33. The article of claim 32, wherein the government agency is the U.S. Department of Energy.
 34. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions are provided to a consumer via a communication from a utility service provider.
 35. The method of claim 20, wherein the instructions are provided through electronic or print media, or combinations thereof.
 36. The method of claim 20, wherein the composition comprises water and at least one of the following active: (A). less than about 15% by weight of the composition of low molecular weight water soluble or water miscible organic solvent; (B). from about 0.001% to about 10% of wrinkle control agent selected from the group of silicones, fiber-fabric lubricants, shape retention polymers, fabric care polysaccharides, and mixtures thereof; (C). an effective amount of surfactant; (D). an effective amount the composition of hydrophilic plasticizer; (E). an effective amount of odor control agent; (F). an effective amount of perfume; (G). an effective amount, to killof antimicrobial active; (H). a effective level of propellant; and/or (I). other optional ingredients to provide additional fabric care benefits comprising: fabric softening agent, color care agent, anti-shrinkage agent, water-soluble polyionic polymer, anti-static agent, insect repelling agent, moth repelling agent, colorant, anti-clogging agent, and/or viscosity control agent.
 37. The method of claim 36, wherein the composition comprises less than about 10% by weight of the composition of low molecular weight water soluble or water miscible organic solvent.
 38. The method of claim 20, wherein the composition has a uniform composition when at rest.
 39. A method for teaching a consumer to conserve energy and/or the environment, the method comprising the step of informing a consumer that the treatment of wrinkled fabrics with a wrinkle control composition will enable the consumer to conserve energy by eliminating the need to use an iron to remove wrinkles from fabric and/or by eliminating the need to re-launder the fabric between each use.
 40. The method of claim 39, wherein the teaching is given via electronic and/or print media.
 41. A method for promoting the use of wrinkle control compositions, the method comprising the step of informing a consumer that the treatment of fabric with a wrinkle control composition will enable the consumer to conserve energy and/or the environment by eliminating the need to use an iron to remove wrinkles from fabric and/or by eliminating the need to re-launder the fabric between each use.
 42. The method of claim 40, wherein the promoting is provided via electronic and/or print media. 